Operation Manual
Cristina Bachmann, Heiko Bischoff, Christina Kaboth, Insa Mingers, Matthias Obrecht, Sabine Pfeifer, Benjamin Schütte, Marita Sladek This PDF provides improved access for vision-impaired users. Please note that due to the complexity and number of images in this document, it is not possible to include text descriptions of images. The information in this document is subject to change without notice and does not represent a commitment on the part of Steinberg Media Technologies GmbH.
Table of Contents 8 8 8 9 10 Introduction Platform-Independent Documentation About the Documentation Conventions Key Commands 11 11 18 21 Setting Up Your System Setting Up Audio Setting Up MIDI Connecting a Synchronizer 22 22 27 29 29 29 30 37 Audio Connections Audio Connections Window Renaming the Hardware Inputs and Outputs Adding Input and Output Busses Adding Child Busses (Cubase Pro only) Presets for Input and Output Busses Adding Group and FX Channels (Cubase Pro only) About Monitoring External
Table of Contents 215 217 218 219 220 221 221 222 223 224 232 Transport Transport Pop-Up Window Time Display Window Left and Right Locators Setting the Project Cursor Position Auto-Scroll Time Formats Pre-Roll and Post-Roll Punch In and Punch Out Metronome Click Chase 234 234 235 On-Screen Keyboard Recording MIDI With the On-Screen Keyboard On-Screen Keyboard Options 236 236 239 242 246 252 252 Recording Basic Recording Methods Monitoring Audio Recording Specifics MIDI Recording Specifics Remaining Re
Table of Contents 466 466 469 469 471 471 472 472 472 473 Hitpoints Calculating Hitpoints Locating to Hitpoints in the Project Window Slices Creating a Groove Quantize Map Creating Markers Creating Regions Creating Events Creating Warp Markers Creating MIDI Notes 475 475 476 476 478 478 480 482 482 Tempo Matching Audio Algorithm Presets Stretching Audio Events to the Project Tempo Musical Mode Auto Adjust Manual Adjust Free Warp Flattening Realtime Processing Unstretching Audio Files 484 484 485 486 48
Table of Contents 690 691 691 691 692 692 693 693 693 694 694 694 695 695 695 Extending MIDI Notes Fixing MIDI Note Lengths Fixing MIDI Note Velocities Rendering Sustain Pedal Data to Note Lengths Deleting Overlaps Editing Velocity Deleting Double Notes Deleting Controller Data Deleting Continuous Controller Data Restricting Polyphonic Voices Thinning Out Controller Data Extracting MIDI Automation Reversing the Playback Order of MIDI Events Inverting the Order of Selected MIDI Events Creating a Tempo Trac
Table of Contents 958 958 959 960 960 962 964 Video Video File Compatibility Frame Rates Video Output Devices Preparations for Creating Video Projects Preparations for Video Playback Editing Video 966 966 Exchanging Files with Other Applications OMF Files (Cubase Pro only) 970 970 970 971 971 972 972 973 ReWire Introduction Launching and quitting Activating ReWire channels Using the transport and tempo controls How the ReWire channels are handled Routing MIDI via ReWire Considerations and limitations
Introduction The documentation covers the following Steinberg products: Cubase Pro and Cubase Artist. Functions that are only available in Cubase Pro and not in Cubase Artist are clearly indicated. The screenshots are taken from Cubase Pro. Platform-Independent Documentation The documentation applies to the operating systems Windows and macOS. Features and settings that are specific to one of these platforms are clearly indicated.
Introduction Conventions HALion Sonic SE Describes the features and parameters of the included VST instrument HALion Sonic SE. Groove Agent SE Describes the features and parameters of the included VST instrument Groove Agent SE. Retrologue Describes the features and parameters of the included VST instrument Retrologue. MIDI Devices Describes how to manage MIDI Devices and device panels. VST Connect SE (Cubase Pro only) Describes how to work with the VST Connect SE features.
Introduction Key Commands If bold text is separated by a greater-than symbol, this indicates a sequence of different menus to open. EXAMPLE Select Project > Add Track. Key Commands Many of the default key commands, also known as keyboard shortcuts, use modifier keys, some of which are different depending on the operating system.
Setting Up Your System To use Cubase, you must set up your audio, and if required, your MIDI system. Setting Up Audio IMPORTANT Make sure that all equipment is turned off before making any connections. Simple Stereo Input and Output Setup If you only use a stereo input and output from Cubase, you can connect your audio hardware, for example, the inputs of your audio card or your audio interface, directly to the input source and the outputs to a power amplifier and speaker.
Setting Up Your System Setting Up Audio About Recording Levels and Inputs When you connect your equipment, make sure that the impedance and levels of the audio sources and inputs are matched. Using the correct type of input is important to avoid distortion or noisy recordings. For microphones, for example, different inputs can be used, such as consumer line level (-10 dBV) or professional line level (+4 dBu). Sometimes, you can adjust input characteristics on the audio interface or on its control panel.
Setting Up Your System Setting Up Audio 3. Do one of the following to open the control panel for your audio hardware: ● On Windows, click Control Panel. ● On macOS, click Open Config App. This button is available only for some hardware products. If it is not available in your setup, refer to the documentation of your audio hardware. NOTE The control panel is provided by the manufacturer of your audio hardware and is different for each audio interface brand and model.
Setting Up Your System Setting Up Audio ASIO-Guard Latency Shows the ASIO-Guard latency. HW Sample Rate Shows the sample rate of your audio hardware. HW Pull Up/Down Shows the pull up/down status of the audio hardware. Set to Defaults Allows you to restore the default settings. Processing Precision Allows you to set the audio processing precision to 64 bit. This way, all channels are processed and mixed in 64-bit floating point.
Setting Up Your System Setting Up Audio ASIO Driver Setup This section allows you to set up your ASIO driver. ● To open the section where you can set up the ASIO driver, select Studio > Studio Setup and select the audio driver in the Devices list. The following options are available: Control Panel Opens the control panel for the audio hardware. Input Latency Shows the input latency of the audio driver. Output Latency Shows the output latency of the audio driver.
Setting Up Your System Setting Up Audio Port System Name The system name of the port. Show As Allows you to rename the port. This name is used in the Input Routing and Output Routing pop-up menus. Visible Allows you to activate/deactivate audio ports. State The state of the audio port. Using External Clock Sources If you are using an external clock source, Cubase must be notified that it receives external clock signals and derives its speed from that source. PROCEDURE 1. Select Studio > Studio Setup. 2.
Setting Up Your System Setting Up Audio Audio Hardware Configuration Most audio cards provide one or more small applications that allow you to customize your hardware. The settings are normally gathered on a control panel that can be opened from within Cubase or separately, when Cubase is not running. For details, refer to the audio hardware documentation. Settings include: ● Selecting which inputs/outputs are active. ● Setting up word clock synchronization.
Setting Up Your System Setting Up MIDI Audio Bus Setup Cubase uses a system of input and output busses to transfer audio between the program and the audio hardware. ● Input busses let you route audio from the inputs of your audio hardware into Cubase. This means that audio is always recorded through one or several input busses. ● Output busses let you route audio from Cubase to the outputs of your audio hardware. This means that audio is always played back through one or several output busses.
Setting Up Your System Setting Up MIDI your own playing, edit the MIDI data in Cubase, and then play it back on the keyboard and record the audio that is coming out of the keyboard for a better edited performance. Showing or Hiding MIDI Ports You can specify if a MIDI port is listed on the MIDI pop-up menus in the program. PROCEDURE 1. Select Studio > Studio Setup. 2. In the Devices list, select MIDI Port Setup. 3. To hide a MIDI port, deactivate its Visible column. 4. Click OK.
Setting Up Your System Setting Up MIDI The following colums are displayed: Device The connected MIDI devices. I/O The port input/output status. Port System Name The system name of the port. Show As Allows you to rename the port. This name is used in the Input Routing and Output Routing pop-up menus. Visible Allows you to activate/deactivate MIDI ports. State The state of the MIDI port. In 'All MIDI Inputs' Allows you to record MIDI data from all MIDI inputs.
Setting Up Your System Connecting a Synchronizer Use System Timestamp for 'DirectMusic' Inputs Activate this option if you have persistent timing problems such as shifted notes. If this is activated, the system timestamp is used as a time reference. Plug and Play Support for USB MIDI Devices Cubase supports plug and play of USB MIDI devices. These devices can be plugged in and switched on while the application is running.
Audio Connections To play back and record in Cubase, you must set up input and output busses in the Audio Connections window. Here, you can also set up group and FX channels, external effects, external instruments, and the Control Room (Cubase Pro only). The bus types that you need depend on your audio hardware, on your general audio setup, for example your surround speaker setup, and on the projects that you use.
Audio Connections Audio Connections Window Speakers Indicates the speaker configuration (mono, stereo, surround formats (Cubase Pro only)) of each bus. Audio Device Shows the selected ASIO driver. Device Port Shows which physical inputs/outputs on your audio hardware are used by the bus. Expand the bus entry to show all speaker channels. If the bus entry is collapsed, only the first port that is used by this bus is visible. The Device Port pop-up menu displays how many busses are connected to a given port.
Audio Connections Audio Connections Window External FX Tab (Cubase Pro only) This tab allows you to create send effect or return busses. You can use these to connect external effects which can then be selected via the effect pop-up menus from inside the program. The following options are available above the bus list: +- All Expands/Collapses all busses in the bus list. Add External FX Opens the Add External FX dialog, where you can configure a new external FX.
Audio Connections Audio Connections Window Return Gain Allows you to adjust the level of the signal that the external effect sends. NOTE Excessive output levels from an external effect device can cause clipping in the audio hardware. You cannot use the Return Gain setting to compensate for this. You must lower the output level on the effect device instead.
Audio Connections Audio Connections Window The Device Port pop-up menu displays how many busses are connected to a given port. The busses are shown in square brackets next to the port name. Up to 3 bus assignments can be displayed in this way. If more connections have been made, this is indicated by a number at the end of the port name. For example, “Adat 1 [Stereo1] [Stereo2] [Stereo3] (+2)” means that the Adat1 port is already assigned to 3 stereo busses plus 2 additional busses.
Audio Connections Renaming the Hardware Inputs and Outputs ● Cue ● Headphone ● Monitor Presets Opens the Presets menu, where you can select bus configuration presets. Store allows you to save a bus configuration as preset. Delete preset. deletes the selected Enable/Disable Control Room Enables/Disables the Control Room. Open Control Room Opens the Control Room window. Configuration Displays the selected channel configuration.
Audio Connections Renaming the Hardware Inputs and Outputs NOTE If you open a project that was created on another computer and the port names do not match or the port configuration is not the same, the Missing Ports dialog appears. This allows you to manually re-route ports that are used in the project to ports that are available on your computer. PROCEDURE 1. Select Studio > Studio Setup. 2. In the Devices list, select VST Audio System. 3.
Audio Connections Adding Input and Output Busses Adding Input and Output Busses PROCEDURE 1. In the Audio Connections dialog, click the Inputs or Outputs tab. 2. Click Add Bus. 3. In the Add Input Bus dialog, configure the bus. 4. Optional: Enter a name for the bus. If you do not specify a name, the bus is named according to the channel configuration. 5. Click Add Bus. The new bus is added to the bus list. 6.
Audio Connections Adding Group and FX Channels (Cubase Pro only) ● Automatically created presets tailored to your specific hardware configuration. On startup, Cubase analyzes the physical inputs and outputs that are provided by your audio hardware and creates a number of hardware-dependent presets. ● Your own presets. NOTE You can create default presets for input and output bus configurations. If you create a new empty project, these default presets are applied.
Audio Connections About Monitoring 3. Configure the channel. 4. Optional: Enter a name for the group channel track. 5. Click Add Track. The group channel or FX channel is added to the bus list. 6. For each of the speaker channels in the bus, click in the Output Routing column and select a port of your audio hardware.
Audio Connections External Instruments and Effects (Cubase Pro only) IMPORTANT If you select input/output ports for external instruments/effects that are already used, the existing port assignment breaks without warning. AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK Once the external device is connected to the audio hardware of your computer, you must set up the input/output busses in Cubase. Setting Up External Effects PROCEDURE 1. In the Audio Connections window, click the External FX tab. 2. Click Add External FX. 3.
Audio Connections External Instruments and Effects (Cubase Pro only) Adding External Effects You can use the external FX bus as an insert effect or as a send effect, which is an insert effect on an FX channel track. PREREQUISITE Set up your external effects in the Audio Connections window. PROCEDURE 1. In the Inspector, open the Inserts panel. 2. Open the Select Insert menu. 3. Select an external effect from the External Plug-ins submenu.
Audio Connections External Instruments and Effects (Cubase Pro only) Measure Effect’s Loop Delay for Delay Compensation If this option is activated, Cubase automatically determines the delay value that is used for delay compensation. This is the same function as the Check User Delay option in the Audio Connections window. When you have defined a MIDI device for the effect, the corresponding device window opens. Delay Allows you to adjust the delay for the external effect.
Audio Connections External Instruments and Effects (Cubase Pro only) 4. Click Add Track. RESULT The external instrument is added to the VST instruments list. A parameter window for the external instrument opens. This can either be the device window that allows you to create a generic device panel, an OPT editor window, or a default editor. External Instruments Parameter Window This window allows you to make delay and gain settings for the selected external instrument.
Audio Connections External Instruments and Effects (Cubase Pro only) RELATED LINKS Delay Compensation on page 631 Saving External Instrument and Effect Configurations as Favorites You can save external instruments and external effects as favorites. Favorites are device configurations that you can recall. They also allow you to save different configurations for the same device, for example, a multi-effect board or an effect that provides both a mono and a stereo mode.
Audio Connections Editing the Bus Configurations NOTE Busses that are set up for external instruments or external effects are saved globally, that is, for your particular computer setup. Editing the Bus Configurations After you have set up all the required busses for a project you can edit the names and change port assignments. The bus configuration is saved with the project. Removing Busses PROCEDURE ● In the Audio Connections window, right-click a bus in the list and select Remove Bus.
Audio Connections Editing the Bus Configurations Identifying Exclusive Port Assignments For certain channel types, the port assignment is exclusive. Once a port has been assigned to such a bus or channel, it must not be assigned to another bus, otherwise the connection to the first bus will be broken. The corresponding ports are marked in the Audio Connections window on the Device Port popup menu.
Project Window The Project window provides an overview of the project, and allows you to navigate and perform large scale editing. Each project has one Project window. The Project window is displayed whenever you open or create a new project. ● To open a project, select File > Open. ● To create a new project, select File > New Project.
Project Window Showing/Hiding Zones On the toolbar, you can activate/deactivate the status line, the info line, the overview line, and the transport. 3 Lower Zone The lower zone shows the Chord Pads, the Editor, the Sampler Control, and the MixConsole. 4 Right Zone The right zone shows the VSTi rack, the Media rack, the Control Room rack (Cubase Pro only), and the Meter rack (Cubase Pro only).
Project Window Project Zone RELATED LINKS Track List on page 45 Event Display on page 46 Global Track Controls on page 46 Ruler on page 47 Status Line on page 49 Info Line on page 49 Overview Line on page 50 Transport on page 50 Toolbar The toolbar contains tools and shortcuts for opening other windows and various project settings and functions. ● To show/hide tools, open the toolbar context menu by right-clicking in an empty area of the toolbar and activate the tools that you want to display.
Project Window Project Zone Constrain Delay Compensation Allows you to minimize the latency effects of the delay compensation. Left Divider Allows you to use the left divider. Tools that are placed to the left of the divider are always shown. Media & MixConsole Windows These buttons allow you to open or close the MediaBay, the Pool, the MixConsole, the Control Room (Cubase Pro only), and the Direct Offline Processing (Cubase Pro only).
Project Window Project Zone Time Display Shows the position of the project cursor in the selected time format. Markers Allows you to set and locate marker positions. Tool Buttons Shows the buttons for editing in the project zone. Color Menu Allows you to define the project colors. Nudge Palette Allows you to nudge or trim events or parts. Project Root Key Allows you to change the root key of the project.
Project Window Project Zone Right Divider Allows you to use the right divider. Tools that are placed to the right of the divider are always shown. Window Zone Controls Allows you to show or hide the left zone, the lower zone, and the right zone of the Project window. The Setup Window Layout pop-up menu allows you to show or hide the status line, the info line, the overview line, and the Transport. Set Up Toolbar Opens a pop-up menu where you can set up which toolbar elements are visible.
Project Window Project Zone Track List The track list shows the tracks that are used in the project. When a track is added and selected, it contains name fields and settings for this track. ● To decide which controls are visible for each track type, right-click the track list and open the Track Controls Settings dialog. RELATED LINKS Track Control Settings on page 97 Dividing the Track List You can divide the track list into an upper track list and a lower track list.
Project Window Project Zone Event Display The event display shows the parts and events that are used in the project. They are positioned along the timeline. Global Track Controls The global track controls above the track list allows you to manage the tracks in the track list. 1 Filter Track Types Allows you to determine which track types are shown in the track list. 2 Number of Visible Tracks Displays how many tracks are hidden.
Project Window Project Zone RELATED LINKS Opening the Track Visibility on page 59 Filtering Track Types PROCEDURE 1. Click Filter Track Types above the track list. This opens the track types filter. 2. Uncheck a track type to hide it. RESULT Tracks of the filtered type are removed from the track list and the color of the Filter Track Types button changes to indicate that a track type is hidden. Finding Tracks The Find Tracks function allows you to find specific tracks.
Project Window Project Zone ● To select an independent display format for the ruler, click the arrow button to the right of the ruler and select an option from the pop-up menu. ● To set the display format globally for all windows, use the primary display format pop-up on the Transport panel, or hold down Ctrl/Cmd and select a display format in any ruler. RELATED LINKS Project Setup Dialog on page 88 Ruler Display Formats You can select a display format for the ruler.
Project Window Project Zone Status Line The status line shows the most important project settings. To activate the status line, click Set up Window Layout on the toolbar and activate Status Line. The following information is shown on the status line: Audio Inputs/Audio Outputs These fields are shown if the audio device ports are not connected. Click to open the Audio Connections dialog and connect the ports. Max.
Project Window Project Zone For example, you have selected two audio events. The first event has a length of 1 bar, the second of 2 bars. If you change the info line value to 3, the first event is resized to 3 bars and the second event to 4 bars. ● Value changes are applied absolutely to the current values if you press Ctrl/Cmd while modifying the value on the info line. In the example above, both events are resized to 3 bars.
Project Window Project Zone Common Record Modes Allow you to determine what happens if you click Record during an audio or MIDI recording. Audio Record Modes Allow you to select what happens when you record over existing audio events. MIDI Record Modes Allow you to select what happens when you record over existing MIDI parts. Left Divider Allows you to use the left divider. Tools that are placed to the left of the divider are always shown.
Project Window Left Zone Allows you to activate/deactivate the tempo track, and to set the tempo value and the first time signature value numerically. External Sync State Allows you to activate/deactivate external synchronization and to open the Project Synchronization Setup dialog. Click & Count-In & Click Pattern Allows you to activate/deactivate the metronome click, the metronome click in countin, and the click pattern. Right Divider Allows you to use the right divider.
Project Window Left Zone RELATED LINKS Inspector on page 53 Visibility on page 59 Inspector The Inspector allows you to show controls and parameters for either the selected track in the track list or the event or part that is shown in the editor in the lower zone. If the Inspector tab is activated at the top of the left zone, the bottom of the left zone features two tabs: Track and Editor. ● Click the Track tab to open the Track Inspector for the selected track.
Project Window Left Zone RELATED LINKS Opening the Track Inspector on page 54 Opening the Editor Inspector on page 55 Opening the Editor in the Lower Zone on page 65 Opening the Track Inspector The Track Inspector shows controls and parameters for the selected track in the track list. PROCEDURE 1. Click Show/Hide Left Zone on the Project window toolbar to activate the Left Zone. 2. At the bottom of the left zone, click the Track tab.
Project Window Left Zone RESULT The Track Inspector for the selected track in the track list is opened. If more than one track is selected, the controls and parameters for the topmost selected track are shown. Opening the Editor Inspector The Editor Inspector shows controls and parameters for the event or part that is shown in the editor in the lower zone. PREREQUISITE The Sample Editor, the Key Editor, the Drum Editor or the Score Editor is shown in the lower zone. PROCEDURE 1.
Project Window Left Zone RESULT The Editor Inspector for the event or part that is shown in the editor in the lower zone is opened. NOTE The Editor Inspector only contains information if the lower zone shows an editor. Otherwise, it is empty. RELATED LINKS Opening the Editor in the Lower Zone on page 65 Selecting a different Inspector for the Score Editor (Cubase Pro only) The Score Editor Inspector allows you to select the following tabs: Inspector and Symbols.
Project Window Left Zone RESULT The selected Inspector is shown. RELATED LINKS Key Editor Inspector on page 713 Inspector Sections The Track Inspector and the Editor Inspector are divided into a number of sections that each contain different controls for the track, event or part. Not all Inspector sections are shown by default. The available sections depend on the type of the selected track, event, or part, and on the settings in the setup dialog for the Track Inspector/Editor Inspector.
Project Window Left Zone ● To open the Setup dialog for the Editor Inspector settings, click Setup Inspector the Editor Inspector, and from the pop-up menu select Setup. NOTE This is only available for the Key Editor, the Drum Editor and the Score Editor. Hidden Items Displays sections that are hidden in the Inspector. Visible Items Displays sections that are visible in the Inspector.
Project Window Left Zone Remove Allows you to move an item selected in the visible sections list to the list of hidden sections. Move Up/Move Down Allows you to change the order of an item in the list of visible sections. Presets Allows you to save Inspector section settings as presets. Reset All Allows you to restore the default Inspector section settings.
Project Window Left Zone RESULT The Track Visibility for your project is shown. RELATED LINKS Showing/Hiding Individual Tracks on page 60 Showing/Hiding Individual Tracks The Track Visibility shows a list of all tracks of your project. This list allows you to show and hide individual tracks. ● To show/hide a track in the track list, check/uncheck it by clicking to the left of the track name. ● To activate/deactivate several tracks at the same time, select them and press Return.
Project Window Left Zone Synchronizing Track and Channel Visibility You can synchronize the track visibility in the Project window with the channel visibility in a separate MixConsole window. PROCEDURE 1. At the top of the left zone, open the Visibility tab. 2. At the bottom of the left zone, open the Track tab. 3. Click the equals sign to open the Sync Visibility of Project and MixConsole: On/Off menu. 4.
Project Window Lower Zone RESULT The MixConsole is opened in the lower zone, and the Zones Visibility for the MixConsole in the lower zone is shown in the left zone. RELATED LINKS Opening MixConsole in the Lower Zone on page 64 Lower Zone The lower zone of the Project window allows you to display specific windows and editors in an integrated and fixed zone of the Project window. This is useful if you work on single screen systems and notebooks, for example.
Project Window Lower Zone RELATED LINKS Opening Chord Pads on page 63 Opening MixConsole in the Lower Zone on page 64 Opening Sampler Control on page 65 Opening the Editor in the Lower Zone on page 65 Setting up the Lower Zone In the lower zone, the tabs MixConsole, Editor, Sampler Control, and Chord Pads are shown. You can change the order of these tabs, and you can hide tabs that you do not need. PROCEDURE 1. Click Set up Lower Zone in the bottom right of the lower zone. 2.
Project Window Lower Zone RESULT The Chord Pads are opened. RELATED LINKS Chord Pads on page 832 Setting up the Lower Zone on page 63 Opening MixConsole in the Lower Zone The MixConsole in the lower zone allows you to perform all basic mixing procedures from within the lower zone of the Project window, and at the same time to see the context of your tracks and events. PROCEDURE 1. Click Show/Hide Lower Zone on the Project window toolbar to activate the lower zone. 2.
Project Window Lower Zone RESULT The MixConsole is opened in the lower zone. RELATED LINKS MixConsole in Lower Zone on page 316 Opening Sampler Control Sampler Control allows you display and edit the waveform of an audio sample on a sampler track. PROCEDURE 1. Click Show/Hide Lower Zone on the Project window toolbar to activate the lower zone. 2. At the bottom of the lower zone, click the Sampler Control tab. RESULT Sampler Control is opened.
Project Window Lower Zone RESULT Depending on your event or part selection the lower zone shows either the Audio Part Editor, the Sample Editor or one of the MIDI Editors. NOTE To change the default MIDI editor, select MIDI > Set up Editor Preferences, and select an option from the Default MIDI Editor pop-up menu. NOTE If you open the editor and no event or part is selected, the editor in the lower zone is empty.
Project Window Lower Zone RESULT The MIDI part is displayed in the selected editor. NOTE This selection is temporary. Next time you open the MIDI part, the default MIDI editor is used. Link Project and Lower Zone Editor Cursors You can link cursors and zoom factors of the project zone and the Key Editor, Drum Editor, and the Audio Part Editor in the lower zone. NOTE The ruler display format setting is not affected by this function.
Project Window Right Zone If you activate Link Project and Lower Zone Editor Cursors, the cursors and zoom factors are linked in the event displays of the project zone and the lower zone. This is useful if you edit in both zones and you want to keep the same position in view. NOTE In the Key Commands dialog in the Edit category, you can assign a key command for this.
Project Window Right Zone NOTE You can show/hide specific tabs from the right zone by right-clicking a tab header and activating/ deactivating the options in the context menu. RELATED LINKS VSTi Rack in the Right Zone on page 70 Media Rack in the Right Zone on page 72 Opening the VSTi Rack in the Right Zone You can show the VSTi rack in the right zone of the Project window. This allows you to add and edit VST instruments, and at the same time to see the context of your tracks and events. PROCEDURE 1.
Project Window Right Zone VST Instruments on page 623 VSTi Rack in the Right Zone The VSTi rack in the right zone of the Project window allow you to add and edit VST instruments in the context of the Project window. The following sections are available: ● Track Shows the associated VST instrument for an instrument track. ● Rack Shows a VST instrument.
Project Window Right Zone Opening the Media Rack in the Right Zone You can show the Media rack in the right zone of the Project window. This allows you to see the context of your tracks and events when you drag audio events, MIDI parts, presets, or instruments into the Project window. PROCEDURE 1. Click Show/Hide Right Zone on the Project window toolbar to activate the Right Zone. 2. At the top of the right zone, click the Media tab.
Project Window Right Zone Media Rack in the Right Zone The Media rack in the right zone of the Project window allows you to drag audio events, MIDI parts, or instrument presets into the event display. It lists Steinberg factory content and any installed Steinberg content sets. The Media rack Home page is divided into several sections: Search Allows you to search media files by name or by attribute. Navigation Controls Allow you to go back to the previous page, to the Home page , or to any subpage.
Project Window Right Zone File Browser Tile Shows your file system and the pre-defined folders Favorites, This Computer, VST Sound, Factory Content, and User Content where you can search for media files and access them immediately. RELATED LINKS Favorites Section on page 555 Media Rack in Right Zone on page 546 MediaBay on page 546 Opening the Control Room in the Right Zone (Cubase Pro only) You can show the Control Room in the right zone of the Project window. PROCEDURE 1.
Project Window Keyboard Focus in the Project Window RESULT The Meter is opened in the right zone of the Project window. It has exactly the same features as the Meter that you open in the right zone of the MixConsole. RELATED LINKS Metering and Loudness (Cubase Pro only) on page 384 Keyboard Focus in the Project Window The different zones in the Project window can be controlled by using key commands.
Project Window Zooming in the Project Window Lower Zone on page 62 Right Zone on page 68 Project Window on page 39 Activating Keyboard Focus for a Zone You can activate the keyboard focus for a zone by clicking with the mouse and by using key commands. PROCEDURE ● Do one of the following: ● To activate any zone, click in it. ● To activate the next zone, press Tab. This allows you to cycle forward through the zones. ● To activate the previous zone, press Shift-Tab.
Project Window Zooming in the Project Window NOTE If the Grid Type in the Project window toolbar is set to Adapt to Zoom, the horizontal zoom level affects the grid and snap resolution in the event display. Zooming Vertically ● Select the Zoom tool, click in the event display, and drag a selection rectangle to zoom in vertically and horizontally. NOTE For this to work, you must deactivate the Zoom Tool Standard Mode: Horizontal Zooming Only option in the Preferences dialog (Editing—Tools page).
Project Window Zooming in the Project Window Zoom In/Out Zooms in/out one step, centering on the project cursor. Zoom Full Zooms out so that the whole project is visible. The whole project means the timeline from the project start to the length set in the Project Setup dialog. Zoom to Selection Zooms in horizontally and vertically so that the current selection fills the screen. Zoom to Selection (Horiz.) Zooms in horizontally so that the current selection fills the screen.
Project Window Zooming in the Project Window ● To save the current zoom setting as a preset, open the Zoom Presets pop-up menu and select Add. In the Type In Preset Name dialog that opens, type in a name for the preset and click OK. ● To select and apply a preset, select it from the Zoom Presets pop-up menu. ● To zoom out so that the whole project is visible, open the Zoom Presets pop-up menu and select Zoom Full.
Project Window Snap Function Zoom History You can undo and redo zoom operations. This way you can zoom in several steps and then easily go back to the zoom stage at which you started. You can undo and redo zoom operations in the following ways: ● To undo zoom, select Edit > Zoom > Undo Zoom or double-click with the zoom tool. ● To redo zoom, select Edit > Zoom > Redo Zoom or press Alt and double-click with the zoom tool.
Project Window Snap Function Snap Types You can select between different snap types to determine the snap point. ● To select a snap type, open the Snap Type pop-up menu. The following snap types are available: Grid If this option is activated, the snap points are set with the Grid Type pop-up menu. The options depend on the display format that is selected for the ruler. If you select Seconds as ruler format, time-based grid options are available.
Project Window Snap Function The same principle works when changing the order of more than two events. Magnetic Cursor This grid type lets the project cursor become magnetic. Dragging an event near the cursor causes the event to be aligned with the cursor position. Grid + Cursor This is a combination of Grid and Magnetic Cursor. Events + Cursor This is a combination of Events and Magnetic Cursor. Events + Grid + Cursor This is a combination of Events, Grid, and Magnetic Cursor.
Project Window Cross-Hair Cursor If you activate Time Linear in the ruler context menu, the distances between the grid lines are still constant but based on musical values such as bars and beats. RELATED LINKS Snap Types on page 80 Zooming in the Project Window on page 75 Ruler Display Formats on page 48 Cross-Hair Cursor The cross-hair cursor is displayed when working in the Project window and in the editors, facilitating navigation and editing, especially when arranging large projects.
Project Window Edit History Dialog The Action column displays the name of the action while the Time column tells you when this action was performed. In the Details column further details are shown. Here you can enter new text by double-clicking in the column. ● To undo your actions, move the horizontal, colored line upwards to the desired position. You can only undo your actions in reverse order, for example, the last performed action is the first action to be undone.
Project Handling In Cubase, projects are the central documents. You must create and set up a project to work with the program. Creating New Projects You can create empty projects or projects that are based on a template. PROCEDURE 1. Select File > New Project. Depending on your settings, either the Hub or the Project Assistant dialog opens. 2. 3. In the location options section, select where to store the new project. ● To use the default location, select Use default location.
Project Handling Hub Hub When you start Cubase or create new projects using the File menu, the Hub opens. The Hub keeps you up to date with the latest information and assists you with organizing your projects. It consists of the News and Tutorials section and the Projects section. News and Tutorials section The News and Tutorials section displays Steinberg news, tutorial videos as well as links to the user forum, downloads, and the Help Center.
Project Handling Project Assistant RELATED LINKS Project Assistant on page 86 Deactivating the Hub To start Cubase or to create new projects without the Hub, you can deactivate it. PROCEDURE 1. In the Preferences dialog, select General. 2. Deactivate Use Hub. RESULT Cubase starts without opening a project and opens the Project Assistant dialog when you create a new project using the File menu. However, you can still open the Hub through the Hub menu.
Project Handling About Template Files ● Track Pictures About Template Files Templates can be a good starting point for new projects. Templates are projects where you can save all settings that you regularly use, such as bus configurations, sample rates, record formats, basic track layouts, VSTi setups, drum map setups, etc. The following template types are available from within the Hub: ● Factory templates for specific scenarios.
Project Handling Project Setup Dialog 5. Click the Value field of the Template Category attribute and select a template category from the pop-up menu. If you do not select a category, the new template will be listed in the Hub in the More category. 6. Click OK to save the template. Renaming Templates PROCEDURE 1. In the Hub or the Project Assistant, right-click a template and select Rename. 2. In the Rename dialog, enter a new name and click OK.
Project Handling Project Setup Dialog author in the Default Author Name field in the Preferences dialog (General— Personalization page). Company Allows you to specify a company name that is written into the file, when you export audio files and activate the Insert iXML chunk option. You can specify a default company in the Default Company Name field in the Preferences dialog (General— Personalization page). Start Allows you to specify the start time of the project in timecode format.
Project Handling Project Setup Dialog keeps the audio quality absolutely pristine. Effect processing and level or EQ changes in the input channel are done in 32 Bit Float format. If you record at 16 or 24 Bit, the audio will be converted to this lower resolution when it is written to a file. As a result, the signal may degrade. This is independent of the actual resolution of your audio hardware.
Project Handling Opening Project Files HMT Depth (MIDI only) Allows you to specify the overall degree of retuning. RELATED LINKS Record - Audio on page 1032 Opening Project Files You can open one or several saved project files at the same time. IMPORTANT If you open a project saved with a different program version that contains data for functions that are not available in your version, this data may be lost when you save the project with your version.
Project Handling Saving Project Files ● In the category bar of the Hub or the Project Assistant dialog, click Recent, select a project from the projects list, and click Open. ● Select File > Recent Projects and select a recently opened project. Re-Routing Missing Ports If you open a Cubase project that was created on a different system with other audio hardware, Cubase tries to find matching audio inputs and outputs for the input/output busses.
Project Handling Reverting to the Last Saved Version Saving Project Files As a New Version You can create and activate a new version of an active project file. This is useful if you are experimenting with edits and arrangements and want to be able to go back to a previous version at any time. To save a new version of the active project, do one of the following: ● Select File > Save New Version. ● Press Ctrl/Cmd-Alt-S.
Project Handling Creating Self-Contained Projects Preparing Archives The Prepare Archive function allows you to gather all files that are referenced by your project to ensure that these are in the project folder. This is useful if you want to move or archive your project. PROCEDURE 1. Select Media > Prepare Archive. If your project references external files, you are prompted if you want to copy them to your working directory.
Project Handling Creating Self-Contained Projects sections of large files. It also means that you cannot use other parts of the audio files if you continue working with the project in its new folder. Freeze Direct Offline Processing Allows you to flatten all edits and make all processing and applied effects permanent to each clip in the Pool. Remove Unused Files Allows you to remove unused files and to back up only the files that are actually used.
Tracks Tracks are the building blocks of your project. They allow you to import, add, record, and edit data (parts and events). Tracks are listed from top to bottom in the Track list and extend horizontally across the Project window. Each track is assigned to a particular channel strip in the MixConsole. If you select a track in the Project window, the controls, settings, and parameters displayed in the Inspector and the track list allow you to control the track.
Tracks Track Control Settings Hidden Items Displays sections that are hidden in the Inspector. Visible Items Displays sections that are visible in the Inspector. Pin If you activate Pin by clicking the column for a section the open/close status of the selected Inspector section is pinned. Add Allows you to move an item selected in the hidden sections list to the list of visible sections. Remove Allows you to move an item selected in the visible sections list to the list of hidden sections.
Tracks Track Control Settings Track Type Allows you to select the track type to which your settings are applied. Hidden Controls Displays controls that are hidden in the track list. Visible Controls Displays controls that are visible in the track list. Width If you click in this column, you can set the maximum length for the track name. Group Displays the group number. Add Allows you to move an item selected in the hidden controls list to the list of visible controls.
Tracks Audio Tracks Reset Allows you to restore all default track controls settings for the selected track type. Controls Area Preview Shows a preview of the customized track controls. Controls Area Width Allows you to determine the width of the track control area for the selected track type. In the Controls Area Preview, this area is shown with a frame. Presets Allows you to save track controls settings as presets. To recall a preset, click Switch Presets in the bottom right corner of the track list.
Tracks Audio Tracks Edit Opens the Channel Settings window for the track. Mute Mutes the track. Solo Solos the track. Read Automation Allows you to read track automation. Write Automation Allows you to write track automation. Open Device Panels (Cubase Pro only) Allows you to create a device panel for the plug-in and device parameters of your track. Auto Fades Settings Opens a dialog where you can make separate audio fade settings for the track. Record enable Activates the track for recording.
Tracks Audio Tracks Allows you to adjust the level for the track. Pan Allows you to adjust the panning of the track. Delay Allows you to adjust the playback timing of the track. Load/Save/Reload Track Preset Loads or saves a track preset or reverts the default presets. Input Routing Allows you to specify the input bus for the track. Output Routing Allows you to specify the output bus for the track.
Tracks Audio Tracks Inserts Allows you to add insert effects to the track. Strip Allows you to set up the channel strip modules. Equalizers Allows you to adjust the EQs for the track. You can have up to four bands of EQ for each track. Sends Allows you to route the track to one or several FX channels.
Tracks Audio Tracks Cue Sends (Cubase Pro only) Allows you to route cue mixes to Control Room cues. Direct Routing Allows you to set up direct routing. Surround Pan (Cubase Pro only) Shows the panner for a track.
Tracks Audio Tracks Fader Shows a duplicate of the corresponding MixConsole channel. Notepad Allows you to enter notes about the track. Device Panel (Cubase Pro only) Allows you to display and use device panels. Quick Controls Allows you to configure quick controls to use remote devices, for example. Audio Track Controls The Track List for audio tracks contains controls and parameters that allow you to edit your audio track.
Tracks Audio Tracks Track name Double-click to rename the track. Edit Opens the Channel Settings window for the track. Mute Mutes the track. Solo Solos the track. Read Automation Allows you to read track automation. Write Automation Allows you to write track automation. Record enable Activates the track for recording. Monitor Routes incoming signals to the selected output. Toggle Time Base Switches between musical (tempo related) and linear (time related) time base for the track.
Tracks Instrument Tracks Channel Configuration Shows the channel configuration of the track. Listen The listen indicator is lit if the track is in listen mode. Freeze Channel Opens the Freeze Channel Options dialog that allows you to set the Tail Size time in seconds. Instrument Tracks You can use instrument tracks for dedicated VST instruments. Each instrument track has a corresponding instrument channel in the MixConsole. An instrument track can have any number of automation tracks.
Tracks Instrument Tracks Solos the track. Read Automation Allows you to read track automation. Write Automation Allows you to write track automation. Open Device Panels Allows you to open the instrument panel. Input Transformer Opens the Input Transformer dialog that allows you to transform incoming MIDI events in realtime. Record enable Activates the track for recording. Monitor Routes incoming MIDI to the selected MIDI output.
Tracks Instrument Tracks Load/Save/Reload Track Preset Loads or saves a track preset or reverts the default presets. Input Routing Allows you to specify the input bus for the track. Activate Outputs This control is only available if the instrument provides more than one output. It allows you to activate one or more outputs for the instrument. Edit Instrument Allows you to open the instrument panel. Programs Allows you to select a program. Drum Map Allows you to select a drum map for the track.
Tracks Instrument Tracks Chords Allows you to specify how the track follows the chord track. Expression Map Allows you to use the Expression Map features. Note Expression Allows you to work with the Note Expression features.
Tracks Instrument Tracks Allows you to transpose or adjust the velocity of the MIDI track events in realtime during playback. MIDI Inserts Allows you to add MIDI insert effects. Instrument Section Shows the audio-related controls for the instrument. Notepad Allows you to enter notes about the track. Device Panel (Cubase Pro only) Allows you to display and use device panels. Quick Controls Allows you to configure quick controls to use remote devices, for example.
Tracks Instrument Tracks Instrument Track Controls The Track List for instrument tracks contains controls and parameters that allow you to edit your instrument track. Mute Mutes the track. Solo Solos the track. Track name Double-click to rename the track. Record enable Activates the track for recording. Monitor Allows you to route incoming MIDI signals to the selected MIDI output. For this to work, activate MIDI Thru Active in the Preferences dialog (MIDI page).
Tracks Instrument Tracks Allows you to select a program. Bypass Inserts Bypasses the inserts for the track. Bypass EQs Bypasses the equalizers for the track. Bypass Sends Bypasses the sends for the track. Instrument Allows you to select an instrument. Listen The listen indicator is lit if the track is in listen mode. Edit In-Place Allows you to edit MIDI events and parts on the track in the Project window. Lock Disables all editing of all events on the track.
Tracks MIDI Tracks MIDI Tracks You can use MIDI tracks for recording and playing back MIDI parts. Each MIDI track has a corresponding MIDI channel in the MixConsole. A MIDI track can have any number of automation tracks. ● To add a MIDI track to your project, select Project > Add Track > MIDI. MIDI Track Inspector The Inspector for MIDI tracks contains controls and parameters that allow you to control your MIDI track. These affect MIDI events in realtime, on playback, for example.
Tracks MIDI Tracks Input Transformer Opens the Input Transformer dialog that allows you to transform incoming MIDI events in realtime. Record enable Activates the track for recording. Monitor Routes incoming MIDI to the selected MIDI output. For this to work, activate MIDI Thru Active in the Preferences dialog (MIDI page). Toggle Time Base Switches between musical (tempo related) and linear (time related) time base for the track. Lock Disables all editing of all events on the track.
Tracks MIDI Tracks Allows you to open the instrument panel. Bank Selector Allows you to set a bank select message that is sent to your MIDI device. Program Selector Allows you to set a program change message that is sent to your MIDI device. Drum Map Allows you to select a drum map for the track. MIDI Track Inspector Sections Apart from the basic track settings that are always shown, MIDI tracks provide other Inspector sections. These are described in the following sections.
Tracks MIDI Tracks Note Expression Allows you to work with the Note Expression features. MIDI Modifiers Allows you to transpose or adjust the velocity of the MIDI track events in realtime during playback. MIDI Inserts Allows you to add MIDI insert effects.
Tracks MIDI Tracks MIDI Sends Section Allows you to add MIDI send effects. MIDI Fader Section Shows a duplicate of the corresponding MixConsole channel. Notepad Allows you to enter notes about the track. Device Panel (Cubase Pro only) Allows you to display and use device panels.
Tracks MIDI Tracks Quick Controls Allows you to configure quick controls to use remote devices, for example. MIDI Track Controls The Track List for MIDI tracks contains controls and parameters that allow you to edit your MIDI track. The track list for MIDI tracks contains the following controls: Mute Mutes the track. Solo Solos the track. Track name Click once to show/hide the basic track settings section. Double-click to rename the track. Record enable Activates the track for recording.
Tracks MIDI Tracks Show Lanes Divides the tracks in lanes. Output Allows you to specify the output for the track. Programs Allows you to select a program. Edit In-Place Allows you to edit MIDI events and parts on the track in the Project window. Bypass Inserts Bypasses the inserts for the track. Bypass Sends Bypasses the sends for the track. Lock Disables all editing of all events on the track. Edit Opens the Channel Settings window for the track. Drum Map Allows you to select a drum map for the track.
Tracks Sampler Tracks Sampler Tracks You can use sampler tracks for controlling the playback of audio samples via MIDI. Each sampler track has a corresponding channel in the MixConsole. A sampler track can have any number of automation tracks. ● To add a sampler track, select Project > Add Track > Sampler. RELATED LINKS Creating Sampler Tracks on page 516 Sampler Track Inspector The Inspector for sampler tracks contains controls and parameters that allow you to edit your sampler track.
Tracks Sampler Tracks Record enable Activates the track for recording. Monitor Routes incoming MIDI to the selected MIDI output. For this to work, activate MIDI Thru Active in the Preferences dialog (MIDI page). Toggle Time Base Switches between musical (tempo related) and linear (time related) time base for the track. Lock Disables all editing of all events on the track. Show Lanes Divides the tracks in lanes. Freeze Sampler Channel Allows you to freeze the sampler track.
Tracks Sampler Tracks TrackVersions Allows you to create and edit TrackVersions. Chords Allows you to specify how the track follows the chord track. Expression Map Allows you to use the Expression Map features.
Tracks Sampler Tracks Allows you to work with the Note Expression features. MIDI Modifiers Allows you to transpose or adjust the velocity of the MIDI track events in realtime during playback. MIDI Inserts Allows you to add MIDI insert effects. Instrument Section Shows the audio-related controls for the sampler track. Notepad Allows you to enter notes about the track.
Tracks Sampler Tracks Device Panel (Cubase Pro only) Allows you to display and use device panels. Quick Controls Allows you to configure quick controls to use remote devices, for example. Sampler Track Controls The track list for sampler tracks contains controls and parameters that allow you to edit your sampler track. Mute Mutes the track. Solo Solos the track. Track name Double-click to rename the track. Record enable Activates the track for recording.
Tracks Arranger Track Allows you to read track automation. Write Automation Allows you to write track automation. Show Lanes Divides the tracks in lanes. ASIO Latency Compensation Moves all recorded events on the track by the current latency. Bypass Inserts Bypasses the inserts for the track. Bypass EQs Bypasses the equalizers for the track. Bypass Sends Bypasses the sends for the track. Listen The listen indicator is lit if the track is in listen mode.
Tracks Arranger Track Arranger Track Inspector The arranger track Inspector displays the lists of available arranger chains and arranger events. The arranger track Inspector contains the following settings: Track Name Double-click to rename the track. Edit Opens the Arranger Editor. Select Active Arranger Chain + Function Allows you to select the active arranger chain, to rename it, to create a new one, to duplicate or to flatten it. Current Arranger Chain Shows the active arranger chain.
Tracks Chord Track Arranger Track Controls The track list for the arranger track contains controls and parameters that allow you to edit the arranger track. Select Active Arranger Chain Allows you to select the active arranger chain. Current Item/Current Repeat Displays which arranger event and which repeat is active. Activate Arranger Mode Allows you to activate and deactivate the arranger mode. Toggle Time Base Switches between musical (tempo related) and linear (time related) time base for the track.
Tracks Chord Track Mutes the track. Record enable Activates the track for recording. Acoustic Feedback Allows you to audition the events on the chord track. For this to work, you need to select a track for auditioning in the track list. Toggle Time Base Switches between musical (tempo related) and linear (time related) time base for the track. Lock Disables all editing of all events on the track. Voicing library Allows you to set up a voicing library for the track.
Tracks Chord Track TrackVersions Allows you to create and edit TrackVersions. Notepad Allows you to enter notes about the track. Chord Track Controls The Track List for the chord track contains controls and parameters that allow you to edit the chord track. The track list for chord tracks contains the following controls: Mute Mutes the track. Select Track for Auditioning Allows you to select a track for auditioning the chord events. Record Enable Allows you to record chord events.
Tracks FX Channel Tracks Toggle Time Base Switches between musical (tempo related) and linear (time related) time base for the track. FX Channel Tracks You can use FX channel tracks for adding send effects. Each FX channel can contain up to eight effect processors. By routing sends from an audio channel to an FX channel, you send audio from the audio channel to the effects on the FX channel. You can place FX channel tracks in a special FX channel folder, or in the track list, outside a FX channel folder.
Tracks FX Channel Tracks Toggle Time Base Switches between musical (tempo related) and linear (time related) time base for the track. Lock Disables all editing of all events on the track. Volume Allows you to adjust the level of the track. Pan Allows you to adjust the panning of the track. Output Routing Allows you to specify the output bus for the track. FX Channel Track Inspector Sections Apart from the basic track settings that are always shown, FX channel tracks provide other Inspector sections.
Tracks FX Channel Tracks Equalizers Allows you to adjust the EQs for the track. You can have up to four bands of EQ for each track. Sends Allows you to route the track to one or several FX channels. Cue Sends (Cubase Pro only) Allows you to route cue mixes to Control Room cues.
Tracks FX Channel Tracks Direct Routing Allows you to set up direct routing. Surround Pan (Cubase Pro only) Shows the panner for a track. Fader Shows a duplicate of the corresponding MixConsole channel. Notepad Allows you to enter notes about the track.
Tracks FX Channel Tracks Quick Controls Allows you to configure quick controls to use remote devices, for example. FX Channel Track Controls The Track List for FX channel tracks contains controls and parameters that allow you to edit the settings for the effect. Track name Click once to show/hide the basic track settings section. Double-click to rename the track. Edit Opens the Channel Settings window for the track. Mute Mutes the track. Solo Solos the track.
Tracks Folder Tracks Switches between musical (tempo related) and linear (time related) time base for the track. Lock Disables all editing of all events on the track. Bypass Inserts Bypasses the inserts for the track. Bypass EQs Bypasses the equalizers for the track. Bypass Sends Bypasses the sends for the track. Channel Configuration Shows the channel configuration of the track.
Tracks Folder Tracks Solo Solos the track. Record enable Activates the track for recording. Monitor Routes incoming signals to the selected output. Group Editing Allows you to activate the group editing mode. Lock Disables all editing of all events on the track. Folder Track Controls The Track List for folder tracks contains controls and parameters that allow you to edit all tracks in the folder. Expand/Collapse Shows/hides the tracks in the folder. Hidden tracks are played back as usual.
Tracks Group Channel Tracks Disables all editing of all events on the track. Group Channel Tracks You can use group channel tracks to create a submix of several audio channels and apply the same effects to them. A group channel track contains no events as such, but displays settings and automation for the corresponding group channel. All group channel tracks are automatically placed in a special group track folder in the track list, for easy management.
Tracks Group Channel Tracks Lock Disables all editing of all events on the track. Volume Allows you to adjust the level for the track. Pan Allows you to adjust the panning of the track. Output Routing Allows you to specify the output bus for the track. NOTE When you select the group folder track instead, the Inspector shows the folder and the group channels it contains. You can click one of the group channels shown in the folder, to have the Inspector show the settings for that group channel.
Tracks Group Channel Tracks Equalizers Allows you to adjust the EQs for the track. You can have up to four bands of EQ for each track. Sends Allows you to route the track to one or several FX channels. Cue Sends (Cubase Pro only) Allows you to route cue mixes to Control Room cues.
Tracks Group Channel Tracks Direct Routing Allows you to set up direct routing. Surround Pan (Cubase Pro only) Shows the panner for a track. Fader Shows a duplicate of the corresponding MixConsole channel. Notepad Allows you to enter notes about the track.
Tracks Group Channel Tracks Quick Controls Allows you to configure quick controls to use remote devices, for example. Group Channel Track Controls The Track List for group channel tracks contains controls and parameters that allow you to edit the settings for the group. Track name Double-click to rename the track. Edit Opens the Channel Settings window for the track. Mute Mutes the track. Solo Solos the track. Read Automation Allows you to read track automation.
Tracks Marker Track Lock Disables all editing of all events on the track. Bypass Inserts Bypasses the inserts for the track. Bypass EQs Bypasses the equalizers for the track. Bypass Sends Bypasses the sends for the track. Channel Configuration Shows the channel configuration of the track. Marker Track Cubase Pro only: You can use marker tracks to add and edit markers that help you to locate certain positions quickly.
Tracks Ruler Track Marker Track Controls The track list for the marker track contains controls and parameters that allow you to edit the marker track. Track name Double-click to rename the track. Locate Allows you to move the project cursor to the selected marker position. Cycle Allows you to select a cycle marker. Zoom Allows you to zoom in a cycle marker. Add Marker Allows you to add a position marker at the project cursor position.
Tracks Signature Track The following display formats are available: Bars+Beats Activates a display format of bars, beats, sixteenth notes, and ticks. By default there are 120 ticks per sixteenth note. To adjust this, set the MIDI Display Resolution in the Preferences dialog (MIDI page). Seconds Activates a display format of hours, minutes, seconds, and milliseconds. Timecode Activates a display format of hours, minutes, seconds, and frames.
Tracks Signature Track Bar Shows the number of the bar where the signature event is positioned. Double-click the field and enter a new value to change the position of the signature event. NOTE The first signature event is always positioned at bar 1. You cannot change this. Sign. Shows the value of the signature event. Double-click the field and enter a new value to change the time signature. Pattern Shows the click pattern that is used.
Tracks Tempo Track ● Render Audio Click between Locators Adds an audio track to your project and creates an audio event containing the click pattern between the left and right locator. ● Process Bars Dialog (Cubase Pro only) Opens the Process Bars dialog. RELATED LINKS Click Patterns Page on page 231 Process Bars (Cubase Pro only) on page 902 Tempo Track You can use the tempo track to create tempo changes within a project. ● To add a tempo track to your project, select Project > Add Track > Tempo.
Tracks Transpose Track Allows you to change the tempo at the project cursor position. Open Process Tempo Dialog Allows you to open the Process Tempo dialog. New Tempo Points Type Allows you to specify whether the tempo should change gradually (Ramp) or instantly (Jump) from the previous curve point to the new one. Visible Tempo Upper/Lower Limit Allows you to specify the display range. This changes the display scale of the tempo track, but not the tempo setting.
Tracks VCA Fader Track (Cubase Pro only) Transpose Track Controls The track list for the transpose track contains parameters that allow you to control the transpose track. Mute Transpose Events Mutes the track. Keep Transpose in Octave Range Allows you to keep the transposition in the octave range and ensures that nothing is transposed by more than seven semitones. Toggle Time Base Switches between musical (tempo related) and linear (time related) time base for the track.
Tracks VCA Fader Track (Cubase Pro only) Allows you to write track automation. Toggle Time Base Switches between musical (tempo related) and linear (time related) time base for the track. Lock Disables all editing of all events on the track. Volume Allows you to adjust the level of the track. Fader Section Shows a duplicate of the corresponding MixConsole channel. Notepad Allows you to enter notes about the track.
Tracks Video Track VCA Fader Track Controls The track list for VCA fader tracks contains controls and parameters that allow you to edit the settings for the VCA fader. Edit Opens the Channel Settings window for the track. Channel Configuration Shows the channel configuration of the track. Read Automation Allows you to read track automation. Write Automation Allows you to write track automation. Lock Disables all editing of all events on the track.
Tracks Video Track Disables all editing of all events on the track. Show Frame Numbers Allows you to show each thumbnail with the corresponding video frame number. Show Thumbnails Allows you to activate/deactivate the thumbnails of a video track. Video Track Inspector Sections Apart from the basic track settings that are always shown, the video track provides an other Inspector section. This is described in the following section. Notepad Allows you to enter notes about the track.
Track Handling Adding Tracks You can add tracks via the Project menu, the context menu, or by dragging files from the MediaBay. Tracks can be added with or without track presets. Add Track Dialog The Add Track dialog opens when you add audio, MIDI, group/FX/VCA (Cubase Pro only) channels, or instrument tracks. The available options depend on the track type. Browse Expands the dialog and allows you to select a track preset for the track. Count Allows you to enter the number of tracks that you want to add.
Track Handling Adding Tracks 2. Select a track of a specific type. 3. In the Add Track dialog, edit the add track options. 4. Click Add Track. RESULT The new tracks are added to the project below the selected track. RELATED LINKS Add Track Dialog on page 152 Adding Tracks based on Track Presets You can add tracks based on track presets. Track presets contain sound and channel settings. PROCEDURE 1. Select Project > Add Track. 2. Select Using Track Preset.
Track Handling Importing Tracks (Cubase Pro only) RELATED LINKS MediaBay on page 546 Media Rack in Right Zone on page 546 Import Options Dialog on page 154 Import Options Dialog Copy File to Working Directory Copies the audio file to the Audio folder of the project, and has the clip refer to the copy. Deactivate this option to have the clip refer to the original file in the original location. In this case, it is marked as “external” in the Pool.
Track Handling Importing Tracks (Cubase Pro only) channel settings of the existing track remain unchanged. If the imported track contains more than one TrackVersion, only its active TrackVersion is imported. Imported TrackVersions must be of the same type as the track in your active project. Marker tracks A new marker track is created. If your project already contains 10 marker tracks, you cannot import a marker track from another project. In this case, you must remove an existing marker track first.
Track Handling Importing Tracks (Cubase Pro only) Importing Tracks from Track Archive You can import tracks from track archives. PREREQUISITE You have created at least one track archive by exporting selected tracks from a project. PROCEDURE 1. Select File > Import > Track Archive. 2. In the file dialog, select the .xml file of the track archive and click Open. 3. In the Import column of the Import Options dialog, select the tracks that you want to import or click Select All. 4.
Track Handling Exporting Tracks as Track Archive (Cubase Pro only) Select None Deselects all tracks. Project Settings Shows the sample rate, the frame rate, and the project start time for both the imported tracks and your active project. NOTE Imported tracks may contain media files with a sample rate that differs from the sample rate of your destination project. Files with a sample rate different from the one that is used in the destination project play back at the wrong speed and pitch.
Track Handling Exporting MIDI Tracks as Standard MIDI File 4. Enter a file name and click Save. RELATED LINKS Exporting Audio or Video Tracks as Track Archives on page 158 Exporting Audio or Video Tracks as Track Archives PROCEDURE 1. Select the audio or video tracks and any other tracks that you want to export. 2. Select File > Export > Selected Tracks. 3. In the dialog that opens, choose between the following options: ● Click Copy to include copies of the media files in the export.
Track Handling Exporting MIDI Tracks as Standard MIDI File Export Options for MIDI Files The Export Options for MIDI files allow you to specify what data is included in the exported MIDI files. Export Inspector Patch If this option is activated, the MIDI patch settings in the Inspector - Bank Select and Program Select (used for selecting sounds in the connected MIDI instrument) are included as MIDI Bank Select and Program Change events in the MIDI file.
Track Handling Removing Tracks Export as Type 0 If this option is activated, the MIDI file will be of Type 0 (all data on a single track, but on different MIDI channels). If you do not check this option, the MIDI file will be of Type 1 (data on separate tracks). Which type to choose depends on what you want to do with the MIDI file (in which application or sequencer it is to be used). Export Resolution You can specify a MIDI resolution between 24 and 960 for the MIDI file.
Track Handling Renaming Tracks Renaming Tracks PROCEDURE 1. Double-click the track name and type in a new name for the track. 2. Press Return. If you want all events on the track to get the same name, hold down any modifier key and press Return. AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK If the Parts Get Track Names option is activated in the Preferences dialog (Editing page), and you move an event from one track to another, the moved event will automatically be named according to its new track.
Track Handling Showing Track Pictures Showing Track Pictures You can add pictures to tracks to recognize your tracks easily. Track pictures are available for audio, instrument, MIDI, FX channel and group channel tracks. PREREQUISITE Adjust the track height to at least 2 rows. PROCEDURE 1. Right-click any track in the track list. 2. From the track list context menu, select Show Track Pictures. If you move the mouse to the left on a track, a highlighted rectangle appears.
Track Handling Setting the Track Height User Shows your user content in the pictures browser. Import Opens a file dialog that allows you to select pictures in bmp, jpeg, or png format and add them to the user library. Remove Selected Pictures from User Library Removes the selected picture from the user library. Reset Current Picture Removes the picture from the selected track/channel. Show/Hide Preview Opens/Closes a section with further color and zoom settings.
Track Handling Selecting Tracks The following options are available: Zoom Tracks x Rows Zooms all track heights to show the specified number of rows. Zoom Tracks Full Zooms all tracks to fit in the active Project window. Zoom x Tracks Zooms the specified number of tracks to fit in the active Project window. Zoom N Tracks Allows you to set the number of tracks to fit in the active Project window. Zoom Tracks Minimal Zooms all track heights to the minimum size.
Track Handling Duplicating Tracks Selecting Tracks with Arrow Keys You can select tracks and events with the Up Arrow key or the Down Arrow key on the computer keyboard. However, you can make the Up Arrow key and the Down Arrow key exclusively available for selecting tracks. ● To make the Up Arrow key and the Down Arrow key exclusively available for selecting tracks, activate Use Up/Down Navigation Commands for selecting Tracks only in the Preferences dialog (Editing page).
Track Handling Handling Overlapping Audio ● To create new folder track and move all selected tracks into it, open the Project menu and from the Track folding submenu select Move Selected Tracks To New Folder. ● To move tracks into a folder, select them and drag them into the folder track. ● To remove tracks from a folder, select them and drag them out of the folder. ● To hide/show tracks in a folder, click the Expand/Collapse Folder button of the folder track.
Track Handling Track Folding RELATED LINKS Working with Lanes on page 168 Track Folding You can show, hide, or invert tracks that are displayed in the Project window event display. This allows you to divide the project into several parts by creating several folder tracks for the different project elements and showing/hiding their contents by selecting a menu function or using a key command. You can also fold in automation tracks this way. ● To open the Track Folding menu, select Project > Track Folding.
Track Handling How Events are Displayed on Folder Tracks How Events are Displayed on Folder Tracks Closed folder tracks can display data of the contained audio, MIDI, and instrument tracks as data blocks or as events. When you close folder tracks, the contents of the contained tracks are displayed as data blocks or events. Depending on the folder track height, the display of the events can be more or less detailed. Modifying Event Display on Folder Tracks You can modify the event display on folder tracks.
Track Handling Working with Lanes The Show Lanes mode gives you a good overview of all your takes. If you activate the Show Lanes button, the recorded takes are shown on separate lanes. Show Lanes button Lanes are handled differently, depending on whether you work with audio or MIDI: Audio As each audio track can only play back one single audio event at a time, you only hear the take that is activated for playback, for example, the last lap of a cycle recording.
Track Handling Working with Lanes Finally, clean up the lanes as follows: ● Right-click a track and select Create Tracks from Lanes. The lane is converted into a new track. Assembling Operations Unless it is clearly stated, all operations can be performed in the Project window and in the Audio Part Editor. Snap is taken into account, and all operations can be undone. To assemble a perfect take, you can use the Comp tool, the Object Selection tool, or the Range Selection tool.
Track Handling Defining the Track Time Base Operation Comp tool Object Selection/Range Selection tool the position where you want playback to start. Move Click and drag on the main track. Click and drag on any lane. Resize Drag the resize handles. All takes with the same start and end positions are affected. Resizing is constrained to the end or start of the adjacent takes. This ensures that you do not create overlaps accidentally. Drag the resize handles.
Track Handling TrackVersions Linear time base is indicated by a clock symbol: NOTE Switching between linear and musical time base results in a very small loss of positioning precision. Therefore you should avoid switching repeatedly between the two modes. RELATED LINKS Editing Tempo and Time Signature on page 888 Defining the Default Track Time Base (Cubase Pro only) You can specify the default track time type for new tracks (audio, group/FX, MIDI, and marker tracks). PROCEDURE 1.
Track Handling TrackVersions TrackVersions are included in track archives and project backups. The TrackVersion key commands can be found in the TrackVersions category of the Key Commands dialog. TrackVersions Pop-Up Menu The TrackVersions pop-up menu is available for all track types that support TrackVersions. It contains the most important functions for managing TrackVersions and a TrackVersions list. To open the TrackVersions pop-up menu for a track, click the arrow to the right of the track name.
Track Handling TrackVersions 1 Name column Shows the version name. Double-click to change it. The name will be changed for all selected tracks. 2 ID column Shows the TrackVersion ID. 3 Track Version Indicator Indicates that more than one TrackVersion exists. 4 Track Version list Lists all TrackVersions and allows you to activate one of them for all selected tracks. 5 New Version Creates a new, empty TrackVersion for all selected tracks.
Track Handling TrackVersions RESULT All tracks that have TrackVersions with the same ID are selected. Assigning a Common ID TrackVersions on different tracks that were not created together have different TrackVersion IDs. TrackVersions with different IDs cannot be activated together. To do this, you must assign a new version ID to these tracks. PROCEDURE 1. Select the tracks and activate the TrackVersions to which you want to assign a common version ID. 2.
Track Handling TrackVersions 3. Select the TrackVersion that you want to activate from the list. RESULT The selected TrackVersion is activated for all selected tracks, and the corresponding events are shown in the event display. NOTE If you work with audio tracks, MIDI tracks, instrument tracks, or the chord track, you can also use the TrackVersions Inspector to activate a TrackVersion.
Track Handling TrackVersions 5. Select Edit > Paste. RESULT The copied range from the first TrackVersion is pasted to the second TrackVersion at the exact same position. NOTE If you want to perform more complicated comping tasks, we recommend to select Project > TrackVersions > Create Lanes from Versions and proceed with the Comp tool. Copying and Pasting Selected Events between TrackVersions You can copy and paste selected events between different TrackVersions, even across multiple tracks.
Track Handling TrackVersions Renaming TrackVersions on Multiple Tracks PROCEDURE 1. Activate all TrackVersions that you want to rename, and select the corresponding tracks. 2. Select Project > TrackVersions > Rename Version. 3. Enter a new TrackVersion name and click OK. RESULT In the track list, the new TrackVersion name is shown. NOTE If you want to assign the same ID to TrackVersions, select Project > TrackVersions > Assign Common Version ID.
Track Handling Track Presets TrackVersions vs. Lanes TrackVersions and lanes are individual features that complement each other. Every TrackVersion can have its own set of lanes. Creating Lanes from TrackVersions If your project contains TrackVersions and you want to continue working with lanes, using the Comp tool, for example, you can create lanes from TrackVersions. PROCEDURE 1. Select the tracks for which you want to create lanes. 2. Select Project > TrackVersions > Create Lanes from Versions.
Track Handling Track Presets ● Insert effects settings (including VST effect presets) ● EQ settings ● Volume and pan ● Input gain and phase NOTE To access the track presets functions for input and output channels, activate the Write buttons for input and output channels in the MixConsole. This creates input and output channel tracks in the track list.
Track Handling Track Presets ● Drum map settings Multi-Track Presets You can use multi-track presets, for example, when recording setups that require several microphones (a drum set or a choir, where you always record under the same conditions) and you have to edit the resulting tracks in a similar way. Furthermore, they can be used when working with layered tracks, where you use several tracks to generate a certain sound instead of manipulating only one track.
Track Handling Track Presets RELATED LINKS Previewing Pattern Banks on page 564 Track Presets on page 179 Creating a Track Preset You can create a track preset from a single track or from a combination of tracks. PROCEDURE 1. In the Project window, select one or more tracks. 2. In the track list, right-click one of the selected tracks and select Save Track Preset. 3. In the New Preset section, enter a name for the new preset. NOTE You can also define attributes for the preset. 4.
Track Handling Track Presets NOTE ● Once a track preset is applied, you cannot undo the changes. It is not possible to remove an applied preset from a track and return to the previous state. If you are not satisfied with the track settings, you have to either edit the settings manually or apply another preset. ● Applying VST presets to instrument tracks leads to removal of modifiers, MIDI inserts, inserts, or EQs. These settings are not stored in VST presets.
Track Handling Track Presets Loading Inserts and EQ from Track Presets Instead of loading complete track presets, you can also apply insert or equalizer settings from track presets. PROCEDURE 1. Select a track, open the Inspector or the Channel Settings window, and click the VST Sound button on the Inserts or Equalizers section. 2. Select From Track Preset. 3. In the preset browser, select a track preset. 4. Double-click the preset to load the settings.
Track Handling Track Presets NOTE You can also make your own assignments and save them as presets and delete, rename, or reset the presets to the default assignments.
Parts and Events Parts and events are the basic building blocks in Cubase. Events In Cubase, most event types can be viewed and edited on their specific tracks in the Project window. Events can be added by importing or recording. RELATED LINKS Audio Events on page 186 MIDI Events on page 189 Audio Events Audio events are created automatically when you record or import audio in the Project window. You can view and edit audio events in the Project window and in the Sample Editor.
Parts and Events Events RELATED LINKS Basic Recording Methods on page 236 Importing Audio Files on page 254 Importing Audio CD Tracks on page 257 Importing Audio from Video Files on page 259 MediaBay on page 546 Audio Part Editor on page 504 Sample Editor on page 445 Find Media Window on page 537 Creating New Files From Events An audio event plays a section of an audio clip, which in turn refers to one or more audio files on the hard disk.
Parts and Events Events This allows you to undo processing at a later stage, and to apply different processing to different audio clips that refer to the same original file. You can view and edit audio clips in the Pool. RELATED LINKS Pool on page 528 Audio Regions on page 188 Replacing Clips in Events on page 188 Replacing Clips in Events You can replace the clips in audio events.
Parts and Events Parts of the region determined by the start and end position of the event or selection range within the clip. Events from Regions This function is available if you have selected an audio event whose clip contains regions within the boundaries of the event. The function will remove the original event and replace it with events positioned and sized according to the regions.
Parts and Events Parts Audio Parts Audio parts are containers for audio events. If you want to treat several audio events as one unit in the Project window, you can convert them to a part. You can create audio parts in the following ways: ● Select the Draw tool and draw on the audio track. ● Press Alt, select the Object Selection tool, and draw on the audio track. ● Select the Object Selection tool and double-click on the audio track, between the left and right locator.
Parts and Events Editing Techniques for Parts and Events Editing Techniques for Parts and Events This section describes techniques for editing in the Project window. If not explicitly stated, all descriptions apply to both events and parts, even though we use the term event for convenience. In the Project window, you can edit events using the following techniques: ● By selecting and using one of the tools in the Project window toolbar.
Parts and Events Editing Techniques for Parts and Events 5. Drag to the left or right. RESULT The project cursor moves correspondingly and the event is played back. The speed and the pitch of the playback depend on how fast you move the mouse. NOTE Insert effects are bypassed when scrubbing with the mouse. Scrub Tool Scrubbing can be quite a burden on your system. If playback problems occur, open the Preferences dialog (Transport—Scrub page), and deactivate Use High Quality Scrub Mode.
Parts and Events Editing Techniques for Parts and Events Equal Pitch all Octaves/same Octave These functions are available in the MIDI editors and the Sample Editor. Select Controllers in Note Range This function is available in the MIDI editors. All on Selected Tracks Selects all events on the selected track. Events under Cursor Automatically selects all events on the selected tracks that are touched by the project cursor. Select Event This function is available in the Sample Editor.
Parts and Events Editing Techniques for Parts and Events Moving with the Object Selection Tool PROCEDURE 1. Select Object Selection 2. Click the events that you want to move and drag them to a new position. . NOTE You can only drag events to tracks of the same type. If you hold down Ctrl/Cmd while dragging, you can restrict the movement either horizontally or vertically. RESULT The events are moved. If you moved several events, their relative positions are kept.
Parts and Events Editing Techniques for Parts and Events RESULT The event is moved by the set value. Renaming Events PROCEDURE ● Do one of the following: ● Select the events and type in a new name in the Name field on the info line. ● Change the track name, hold down a modifier key, and press Return to rename all events after the track. Resize Events You can resize events by moving their start or end positions individually.
Parts and Events Editing Techniques for Parts and Events Resizing Events with the Object Selection Tool - Sizing Moves Contents You can move the start or end point of the event and move the content. PROCEDURE 1. Select Object Selection 2. Click the Object Selection tool again, and select Sizing Moves Contents from the pop-up menu. 3. Click and drag the lower left or right corner of the event. . RESULT The event is resized and the content follows.
Parts and Events Editing Techniques for Parts and Events 2. Select the event. 3. Do one of the following: ● Click Trim Start Left ● Click Trim Start Right ● Click Trim End Left ● Click Trim End Right . . . . RESULT The start or end position of the selected events are moved by the amount set on the Grid Type pop-up menu. Resizing Events with the Scrub Tool You can scrub the event when moving the start or end point of the event. PROCEDURE 1. Click Play 2.
Parts and Events Editing Techniques for Parts and Events RESULT The events are split. NOTE If you split a MIDI part so that the split position intersects one or several MIDI notes and Split MIDI Events is activated in the Preferences dialog (Editing—MIDI page), the intersected notes are split and new notes are created at the beginning of the second part. If it is deactivated, the notes remain in the first part, but stick out after the end of the part.
Parts and Events Editing Techniques for Parts and Events 2. Activate the project where you want to paste the events. 3. Select Edit > Functions > Paste to Matching Track Name. RESULT The events are inserted on the track with the name that exactly matches the original track name. For all events that have no matching track name, new tracks are created. Duplicating Events In the Project window, you can duplicate selected events.
Parts and Events Editing Techniques for Parts and Events RELATED LINKS Shared Copies on page 200 Repeat Events Dialog on page 200 Setting the Track Height on page 163 Repeat Events Dialog The Repeat Events dialog allows you to create a number of real or shared copies of the selected events. ● To open the Repeat Events dialog, select Edit > Functions > Repeat. Count Allows you to specify how many times you want the event to be repeated. Shared Copies Activate this to create a shared copy.
Parts and Events Editing Techniques for Parts and Events RESULT The content of the event is moved. NOTE You cannot slide an audio event past the start or end of the actual audio clip. If the event plays the whole clip, you cannot slide the audio at all. Grouping Events You can treat several events on the same or different tracks as one unit by grouping them. PROCEDURE ● Select the events and select Edit > Group. RESULT The events are grouped. This is indicated by an icon.
Parts and Events Editing Techniques for Parts and Events them. If you edit the start or end point of a single event or part before activating the Group Editing mode, the event or part is excluded from the group. Edit actions in Group Editing mode affect all grouped events, parts, or ranges. If you select another take by using the small To Front arrow at the right side of one event of an edit group, for example, all other tracks inside the edit group also switch to the corresponding take.
Parts and Events Editing Techniques for Parts and Events To unlock an event, select the event and select Edit > Unlock. Lock Event Attributes The Lock Event Attributes dialog allows you to lock specific event attributes. ● To open the Lock Event Attributes dialog, select a locked event and select Edit > Lock. ● Position Locked Activate this to prevent the event from being moved. ● Size Locked Activate this to prevent the event from being resized.
Range Editing Editing in the Project window is not restricted to handling whole events and parts. You can also work with selection ranges, which are independent from the event/part and track boundaries. Creating a Selection Range ● To make a selection range, drag with the Range Selection tool. When the Range Selection tool is selected, you can select selection ranges options via Edit > Select.
Range Editing Editing Selection Ranges From Cursor to End Makes a selection on all tracks, from the project cursor to the end of the project. Equal Pitch - all Octaves This function requires that a single note is selected. It selects all notes of this part that have the same pitch in any octave as the selected note. Equal Pitch - same Octave This function requires that a single note is selected. It selects all notes of this part that have the same pitch and the same octave as the selected note.
Range Editing Editing Selection Ranges ● By adjusting the selection range start or end position on the info line. ● By using the trim buttons on the toolbar. The left trim buttons move the start of the selection range and the right buttons move the end. The edges are moved by the amount specified on the Grid pop-up menu. NOTE The trim buttons are located on the Nudge Palette, which is not visible on the toolbar by default. ● By using Move Left and Move Right on the toolbar.
Range Editing Editing Selection Ranges Paste Pastes the clipboard data to the start position and track of the current selection. Existing events on the tracks remain at their original position. Paste at Origin Pastes the clipboard data back at its original position. Existing events on the tracks remain at their original position. This option is available in Edit > Functions. Cut Time Cuts out the selection range and moves it to the clipboard.
Playback and Transport Cubase offers multiple methods and functions to control playback and transport. RELATED LINKS Transport on page 1036 Transport Panel The Transport panel contains the main transport functions as well as many other options related to playback and recording. ● To show the transport panel, select Transport > Transport Panel or press F2.
Playback and Transport Transport Panel Punch Points Allows you to activate/deactivate Punch In and Punch Out. The section to the right of the punch buttons allows you to set up the punch positions numerically. For this to work, Lock Punch Points to Locators must be deactivated. You can hide/show that section by clicking the points on the divider. Main Transport Shows the basic transport controls as well as the time display options. Arranger Shows the arranger functions.
Playback and Transport Transport Menu Audio Level Control Shows clipping indicators and allows you to control the output level. RELATED LINKS Transport on page 1036 Transport - Scrub on page 1037 Transport Menu The Transport menu contains several transport functions as well as many other options related to playback and recording. Transport Panel Opens the Transport panel. Transport Start Starts playback. Stop Stops playback. Start/Stop Starts/Stops playback. Cycle Activates/Deactivates cycle mode.
Playback and Transport Transport Menu Enter Time Signature Allows you to enter the time signature manually. Go to Project Start Moves the project cursor position to the start of the project. Go to Project End Moves the project cursor position to the end of the project. Exchange Time Formats Switches the primary and the secondary time display. Locators Go to Left Locator Position Moves the project cursor position to the left locator.
Playback and Transport Transport Menu Set Punch In to Project Cursor Position Moves the punch in position to the project cursor position. Set Punch Out to Project Cursor Position Moves the punch out position to the project cursor position. Enter Punch In Position Allows you to enter the punch in position manually. Enter Punch Out Position Allows you to enter the punch out position manually. Set Punch Points to Selection Range Sets the punch in and the punch out position to the selected event range.
Playback and Transport Transport Menu Play Selection Range Activates playback from the start of the current selection and stops at the selection end. Pre-roll & Post-roll Use Pre-roll Activates/Deactivates the pre-roll. Use Post-roll Activates/Deactivates the post-roll. Post-roll from Selection Start Starts playback from the beginning of the selected range and stops after the time set in the post-roll field on the Transport panel.
Playback and Transport Transport Menu MIDI Record Mode These options allow you to select what happens when you record over existing parts. New Parts Keeps existing parts and saves the new recording as a new part. Merge Keeps existing events in parts and adds the newly recorded events. Replace Replaces existing events in parts by the new recording. Auto Quantize in Record Activates automatic quantizing during record. MIDI Cycle Record Mode Mix Adds everything you record to what was previously recorded.
Playback and Transport Transport RELATED LINKS Left and Right Locators on page 219 Punch In and Punch Out on page 223 Pre-Roll and Post-Roll on page 222 Common Record Modes on page 239 Audio Record Modes on page 244 MIDI Record Modes on page 250 Enabling Retrospective MIDI Record on page 252 Metronome Click on page 224 Transport The Transport contains all transport functions in an integrated and fixed zone of the Project window.
Playback and Transport Transport Common Record Modes Allow you to determine what happens if you click Record during an audio or MIDI recording. Audio Record Modes Allow you to select what happens when you record over existing audio events. MIDI Record Modes Allow you to select what happens when you record over existing MIDI parts. Left Divider Allows you to use the left divider. Tools that are placed to the left of the divider are always shown.
Playback and Transport Transport Pop-Up Window Allows you to activate/deactivate the tempo track, and to set the tempo value and the first time signature value numerically. External Sync State Allows you to activate/deactivate external synchronization and to open the Project Synchronization Setup dialog. Click & Count-In & Click Pattern Allows you to activate/deactivate the metronome click, the metronome click in countin, and the click pattern. Right Divider Allows you to use the right divider.
Playback and Transport Time Display Window Transport pop-up window for entering the left Locator position. NOTE To close the Transport pop-up window, press Esc. Time Display Window The Time Display window allows you to view the current time position in a separate window. You can adjust its size and specify the time format that you want to display. ● To show the Time Display window, select Studio > More Options > Time Display.
Playback and Transport Left and Right Locators Left and Right Locators The left and right locators are a pair of markers that you can use to set up cycle boundaries. Left and right locators are available in the Project window as well as in the editors. Locators are indicated by the flags in the ruler. The area between the left and the right locator is the locator range. The locator range is highlighted in the ruler and the event display.
Playback and Transport Setting the Project Cursor Position ● Drag the left handle in the upper part of the ruler. ● Drag the right handle in the upper part of the ruler. ● Press Ctrl/Cmd and click at the position in the upper part of the ruler to set the left locator. ● Press Alt and click at the position in the ruler to set the right locator. ● Adjust the Left/Right Locator Position value on the Transport panel.
Playback and Transport Auto-Scroll Auto-Scroll Auto-Scroll allows you to keep the project cursor visible in the window during playback. If you activate Auto-Scroll on the toolbar of the Project window or one of the editors, the following modes are available in the Switch Auto-Scroll Settings pop-up menu: Page Scroll The project cursor moves from the left side to the right side of the window.
Playback and Transport Pre-Roll and Post-Roll You can also select Project > Project Setup > Display Format to select the primary time format. RESULT The time format on the Transport panel and all rulers and position displays are updated. Independent Time Displays You can show time displays that are independent from the global display format. To select an independent time display, do one of the following: ● In the ruler of the Project window or any editor, click the arrow button to the right of the ruler.
Playback and Transport Punch In and Punch Out 2. On the Transport panel, activate Punch In and Punch Out. 3. In the Preferences dialog, select Record. 4. Activate Stop after Automatic Punch Out. 5. On the Transport panel, activate Pre-roll and Post-roll. 6. In the Pre-roll Amount and Post-roll Amount fields, enter the pre-roll and post-roll values. 7. Activate Record. RESULT The project cursor rolls back by the time specified pre-roll value and playback starts.
Playback and Transport Metronome Click Metronome Click You can use the metronome click as a timing reference for playing along and recording. The two parameters that govern the timing of the metronome are project tempo and the time signature that you can set up in the Transport panel. ● To activate the metronome click, activate Activate Metronome Click on the Transport panel. You can also select Transport > Activate Metronome or use the corresponding key command.
Playback and Transport Metronome Click Emphasis in the corresponding ruler context menu. This is useful if Snap is activated and the Snap Type is set to Grid. ● Grid lines are only emphasized, if they are shown. If you want to visualize a click pattern that is set to 6 Clicks and a 4/4 Time Signature, you must set the Grid Type to a triplet value. The Click Patterns page in the Metronome Setup dialog allows you to manage the available click patterns.
Playback and Transport Metronome Click RELATED LINKS Transport Sections on page 215 Signature Track on page 144 Setting Up a Metronome Click Pattern You can set up a different metronome click pattern for your project. PROCEDURE 1. In the Transport, click the points to the right on the Click & Count-in & Click Pattern section and drag all the way to the right to show the click pattern section. 2. Click the pattern field to open the Click Pattern Editor. 3.
Playback and Transport Metronome Click Metronome Setup You can make settings for the metronome in the Metronome Setup dialog. To open the Metronome Setup dialog, do one of the following: ● Select Transport > Metronome Setup. ● On the Transport, open the Click & Count-In & Click Pattern section, and click Open Metronome Setup.
Playback and Transport Metronome Click General Page The General page allows you to make basic metronome settings. In the topmost section, the following options are available: Activate Metronome Click Activates/Deactivates the metronome click. In the Click Destinations section, the following options are available: Use MIDI Click Activates a MIDI click for the metronome. Use Audio Click Activates an audio click for the metronome that is output via the audio hardware.
Playback and Transport Metronome Click Allows you to set the number of bars that the metronome counts in before recording starts. ● Time Signature at Record Start Position Activate this to let the count-in automatically use the time signature and tempo set at the position where recording starts. ● Time Signature at Project Position Activate this to let the count-in use the time signature at the project position. ● Use Custom Time Signature Allows you to set a time signature for the count-in.
Playback and Transport Metronome Click Velocity Allows you to set the velocity of the MIDI click sound. Set the velocity for the first beat in a bar in the top row, and the velocities for the other beats in the rows below. The Audio Click Settings section allows you to set up the audio click that sounds if you activate Audio Click in the Click Destinations section on the General page. Use Steinberg Click Sound Activates the default sounds for the metronome click.
Playback and Transport Metronome Click 6. Set the level of the sounds by clicking the respective rows in the Audio Click Level column and adjusting the value. 7. Optional: Click Play to audition the custom sounds. RESULT The metronome uses the defined custom sounds for the audio click. AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK Open the Click Sound Presets pop-up menu and save your custom sounds as a preset. Click Patterns Page The Click Patterns page allows you to manage click patterns.
Playback and Transport Chase Shows the click pattern. You can open the Click Pattern Editor by clicking the pattern. 7 Remove Click Pattern Removes the click pattern from the list of available patterns. 8 Add New Pattern Adds a new default click pattern for the time signature. NOTE If you scroll all the way down, you can reset all click patterns to the factory settings by clicking Reset to Factory Patterns. You can double-click the name of a pattern and enter a new one to rename a click pattern.
Playback and Transport Chase RELATED LINKS Chase Events on page 1027 233
On-Screen Keyboard The On-Screen Keyboard allows you to play and record MIDI notes by using your computer keyboard or mouse. This is useful if you have no external MIDI instrument at hand and you do not want to draw in notes with the Draw tool. When the On-Screen Keyboard is displayed, the usual key commands are blocked because they are reserved for the On-Screen Keyboard.
On-Screen Keyboard On-Screen Keyboard Options On-Screen Keyboard Options 1 Note Velocity Level This slider allows you to adjust the volume of the On-Screen Keyboard. You can also use the Up Arrow key or the Down Arrow key for this. 2 Change On-Screen Keyboard Type This button allows you to switch between computer keyboard and piano keyboard display mode. The computer keyboard mode, you can use the two rows of keys that are displayed on the On-Screen Keyboard to enter notes.
Recording In Cubase, you can record audio and MIDI. Make the following initial preparations: ● Set up, connect, and calibrate your audio hardware. ● Open a project and set up the project setup parameters according to your specifications. Project setup parameters determine the record format, sample rate, project length, etc. that affect the audio recordings that you make during the course of the project. ● If you plan to record MIDI, set up and connect your MIDI equipment.
Recording Basic Recording Methods Activating Recording You can activate recording manually or automatically. Activating Recording Manually ● To activate recording, click Record on the Transport panel or on the toolbar. You can also use the corresponding key command, by default Num-*. Recording starts from the current cursor position.
Recording Basic Recording Methods NOTE If you have unlocked the punch positions from the locator positions, recording is automatically stopped when the project cursor reaches the punch out position. NOTE If cycle mode is activated, the punch in point is set after the left locator, and the punch out point corresponds to the right locator, recording is started at the punch in position, stopped at the punch out position, and resumed at the punch in position.
Recording Monitoring RESULT The project cursor rolls back and starts playback at the time that has been set as pre-roll amount. When the cursor reaches the left locator, recording is automatically activated. When the cursor reaches the right locator, recording is deactivated, and the playback continues as long as the time that has been set as post-roll amount. Common Record Modes The Common Record Modes determine what happens if you click Record during an audio or MIDI recording.
Recording Monitoring ● Externally by listening to the signal before it reaches Cubase. ● By using ASIO Direct Monitoring. This is a combination of both other methods. Monitoring via Cubase If you use monitoring via Cubase, the input signal is mixed with the audio playback. This requires an audio hardware configuration with a low latency value. PROCEDURE 1. In the track list, activate Monitor. 2. In the MixConsole, adjust the monitoring level and the panning.
Recording Monitoring PROCEDURE 1. In the track list, activate Monitor. 2. Select Studio > Studio Setup. 3. In the Devices list, select your audio hardware driver, and activate Direct Monitoring. If the checkbox is grayed out, your audio hardware (or its driver) does not support ASIO Direct Monitoring. Consult the audio hardware manufacturer for details. 4. In the Preferences dialog, select VST. 5. Open the Auto Monitoring pop-up menu and select a monitoring mode. 6.
Recording Audio Recording Specifics RESULT Incoming MIDI is echoed back out again. RELATED LINKS MIDI on page 1026 Audio Recording Specifics Preparations Selecting a Record File Format You can set up the record file format, that is, the sample rate, bit resolution, and record file type for new audio files. PROCEDURE 1. Select Project > Project Setup. 2. Set up the settings for Sample Rate, Bit Resolution, and Record File Type.
Recording Audio Recording Specifics Getting the Track Ready for Recording Creating a Track and Setting the Channel Configuration PROCEDURE 1. Select Project > Add Track > Audio. 2. In the Count field, enter the number of tracks that you want to add. 3. Open the Configuration pop-up menu and select a channel configuration. 4. Optional: Enter a track name. 5. Click Add Track.
Recording Audio Recording Specifics NOTE The waveform image will be calculated and displayed during the actual recording process. This realtime calculation uses some processing power. If your processor is slow or if you are working on a CPU-intensive project, deactivate Create Audio Images During Record in the Preferences dialog (Record—Audio page).
Recording Audio Recording Specifics Recording a Mix of Separate Tracks You can create a downmix of separate tracks, bass drum, hi-hats, or snare, for example. This is done by selecting an output bus, a group bus, or an FX channel bus as an input for your recording. PROCEDURE 1. Set up your separate tracks and add a group track. 2. For each of the drum tracks, open the Output Routing pop-up menu and select the group track as output. 3.
Recording MIDI Recording Specifics 4. When you have played some audio material that you want to capture (either in Stop mode or during playback), click Record. 5. Stop the recording after a few seconds. This creates an audio event that starts where the cursor position was when you activated recording. If you were in stop mode, and the cursor was at the beginning of the project, you may have to move the event to the right in the next step.
Recording MIDI Recording Specifics For more information, refer to the manual that came with your instrument. Naming MIDI Ports MIDI inputs and outputs are often displayed with long and complicated names. In Cubase, you can rename your MIDI ports to more descriptive names. PROCEDURE 1. Select Studio > Studio Setup. 2. In the Devices list, select MIDI Port Setup. The available MIDI inputs and outputs are listed. On Windows, the device to choose depends on your system. 3.
Recording MIDI Recording Specifics Selecting a Sound You can select sounds from within Cubase by instructing the program to send Program Change and Bank Select messages to your MIDI device. PROCEDURE 1. In the track list, select the track to which you want to assign a sound. 2. In the track list or the Inspector, open the Program Selector pop-up menu and select a program. Program Change messages give access to 128 different program locations. 3.
Recording MIDI Recording Specifics activate ASIO Latency Compensation on the track list, all recorded events are moved by the current latency setting. The following preferences affect MIDI recording: ● Length Adjustment ● Snap MIDI Parts to Bars ● MIDI Record Catch Range in ms ● ASIO Latency Compensation Active by Default You can find them in the Preferences dialog on the MIDI and on the Record—MIDI page.
Recording MIDI Recording Specifics Recording Program Change Messages When you switch from one program to another on your synthesizer or on another MIDI keyboard, a number corresponding to that program is sent out via MIDI as a Program Change message. You can record Program Change Messages together or independently from the notes, that is, afterwards or before. You can record Program Change Messages on their own tracks, separately from the notes to which they belong.
Recording MIDI Recording Specifics Replace Existing events in parts that are overlapped by a new recording are replaced. NOTE In Merge or Replace mode you can activate Record in Editor to record MIDI data in the editor. For this to work, the editor must have the focus. Otherwise, the data is recorded on the MIDI track in the Project window.
Recording Remaining Record Time Recovering MIDI Recordings Cubase allows you to recover MIDI recordings. Enabling Retrospective MIDI Record The Retrospective MIDI Record setting allows you to capture any MIDI notes that you play in Stop mode or during playback and turn them into a MIDI part after the fact. This is possible because Cubase can capture MIDI input in buffer memory, even when not recording. PROCEDURE 1. In the Preferences dialog, select Record > MIDI. 2.
Recording Lock Record NOTE An automatic punch out at the right locator position will be ignored in Lock Record mode.
Importing Audio and MIDI Files You can add audio and MIDI files to your project by importing them. Importing Audio Files You can import compressed and uncompressed audio files in a variety of different formats. You can also import audio from audio CDs or extract the audio of video files. RELATED LINKS Importing Media on page 539 Setting Up Audio File Import Options You can specify how audio files should be handled on import. PROCEDURE 1. In the Preferences dialog, select Editing > Audio. 2.
Importing Audio and MIDI Files Importing Audio Files Copy File to Working Directory Copies the audio file to the Audio folder of the project, and has the clip refer to the copy. Deactivate this option to have the clip refer to the original file in the original location. In this case, it is marked as “external” in the Pool. Convert to Project: Sample Rate/Sample Size Converts the imported file if the sample rate or the sample size differ from the settings in the Project Setup dialog.
Importing Audio and MIDI Files Importing Audio Files Convert to Project: Sample Rate/Sample Size Converts the imported file if the sample rate or the sample size differ from the settings in the Project Setup dialog. Split Channels/Split Multi Channel Files Splits stereo or multi channel audio files into a corresponding number of mono files, one for each channel, and copies the imported files to the Audio folder of the project.
Importing Audio and MIDI Files Importing Audio Files ● ● Layer 3. MP3 files are highly compressed files that still provide good audio quality. The files have the extension .mp3. Ogg Vorbis File This is an open source, patent-free audio encoding and streaming technology. The Ogg Vorbis encoder uses variable bit rate encoding. It offers compressed audio files of small size, but with comparatively high audio quality. The files have the extension .ogg.
Importing Audio and MIDI Files Importing Audio Files Import From Audio CD The Import from Audio CD dialog allows you to specify how the CD tracks are imported. Drive Opens a pop-up menu that allows you to select the correct CD drive. Speed Allows you to select the data transfer speed (Windows only). NOTE While you normally want to use the fastest possible speed, you may have to select a slower speed for flawless audio extraction. Eject CD Opens the CD drive.
Importing Audio and MIDI Files Importing Audio Files Size The file size of the audio CD track in MB. Copy Start The start of the section that is imported. On the ruler, drag to the right to adjust this. Copy End The end of the section that is imported. On the ruler, drag to the left to adjust this. The Ruler The ruler has the following functions: 1 Play Tracks Plays back the selected track from the start to the end or from the left marker to the right marker. 2 Stop Playback Stops playback.
Importing Audio and MIDI Files Importing Audio Files A new audio clip is created and added to the Pool. In the Project window, an event referencing the audio file is inserted on the selected track at the project cursor position. If no track was selected, a new track is created. RELATED LINKS Extract Audio from Video on page 965 Importing Video Files on page 960 Importing ReCycle Files You can import REX and REX 2 audio files created by ReCycle from Propellerhead Software.
Importing Audio and MIDI Files Importing MIDI Files Importing MIDI Files Cubase can import standard MIDI files. This allows you to transfer MIDI material to and from virtually any MIDI application on any platform. Import Options for MIDI Files The Import Options for MIDI files allow you to specify what data is included in imported MIDI files. Extract First Patch Converts the first Program Change and Bank Select events for each track to Inspector settings for the track.
Importing Audio and MIDI Files Importing MIDI Files Destination Allows you to specify what happens when you drag a MIDI file into the project: ● MIDI Tracks creates MIDI tracks for the imported file. ● Instrument Tracks creates instrument tracks for each MIDI channel in the MIDI file and lets the program automatically load appropriate presets.
Importing Audio and MIDI Files Importing MIDI Files RELATED LINKS Importing MIDI Loops on page 631 263
Quantizing MIDI and Audio Quantizing means moving recorded audio or MIDI and positioning it on the nearest grid position that is musically relevant. Quantizing is designed to correct errors, but you can also use it in a creative way. You can quantize audio and MIDI to a grid or to a groove. You can also quantize multiple audio tracks simultaneously. Audio and MIDI can be quantized at the same time.
Quantizing MIDI and Audio Quantizing MIDI Event Starts ● Quantize MIDI Event Lengths Cuts off the ends of selected MIDI events so that the events match the length quantize value. The start positions are kept. ● Quantize MIDI Event Ends Moves the ends of MIDI events to the nearest grid positions. ● Freeze MIDI Quantize Makes the start and end positions of MIDI events permanent.
Quantizing MIDI and Audio Quantizing MIDI Event Lengths Quantizing MIDI Event Lengths PREREQUISITE You have set up a length quantize value on the Length Quantize pop-up menu on the Key Editor toolbar. PROCEDURE 1. 2. Perform one of the following actions: ● In the Key Editor, select the MIDI events that you want to quantize. ● In the Project window, select a MIDI part. Select Edit > Advanced Quantize > Quantize MIDI Event Lengths.
Quantizing MIDI and Audio Quantizing Audio Event Lengths (AudioWarp Quantizing) (Cubase Pro only) RESULT The event snap point, or, if not available, the start of the audio event, is quantized. Event starts that do not match exact note positions are moved to the closest grid positions. NOTE If you use the Quantize function on an audio part, the starts of the events inside the part are quantized.
Quantizing MIDI and Audio Quantizing Multiple Audio Tracks (Cubase Pro only) NOTE The audio on all tracks must have the same start and end positions. 3. Select the folder track and activate Group Editing in the track list. 4. On the Project window toolbar, click Open Quantize Panel to open the Quantize Panel. 5. Make your settings in the Slice Rules section of the Quantize Panel, and click Slice. The audio events in the edit group are sliced. 6.
Quantizing MIDI and Audio Quantize Panel Quantize Panel The Quantize Panel allows you to define how to quantize audio or MIDI to the grid or to a groove. Depending on what method you choose, different parameters are shown. To open the Quantize Panel, perform one of the following actions: ● Click Open Quantize Panel on the toolbar. ● Select Edit > Quantize Panel. Quantize Presets To the top of the Quantize Panel the quantize presets are shown.
Quantizing MIDI and Audio Quantize Panel Save Preset Allows you to save the current settings as a preset, so that they become available on all Quantize Presets pop-up menus. Remove Preset Allows you to remove the selected preset. Rename Preset Opens a dialog where you can rename the selected preset. Restore Factory Presets Allows you to restore the factory presets. Creating Groove Quantize Presets You can create a groove quantize map based on hitpoints that you have created in the Sample Editor.
Quantizing MIDI and Audio Quantize Panel ● The following options become available: Grid Allows you to select the basic value for the quantize grid. Swing Offsets every second position in the grid, creating a swing or shuffle feel. NOTE Swing is only available if Grid is set to a straight value and Tuplet is deactivated. Catch Range Allows you to set a value that determines that quantizing affects only audio or MIDI within the set distance from the grid lines. This is reflected in the grid display.
Quantizing MIDI and Audio Quantize Panel iQ Mode Applies a loose quantization so that your audio or MIDI moves only part of the way to the closest quantize grid position. The Iterative Strength value to the right determines how close your audio or MIDI moves towards the grid. NOTE Iterative quantizing is based on the current, quantized positions and not on the original event positions.
Quantizing MIDI and Audio Quantize Panel The following options become available: Position Determines how much the timing of the groove affects the music. Velocity (MIDI Only) Determines how much the velocity values within the groove affect the music. NOTE Not all grooves contain velocity information. Length (MIDI Only) Allows you to specify how much the lengths of the notes are affected by the groove. NOTE For drums, the Length setting is ignored.
Quantizing MIDI and Audio Quantize Panel NOTE Iterative quantizing is based on the current, quantized positions and not on the original event positions. You can repeatedly use the iQ mode to gradually move your audio or MIDI closer to the quantize grid until you have found the right timing. AudioWarp Quantizes the content of your audio event by applying time stretch. The warp markers are aligned with the defined quantize grid. MIDI CC Moves controllers related to MIDI notes (pitchbend, etc.
Quantizing MIDI and Audio Quantize Panel Range Allows you to specify the distance in which two hitpoints on different tracks are considered to mark the same beat. Offset Allows you to set an offset that determines how far before the actual hitpoint position an audio event is sliced. This allows for slight variations of the cutting position and is useful if you want to create crossfades at the slice positions. Furthermore, it helps to avoid cutting off signals on tracks that do not contain any hitpoints.
Quantizing MIDI and Audio Quantize Panel RELATED LINKS Crossfade Editor on page 283 Options for AudioWarp Quantizing Multiple Audio Tracks The Warp Marker Creation Rules section becomes available when you activate AudioWarp quantizing for multiple audio tracks. Priority In this column, you can define a priority for each track. The track with the highest priority defines where the warp markers are created.
Fades, Crossfades, and Envelopes Fades allow you to gradually increase or decrease the volume at the start or end of audio events or audio clips, and to create smooth transitions. You can create the following fades: ● Fade ins/fade outs Fade ins and fade outs allow you to gradually increase or decrease the volume of audio events or audio clips. Fade ins and fade outs can be either event-based or clip-based. Event-based fades are calculated in real time when you play back audio events.
Fades, Crossfades, and Envelopes Event-Based Fades ● By using range selections You can edit event-based fades in the Fade dialogs. RELATED LINKS Creating and Editing Fades with the Handles on page 278 Creating and Editing Fades with the Range Selection Tool on page 279 Fade Dialog for Event-Based Fades on page 280 Creating and Editing Fades with the Handles You can create and edit event-based fade ins and fade outs using the event handles.
Fades, Crossfades, and Envelopes Event-Based Fades In the upper left and right corners you find triangular fade handles that allow you to change the fade-in or fade-out length. In the top middle you find a square handle that allows you to change the volume. ● To change the fade-in length, drag the fade handle in the upper left to the right or to the left. ● To change the fade-out length, drag the fade handle in the upper right to the left or to the right.
Fades, Crossfades, and Envelopes Event-Based Fades 2. Select Audio > Remove Fades. Fade Dialog for Event-Based Fades ● To open the dialog for event-based fades, create a fade for one or more audio events, select the events and select Audio > Open Fade Editor(s). NOTE If you select several events, you can adjust the fade curves for all selected events at the same time. This is useful if you want to apply the same type of fade in to more than one event, etc.
Fades, Crossfades, and Envelopes Creating Clip-Based Fades 8 ● To apply a stored preset, select it from the pop-up menu. ● To remove a stored preset, select it from the pop-up menu and click Remove. As Default Click this button to save the current settings as default fade. 9 Shape buttons Give you quick access to some common curve shapes. Creating Clip-Based Fades You can create and edit clip-based fade ins and fade outs using Direct Offline Processing. These fades are applied to the audio clip.
Fades, Crossfades, and Envelopes Crossfades New Version Click New Version to create a separate, new version of the audio clip for the selected event. Crossfades Crossfades allow you to create smooth transitions for consecutive audio events on the same track. Crossfades are always event-based. You can only create crossfades if the consecutive events or their respective clips overlap. ● If the audio events overlap, a crossfade of the default shape (linear, symmetric) is applied in the overlapping area.
Fades, Crossfades, and Envelopes Crossfades RESULT The crossfade length is adjusted to the selected range. Crossfade Editor The Crossfade editor allows you to edit crossfades. It contains fade-in and fade-out curve settings, and common settings. ● To open the Crossfade editor, select one or both crossfaded events, and select Audio > Crossfade, or double-click the crossfade zone. Fade curve displays Shows the shape of the fade-out and fade-in curve, respectively. ● To add points, click a curve.
Fades, Crossfades, and Envelopes Auto Fades and Crossfades ● To adjust the pre-roll time, use the Pre-roll Amount value field. ● To adjust the post-roll time, use the Post-roll Amount value field. Audition Level Allows you to set the audition level. Length Specifies the length of the crossfade area. Cubase tries to center the crossfade, i. e. the length change will be applied equally to both sides. To be able to resize a crossfade, it must be possible to resize the corresponding event.
Fades, Crossfades, and Envelopes Auto Fades and Crossfades NOTE Auto fades are not indicated by fade lines. Auto Fades Dialog The Auto Fades dialog allows you to set up auto fades and crossfades for the whole project, or separately for each audio track. ● To open the global Auto Fades dialog, select Project > Auto Fades Settings. ● To open the Auto Fades dialog for a track, right-click in the track list and select Auto Fades Settings. 1 Fades Click this tab to show the settings for auto fades.
Fades, Crossfades, and Envelopes Auto Fades and Crossfades Equal Gain allows you to adjust the fade curves so that the summed fade in and fade out amplitudes are the same all along the crossfade region. Equal Power allows you to adjust the fade curves so that the energy (power) of the crossfade is constant all along the crossfade region. 3 Length Allows you to specify the length of the auto fades or crossfades. 4 Auto Fade In Allows you to activate auto fade ins.
Fades, Crossfades, and Envelopes Event Envelopes PROCEDURE 1. Perform one of the following actions: ● Right-click the track in the track list, and from the context menu, select Auto Fades Settings. ● Select the track, and in the Inspector, click Auto Fades Settings. The Auto Fades dialog for the track opens. 2. Deactivate Use Project Settings. Any settings you now make are applied to the track only. 3. Set up the auto fades. 4. Click OK.
Fades, Crossfades, and Envelopes Event Envelopes ● To remove an event envelope curve from a selected event, select Audio > Remove Volume Curve. Creating Clip-Based Volume Changes PROCEDURE 1. In the Project window, select the event. 2. Select Audio > Process > Envelope. 3. In the Envelope dialog, make your settings, and click Process. RESULT The volume change is created. The waveform image of the event changes according to the volume change.
Arranger Track The arranger functions in Cubase allow you to work in a non-linear fashion. Using an arranger track allows you to specify how and when specific sections are played back, even in live performances. This way, you do not need to move, copy, and paste events in the Project window. NOTE There can be only one arranger track in a project. To use the arranger functions, you must add an arranger track and define arranger events. Arranger events can be of any length.
Arranger Track Arranger Editor PROCEDURE 1. Select Project > Add Track > Arranger. The arranger track is added. 2. Select the Draw tool and draw an arranger event on the arranger track. An arranger event is added. 3. Draw as many events as you need. RESULT The arranger events are added to your project. AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK Use the functions of the Arranger Editor to arrange the events.
Arranger Track Arranger Editor 1 Arranger Controls Shows the transport buttons, the arranger transport buttons, and the arranger tools. 2 Current Arranger Chain NOTE Initially, the arranger chain is empty. To fill it up, you must add events from the Arranger Events list. Shows the order in which the events are played back, from top to bottom, and how many times they are repeated. 3 Arranger Events Lists the available arranger events in the order they appear on the timeline.
Arranger Track Arranger Editor Removes the selected arranger chain. This is only available if you have created more than one arranger chain. 12 Flatten Converts the current arranger chain into a linear project. 13 Flatten (with Options & Preferences) Allows you to set up the flatten options. Arranger Chain Repeat Modes The Arranger Editor features a function that allows you to repeat and loop your arranger events. This way, you can create a sketch of a song structure.
Arranger Track Setting up an Arranger Chain and Adding Events New Project Allows you to flatten one or more chains in a new project with the following naming options: ● Append Chain Name Appends the chain names to the project name. ● Use Chain Name Names the new projects after the current arranger chains. ● Add Number Names the new projects after the old ones and adds a number. The Options section contains further settings. Keep Arranger Track Keeps the arranger track after flattening.
Arranger Track Setting up an Arranger Chain and Adding Events RELATED LINKS Arranger Chain Repeat Modes on page 292 Adding a New Arranger Chain You can create several arranger chains in order to set up alternative versions for playback. PREREQUISITE Arranger Mode is activated. PROCEDURE 1. Open the Arranger Editor. 2. Click Create New Chain. RESULT A new, empty arranger chain is activated.
Arranger Track Jump Mode PROCEDURE 1. Select the arranger chain that you want to convert into a linear project. 2. Optional: Click Flatten (with Options & Preferences) 3. Optional: Activate the desired flattening options. NOTE If you realize that you want to do further adjustments, click Go Back. The activated flatten options are kept. 4. Click Flatten.
Arranger Track Jump Mode RESULT The arranger event is looped according to your settings, until you click another arranger event. NOTE You can assign key commands to trigger arranger events in the Arranger category of the Key Commands dialog. AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK ● To stop Jump Mode, click Stop. ● To continue playback from a specific arranger event, click the arranger event in the Current Arranger Chain list.
Arranger Track Arranging Music to Video None Jumps to the next section immediately. 4 bars, 2 bars Jumps to the next arranger event after 2 or 4 bars. If the current arranger event is shorter than 2 or 4 bars, playback jumps to the next arranger event at the event end. 1 bar Jumps to the next section at the next bar line. 1 beat Jumps to the next section at the next beat. End Plays the current section to the end, then jumps to the next section.
Transpose Functions The transpose functions for audio and MIDI in Cubase allow you to change the pitches of audio and MIDI for playback without changing the actual MIDI notes or the audio. You can transpose the following: ● An entire project by changing the Project Root Key on the Project window toolbar. ● Specific sections of your project by creating a transpose track and adding transpose events. ● Individual parts or events by changing their transpose value on the Project window info line.
Transpose Functions Project Root Key RELATED LINKS Transposing with the Project Root Key on page 299 Transposing with the Project Root Key The loops included in Cubase already contain root key information. If you change the project root key, these loops will follow automatically. PREREQUISITE You have opened a project that contains audio loops with different root keys. PROCEDURE 1.
Transpose Functions Project Root Key Assigning the Project Root Key to Parts or Events Some audio or MIDI events that you have created by recording, for example, might not contain root key information. If you want them to follow the transposition changes, you must set them to the Project Root Key. PROCEDURE 1. On the Project window toolbar, open the Project Root Key pop-up menu and set a root key for the project. 2.
Transpose Functions Transpose Track Changing the Root Key of Individual Audio Events You can change or set the root key information for individual audio events or parts in the Pool. PROCEDURE 1. Select Media > Open Pool Window. 2. Open the View/Attributes pop-up menu, and activate the Root Key option. The Key column is displayed in the Pool window. 3. Click the Key column for the audio event or part that you want to assign a different root key to, and select a key from the pop-up menu.
Transpose Functions Transpose Track EXAMPLE If you want to brighten up your loops in C major, you can transpose them by adding a transpose track and creating a transpose event with the value 5. This transposes them by 5 semitones, so that the subdominant on F major is played back. EXAMPLE If you want to turn your song more interesting, you can transpose the last chorus of your project by adding a transpose track and creating a transpose event with the value 1.
Transpose Functions Keep Transpose in Octave Range RESULT The transpose events are not taken into account during playback. Transpose Lock The lock function on the transpose track allows you to prevent your transpose events from being moved or changed by mistake. To lock the transpose track, activate Lock in the track list. Keep Transpose in Octave Range Keep Transpose in Octave Range on the transpose track keeps the transposition in the octave range.
Transpose Functions Transpose on the Info Line Transpose Track and Recording The transpose track affects the result of the recorded parts or events. If your project contains a transpose track with transpose events, and you record audio or MIDI, the following happens: ● Global Transpose is automatically set to Independent for the recorded parts or events. ● The project root key is not taken into account.
Transpose Functions Excluding Individual Parts or Events from Global Transpose RESULT The event is transposed accordingly. The transpose value is added to any global transpose change that you have created by using the root key or the transpose track.
Markers Markers are used to locate certain positions quickly. There are two types of markers: position markers and cycle markers. If you often find yourself jumping to a specific position within a project, you should insert a marker at this position. You can also use markers to make range selections or for zooming. Markers are located on the marker track. You can add 1 marker track in Cubase Artist and up to 10 marker tracks in Cubase Pro.
Markers Markers Window AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK Now you can move the project cursor position to the start or the end of the cycle marker by moving it to the corresponding locator or use cycle markers to export specific ranges of your project with the Export Audio Mixdown dialog. Editing Cycle Markers When editing cycle markers on a marker track, snap is taken into account. ● To add a cycle marker, press Ctrl/Cmd click and drag on the marker track.
Markers Markers Window 4 Marker type Allows you to specify which marker type is shown in the marker list. 5 Auto-Scroll with Project Cursor Allows you to keep track of the locate arrow, even if your project contains a large number of markers. If this option is activated, the Marker window is automatically scrolled to keep the locate arrow visible. 6 Markers list Shows the markers in the order in which they occur in the project. 7 Marker Settings Shows the marker settings.
Markers Markers Window NOTE No matter by which attribute you sort, the second sort criterion will always be the position attribute. Marker Settings You can access the marker settings by clicking the corresponding button in the bottom left corner of the Markers window. Cycle follows when locating to Markers This sets the left and right locators automatically to a position or cycle marker, when locating to this marker.
Markers Markers Window ● To change the attributes of several markers, select the markers and click the checkbox for the desired attribute. All selected markers will change their attributes accordingly. Note that this does not work when clicking on a timecode value or a text field. NOTE To navigate in the list of marker attributes, you can also use the Tab key and the Up Arrow, Down Arrow, Left Arrow, and Right Arrow keys.
Markers Marker Track Marker Track A marker track is used for adding and editing markers. 1 Add Marker Adds a position marker at the cursor position. 2 Add Cycle Marker Adds a cycle marker at the cursor position. 3 Locate pop-up menu If you select a position or a cycle marker in this pop-up menu, the corresponding marker in the event display or in the Markers window is selected.
Markers Marker Track NOTE Cubase Pro only: When you remove all marker tracks, the marker track that you removed last (including all its markers) is moved to the clipboard. If you later insert a new marker track, this track is pasted from the clipboard into the track list. Cubase Pro only: Multiple Marker Tracks You can create up to 10 marker tracks. Naming Marker Tracks By default, the first marker track you create is called “Markers”, the second “Marker 01”, and so on.
Markers Marker Track 4. Activate the marker track for the first narrator, and play back the video file. 5. At the position where the first dialogue section should be replaced, trigger Insert and name Marker. The Marker window opens with the Description column active, so that you can insert a name for the new marker. 6. Enter a name or description for the section, and press Return to confirm. A new marker is created on the active track in the Project window. 7.
Markers Importing and Exporting Markers Using Markers to Select Ranges Markers can be used in conjunction with the Range Selection tool to make range selections in the Project window. This is useful if you quickly want to make a selection that spans all tracks in the project. PROCEDURE 1. Set markers at the start and end of the section that you want to move or copy. 2. Select the Range Selection tool and double-click on the marker track between the markers.
Markers Importing and Exporting Markers ● The start position of position markers and cycle markers ● Cubase Pro only: The track assignment of markers ● Cubase Pro only: All marker tracks NOTE Cubase Pro only: To be able to export markers via MIDI export, your project must contain at least one marker track. Cubase Artist only: To be able to export markers via MIDI export, your project must contain a marker track.
MixConsole The MixConsole provides a common environment for producing mixes in stereo or surround. It allows you to control level, pan, solo/mute status, etc. for audio and MIDI channels. Furthermore, you can set up the input and output routing for multiple tracks or channels at the same time. You can undo/redo MixConsole parameter changes for an open project at any time. You can open the MixConsole in a separate window or in the lower zone of the Project window.
MixConsole MixConsole in Lower Zone 1 Toolbar The toolbar shows tools and shortcuts for settings and functions in the MixConsole. 2 Fader Section The fader section is always visible and shows all channels in the same order as in the track list. 3 Page Selector Allows you to select what page is displayed in the fader section: the channel faders, the insert effects for a channel, or the send effects. The top button allows you to show/hide the toolbar.
MixConsole MixConsole in Lower Zone 4. Click to the left of a track name to activate/deactivate the visibility for a channel. RESULT The track in the track list and the corresponding MixConsole channel are shown/hidden in the lower zone of the Project window.
MixConsole MixConsole Window RESULT The channel is locked. Locked channels are always displayed. RELATED LINKS Opening the Zones Visibility on page 61 MixConsole Window You can open the MixConsole in a separate window. Do one of the following to open the MixConsole: ● Press F3. ● Select Studio > MixConsole. ● On the Project window toolbar, click Open MixConsole . NOTE This is only visible on the toolbar if the section Media & MixConsole Windows is activated.
MixConsole MixConsole Window 4 Fader Section The fader section is always visible and shows all channels in the same order as in the track list. Apart from the main sections, you can also access the following sections from within the MixConsole window: 1 Channel Overview Displays all channels as boxes. If you have more channels than can be displayed in the window, you can use the channel overview to navigate to other channels and select them.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Channel Racks on page 327 Track Pictures Browser on page 162 Adding Notes to a MixConsole Channel on page 362 Control Room (Cubase Pro only) on page 371 Channel Selector The channel selector contains the following tabs: Visibility and Zones that list all channels contained in your project, and History that lists all MixConsole parameter changes. Visibility Tab The Visibility tab allows you to determine which channels are shown in the MixConsole.
MixConsole MixConsole Window ● To undo MixConsole parameter actions, click Undo the history list and drag it up. ● To redo MixConsole parameter actions, click Redo the history list and drag it down. . You can also click the orange line in . You can also click the orange line in RELATED LINKS Undoing/Redoing MixConsole Parameter Changes on page 325 Synchronizing Channel and Track Visibility You can synchronize the channel visibility in the MixConsole with the track visibility in the Project window.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Allows you to use the left divider. Tools that are placed to the left of the divider are always shown. Search Opens a selector that lists all tracks/channels. Channel Filter Types Opens the channel filter that allows you to show/hide all channels of a certain channel type. Channel Visibility Configurations Allows you to create configurations that are useful for switching quickly between different visibility setups.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Allows you to set mute, solo, listen, and automation states. Here you can also bypass inserts, EQs, channel strips, and sends. Link Group Allows you to link channels. Zoom Palette Allows you to increase/reduce the channel width and the rack height. You can change the width for all channels from viewable (narrow) to editable (wide) by using the default key commands G and H. System Performance Meter Shows the meters for ASIO time usage and hard disk transfer load.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Undoing/Redoing MixConsole Parameter Changes You can undo/redo MixConsole parameter changes and experiment with different MixConsole settings. NOTE MixConsole parameters that change due to read automation actions are not part of the MixConsole history. To undo/redo a MixConsole parameter, do one of the following: ● On the MixConsole toolbar in the MixConsole window or in the lower zone of the Project window, click Undo ● or Redo .
MixConsole MixConsole Window 2. Click to the left of a channel type to uncheck it and hide all channels of that type. RESULT Channels of the filtered type are removed from the fader section and the color of the Filter Channel Types button changes to indicate that a channel type is hidden. Channel Visibility Configurations The Channel Visibility Configurations button on the MixConsole toolbar allows you to create configurations that are useful for switching quickly between different visibility setups.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Channel Visibility Agents Channel visibility agents allow you to show or hide all channels, selected channels, or channels with certain properties. To open the Channel Visibility Agents pop-up menu, do one of the following: ● Click Channel Visibility Agents on the toolbar. ● In the Channel Selector, open the Visibility tab and right-click to open the context menu.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Depending on the channel type, you can activate/deactivate the following racks: Hardware Allows you to control your audio hardware effects. This rack is only available if supported by your hardware. Routing Allows you to set up the input and output routing. For MIDI, you can also select the MIDI channel. Pre (Filters/Gain/Phase) For audio-related channels, it contains input filter and gain controls along with Phase and Gain controls.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Show Pre/Filters as Select Combined Label & Setting if you want to show the label and the setting in one line. Select Separate Label & Setting if you want to show the label and the setting in separate lines. Show Inserts as Select Plug-in Names if you want to show the plug-in names only. Select Plug-in & Preset Names if you want to show the plug-in and the preset names.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Link Group Settings (Cubase Pro only) The Link Group Settings dialog allows you to specify the channel settings that are linked. ● To open the Link Group Settings dialog, click Link on the MixConsole toolbar. The following options are available: Name Allows you to enter a name for the link group. Use VCA Fader Activate this option to assign the link group to a VCA fader. Volume Activate this to link the volume of the linked channels.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Record Enable/Monitor Activate this to link the record enable/monitor states of the linked channels. NOTE By default the volume, sends, routing, and selection settings are activated. If you associate a link group to a VCA fader, only the sends and the routing parameters are activated. Display Line (Cubase Pro only) Whenever you create a link group, a display line is added on top of the fader section in the MixConsole.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Creating Link Groups (Cubase Pro only) You can link several channels to form a link group. PROCEDURE 1. Select the channels that you want to link. 2. On the MixConsole toolbar, click Link. 3. In the Link Group Settings dialog, activate the parameters that you want to link. 4. Click OK. RESULT The number and name of the link group is indicated above the channel name in the display line.
MixConsole MixConsole Window 2. Select Included in Link Group: and select the link group. RESULT The channel is added to the link group. Removing Channels from Link Groups (Cubase Pro only) You can remove a channel from an existing link group. PROCEDURE 1. On the display line of the channel that you want to remove, open the pop-up menu. 2. Select Included in Link Group: , and from the link group list, select None. 3.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Zoom Opens a submenu where you can increase or reduce the channel width and the rack height. Open Audio Connections Opens the Audio Connections window. Control Room Cue Channels Opens a submenu where you can activate/deactivate cue channels and change level and panning settings.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Loading MixConsole Settings You can load MixConsole settings that have been saved for selected channels. PROCEDURE 1. Select the same number of channels that you selected when you saved your MixConsole settings. The loaded MixConsole settings are applied in the same order as originally saved.
MixConsole MixConsole Window follow any visibility changes you perform in the MixConsole window and vice versa. It is linked to the track visibility of the Project window.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Stereo Combined Panner (Cubase Pro only) With the stereo combined panner, the left and right pan controls are linked and keep their relative distance if you move them. It is available for channels with a stereo input and output configuration. ● To activate this panner, open the context menu for a pan control and select Stereo Combined Panner. ● To set the pan independently for the left and right channels, hold down Alt and drag left or right.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Listen Mode (Cubase Pro only) The listen mode allows you to quickly check the signal that is coming from selected channels without interrupting and interfering with the actual mix. During a recording session it allows the sound engineer in the control room to attenuate the signal that is coming from one of the musicians while the recording continues undisturbed, for example. NOTE To enable the listen mode, you need to enable the Control Room.
MixConsole MixConsole Window This is done on the Routing tab in the Inserts section. ● Moving the channel strip to Pre/Post-Inserts position By default, the inserts are positioned before the channel strip in the signal flow. In the Inserts section, you can change this by clicking the arrow at the top of the Strip tab. The tabs are swapped. ● Making EQ settings The channel settings feature a large EQ curve display with several modes.
MixConsole MixConsole Window This is the default behavior. If this is not what you want, open the Functions menu and deactivate Follow ‘e’ buttons or selection changes. ● Select a track in the Project window to select the corresponding channel in the MixConsole and the Channel Settings window. This is the default behavior. If this is not what you want, deactivate Sync Selection in Project Window and MixConsole in the Preferences dialog (Editing—Project & MixConsole page).
MixConsole MixConsole Window Level Meters The channel meters show the level when you play back audio or MIDI. The Meter Peak Level indicator shows the highest registered level. ● To reset the peak level, Alt-click the Meter Peak Level value. NOTE Input and output channels have clipping indicators. When they light up, lower the gain or the levels until the indicator is no longer lit.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Clipping Clipping typically occurs in the audio hardware when an analog signal is too loud and therefore converted to digital in the hardware’s A/D converters. Clipping can also occur when the signal from the input bus is written to a file on your hard disk. The reason for this is that you can make settings for the input bus, adding EQ, effects, etc. to the signal while it is being recorded.
MixConsole MixConsole Window The following applies: ● To move the rack settings from one rack to another, drag the rack and drop it on the rack to which you want to move the settings. ● To copy the rack settings from one rack to another, press Alt, drag the rack, and drop it on the rack to which you want to copy the settings. ● To copy the channel settings from one channel to another, drag the channel and drop it on the channel to which you want to copy the settings.
MixConsole MixConsole Window ● To set several selected channels to incrementing busses (the second selected channel to the second bus, the third to the third bus, etc.), press Shift and select a bus. ● To disconnect input or output bus assignments, select No Bus. Input Busses The input routing selector only lists busses that correspond to the channel configuration. NOTE If you select a group channel as input for an audio channel, you can record a downmix.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Output Busses For output busses any assignment is possible. Using Group Channels You can route the outputs from multiple audio channels to a group. This enables you to control the channel levels using one fader, apply the same effects and EQ to all channels, etc. You can also select a group channel as input for an audio track, to record a downmix of separate tracks, for example. PREREQUISITE You have created and set up a group channel track in stereo. PROCEDURE 1.
MixConsole MixConsole Window You can choose between 6, 12, 24, 36, and 48 dB. The default value is 12 dB. 3. Click to the left of the low-cut filter to activate the low-cut filter. You have the following options: ● Drag the slider to adjust the cutoff frequency. The available range spans from 20 Hz to 20 kHz. ● Click Select Filter Slope on the right of the low-cut filter to select a filter slope. You can choose between 6, 12, 24, 36, and 48 dB. The default value is 12 dB.
MixConsole MixConsole Window 3. Click an insert effect to select it. RESULT The selected insert effect is loaded and automatically activated. Its plug-in panel opens. Moving Inserts to Post-Fader or Pre-Fader Position For each audio-related channel, you can add pre-fader and post-fader inserts. PROCEDURE ● Do one of the following: ● Right-click an insert effect in a pre-fader position, and from the context menu, select Set as last Pre-Fader Slot.
MixConsole MixConsole Window NOTE You can also apply inserts together with EQ and channel strip settings from track presets. You can load, tag, and save FX chain presets in the MediaBay. Equalizers (EQ) The Equalizers (EQ) rack is only available for audio-related channels. It features a built-in parametric equalizer with up to 4 bands for each audio channel. NOTE This channel rack is only available in the MixConsole window. Activating Equalizer Bands PROCEDURE 1.
MixConsole MixConsole Window 2 Curve Display Click on the display in a channel to show a larger version. The display is also available in the Equalizers section of the Inspector and in the Channel Settings dialog. Hovering with the mouse over the display shows a cross-hair cursor. The current mouse position shows the frequency, note value, offset, and level at the top or bottom of the display. ● Click and hold to add a curve point and activate the corresponding EQ band.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Determines the width of the affected frequency range. Higher values give narrower frequency ranges. 5 Type Opens a pop-up menu where you can select an EQ type for the band. Bands 1 and 4 can act as parametric, shelving, or high/low-cut filters. EQ bands 2 and 3 are always parametric filters. RELATED LINKS Making Filter Settings on page 345 Saving/Loading EQ Presets You can save and load EQ presets.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Limit Allows you to avoid clipping even at high levels. Noise Gate Noise gating silences audio signals below a set threshold. As soon as the signal level exceeds the threshold, the gate opens to let the signal through. Threshold (-60 to 0 dB) Determines the level at which Gate is activated. Signal levels above the set threshold trigger the gate to open, and signal levels below the set threshold close the gate. Side-Chain Activates the external side-chain.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Side-Chain Activates the external side-chain. Ratio (1:1 to 8:1) Sets the amount of gain reduction that is applied to signals above the set threshold. A ratio of 3:1 means that for every 3 dB the input level increases, the output level increases by 1 dB. Gain Reduction LED Indicates the amount of compression of the signal. Attack (0.1 to 100 ms) Determines how fast the compressor responds to signals above the set threshold.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Input (-24 to 48 dB) In combination with the Output setting, this parameter determines the compression amount. The higher the input gain setting and the lower the output gain setting, the more compression is applied. Side-chain Activates the external side-chain. Output (-48 to 24 dB) Sets the output gain. Gain Reduction LED Indicates the amount of compression of the signal. Attack (0.1 to 100 ms) Determines how fast the compressor responds.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Tools Provides various tools. DeEsser This channel strip module reduces excessive sibilance, primarily for vocal and speech recordings. Basically, it is a special type of compressor that is tuned to be sensitive to the frequencies produced by the s-sound. Close proximity microphone placement and equalizing can lead to situations where the overall sound is just right, but there is a problem with sibilants. Reduction Controls the intensity of the de-essing effect.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Release (-20 to 20 dB) Changes the gain of the release phase of the signal. Length (5 to 200 ms) Determines the length of the attack phase. Output (-24 to 12 dB) Sets the output level. Sat Allows you to add warmth to the sound. Open the pop-up menu to select between Magneto II, Tape Saturation, and Tube Saturation. Magneto II This channel strip module simulates the saturation and compression of recording on analog tape machines.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Dual Mode Simulates the use of two tape machines. Auto Gain Adjusts the gain automatically. Output Sets the output gain. Drive Amount LED Indicates the amount of drive of the signal. Low-Frequency This is a low shelving filter with fixed frequency. High-Frequency This is a Hi Cut filter. Use the frequency fader to reduce harshness of the output signal. Tube Saturation This channel strip module simulates the saturation and compression of recording of analogue tube compressors.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Maximizer This channel strip module raises the loudness of audio material without the risk of clipping. Optimize Determines the loudness of the signal. Output (-24 to 6 dB) Determines the maximum output level. Set this to 0 dB to avoid clipping. Gain Reduction LED Displays the amount of gain reduction. Mix (0 to 100) Sets the level balance between the dry signal and the wet signal.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Sends The Sends rack for audio-related channels features send effect slots that allow you to load send effects and value sliders that allow you to determine the send level for a channel. For MIDI channels the Sends rack features send effect slots that allow you to load send effects. Adding Send Effects PROCEDURE 1. On the MixConsole toolbar, click Racks and activate Sends to show the rack above the fader section. 2. Click one of the send slots to open the send selector. 3.
MixConsole MixConsole Window 2. Click one of the slots to open the send selector. The cue sends are displayed. 3. Click on the left of the slot to activate the cue send. RESULT You can now change the level and pan settings. Direct Routing (Cubase Pro only) In addition to the main output, the Direct Routing rack allows you to set up 7 routing destinations that are positioned post-fader and post-panner in the signal path.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Automating Destination Switches PROCEDURE 1. Play back your project and take note of the positions where routing changes are necessary. 2. Write-enable the corresponding track. 3. At the right moment, click on the routing destination to which you want to switch. The new destination is now active, and the switch has been recorded as automation data. 4. Continue to record destination changes for your project.
MixConsole MixConsole Window When performing an automatic downmix from 5.1 to stereo, the levels are adjusted as follows: Automatic Downmixing from 5.1 to stereo L L R 0.0 R 0.0 C Lfe Ls -3.01 -3.01 -6.02 -3.01 -3.01 Rs -6.02 Center and Lfe signals are split to L and R channels, Ls and Rs are sent to L and R respectively, but reduced in volume. When performing an automatic downmix from 7.1 Music (Dolby) to 5.1 the levels are adjusted as follows: Automatic Downmixing from 7.
MixConsole MixConsole Window RESULT The selected parameter is loaded and automatically activated as Track Quick Control. Assigning Parameters from Racks or Channel Settings You can assign several parameters to Quick Control slots directly from within racks or channel settings in the MixConsole. Some specific racks and channel settings allow you to add several parameters directly to the Quick Controls section in the Inspector.
MixConsole MixConsole Window 3. To close the notepad, press Esc, or click in another section of the MixConsole. Keyboard Focus in the MixConsole The channel selector section, the channel rack section, and the fader section can be controlled with the computer keyboard. For this to work, the section must have the focus. If a section has the keyboard focus, the border that surrounds it is highlighted in a specific color. Activating Keyboard Focus PROCEDURE 1.
VCA Faders (Cubase Pro only) VCA faders serve as remote controls for groups of channel faders in the MixConsole. VCA stands for Voltage-Controlled Amplifier. VCA faders were originally found on hardware mixing desks. They allowed the user to control the volume levels of several mixer channels with only one fader. To assign channel faders to a VCA fader, the respective channels must be physically connected with the VCA fader. In Cubase, the VCA fader function is based on the same concept.
VCA Faders (Cubase Pro only) VCA Fader Settings 1 Link group number 2 Link group name 3 VCA fader pop-up menu 4 Peak meter that displays the summed up level of all channel meters in the link group 5 Fader cap The VCA fader pop-up menu provides the following options: Edit Link Group Settings Allows you to change the link group settings. VCA Fader Controls Link Group: Shows the link group that the VCA fader controls. You can assign the VCA fader to a different link group.
VCA Faders (Cubase Pro only) Creating VCA Faders Creating Smooth Transitions Between Automation Events (Bézier Automation Curves) on page 605 Link Group Settings (Cubase Pro only) on page 330 Creating VCA Faders You can create VCA faders in several ways. VCA faders can be created in the MixConsole and in the Project window. In the MixConsole, you have the following options: ● You can create unassigned VCA faders in the fader section.
VCA Faders (Cubase Pro only) Assigning VCA Faders to Link Groups Link Group Settings (Cubase Pro only) on page 330 Assigning VCA Faders to Link Groups You can link channels and assign VCA faders to control them. PREREQUISITE You have selected channels. PROCEDURE 1. Click Link on the MixConsole toolbar. 2. In the Link Group Settings dialog, click in the Name field to enter a name for the link group. 3. Activate Use VCA Fader. The Volume parameter is automatically deactivated. 4.
VCA Faders (Cubase Pro only) Nested VCA Faders NOTE You can keep the VCA fader in the fader section. In this case, open the VCA fader pop-up menu, select VCA Fader Controls Link Group: , and select None. This removes only the VCA fader assignment. RELATED LINKS Link Group Settings (Cubase Pro only) on page 330 Nested VCA Faders VCA faders can control other VCA faders.
VCA Faders (Cubase Pro only) VCA Fader Automation For the channels, the original automation is adjusted by the volume level of the VCA fader track. EXAMPLE The VCA fader track automation affects an existing volume automation of an audio track. The lighter static value line displays the VCA fader automation that has not been written yet. The VCA fader track has a different automation curve that affects the automation of the audio track.
VCA Faders (Cubase Pro only) VCA Fader Automation 3 Combined automation of VCA fader and connected channel. This is what you hear.
Control Room (Cubase Pro only) The Control Room allows you to divide the studio environment into the performing area (studio) and the engineer/producer area (control room). To open the Control Room you have the following options: ● To open the Control Room in a separate window, select Studio > Control Room. ● To open the Control Room section in the MixConsole window, click Show/Hide Right Zone ● in the MixConsole toolbar.
Control Room (Cubase Pro only) Output Routing Output Routing For the Control Room to function correctly, you must assign the Main Mix bus to the set of outputs that contains the mix that you want to hear. If you only have one output bus, it automatically becomes the Main Mix. All other outputs are not routed through the Control Room. Exclusive Assignment of Monitor Channels Generally, the port assignment to the Control Room channels is exclusive.
Control Room (Cubase Pro only) Control Room - Main Tab Cue Channels You can use cue channels for sending cue mixes, also known as headphone mixes, to performers in the studio during recording. You can create up to 4 cue channels in mono or stereo for 4 discrete cue mixes. Cue channels have talkback and click functions. They allow you to monitor the main mix, external inputs, or a dedicated cue mix.
Control Room (Cubase Pro only) Control Room - Main Tab External The External section allows you to use external inputs for monitoring external devices. It is only shown if you have added more than one external input in the Audio Connections window. To switch to another external input, click the input name and select a new external input from the pop-up menu.
Control Room (Cubase Pro only) Control Room - Main Tab Cue Channel The Cue Channel section allows you to set up cue channels for sending cue mixes. 1 Activate Cue Channel Allows you to activate/deactivate the cue channel. 2 Source Selectors Allow you to select the source for the cue channel: monitor mix (Mix), external inputs (Ext), or the cue sends (Cues). The signal presence indicators in the upper left corner light up when the source channel is sending data to the cue channel.
Control Room (Cubase Pro only) Control Room - Main Tab Allows you to listen to all soloed speakers in the center channel. If the center channel is not available, the channels are distributed equally to the left and right. 5 Listen to Surround Channels on Front Channels Allows you to solo the surround channels and route them to the front speakers. 6 Solo LFE Channel Allows you to solo the LFE channel. Monitors The Monitors section allows you to select and configure the monitor sets.
Control Room (Cubase Pro only) Control Room - Main Tab 1 Activate Phones Channel Allows you to activate/deactivate the phones channel. 2 Activate Metronome Click Activates the metronome click. 3 Source Selectors Allow you to select the source for the phones channel: monitor mix (Mix), external inputs (Ext), or the cue sends (Cues). The signal presence indicators in the upper left corner light up when the source channel is sending data to the Phones channel.
Control Room (Cubase Pro only) Control Room - Main Tab Allows you to set the volume for the Control Room output. This does not affect the recording input level or the Main Mix level for exporting mixdowns. Ctrl/Cmd-click to set the level to the reference level specified in the Preferences dialog (VST—Control Room page). 3 Signal Meter Shows the volume for the Control Room output. 1 Source Selectors Allow you to select the source for the Control Room channel.
Control Room (Cubase Pro only) Control Room - Inserts Tab Allows you to determine whether the signal of a listen-enabled channel is routed to the Control Room channel after applying the fader and pan settings (AFL) or before applying the fader and pan settings (PFL). 3 Enable Listen for Output Enables the listen bus function for the Control Room output. 4 Listen Level Allows you to adjust the volume of listen bus signals that are routed to the Control Room output.
Control Room (Cubase Pro only) Control Room - Inserts Tab Input Gain Setting up the input gain can be useful in the following situations: 380
Control Room (Cubase Pro only) Setting Up a Cue Mix ● To balance the level of external inputs, for example, CD players and other sources to the Main Mix level, for A/B comparisons. ● To balance the level of your monitor systems, so that switching between sets of speakers does not change the playback volume. Input Phase Reversing the input phase can be useful for external inputs and monitor speaker outputs. Insert Effects Each Control Room channel has a set of insert effect slots.
Control Room (Cubase Pro only) Adjusting the Overall Cue Send Level 3. Select From selected mixer channels and select one of the functions. Cue Mix Context Menu Change Cue Sends Levels Allows you to adjust multiple send levels at the same time. Use Current Mix Levels Allows you to copy the fader levels of the selected tracks to the cue sends. This sets all cue send levels for the selected tracks to the level of the main channel fader.
Control Room (Cubase Pro only) Adjusting the Overall Cue Send Level 5. Adjust the level as necessary. The level of all selected cue sends is adjusted by the set amount. 6. Click OK.
Metering and Loudness (Cubase Pro only) Cubase provides a master meter that works as a multichannel true peak meter, and a loudness meter that allows you to measure the loudness in compliance with the loudness recommendation R 128 of the European Broadcasting Union (EBU). Metering Cubase provides a master meter and a loudness meter that can be shown to the right of the fader section in the MixConsole window or in a separate window in the Control Room.
Metering and Loudness (Cubase Pro only) Loudness Measurement Allows you to select an alignment level (offset) for your scale. This is unavailable for digital and K-System scales. The broadcast meter scales DIN, EBU, Nordic, and British have a default alignment level of -18 dBFS. 4 Reset RMS and PPM Max Resets the measurement. 5 AES17 standard Activates the AES17 standard that adds an offset of 3 dB to the RMS value.
Metering and Loudness (Cubase Pro only) Loudness Measurement into small blocks. Every second there is one audio block, and each block lasts 3 seconds so that the analyzed blocks overlap. The top 10 % of the quiet blocks and the top 5 % of the loud blocks are excluded from the final analysis. The calculated loudness range is the ratio between the loudest and quietest remaining audio blocks. This measurement helps you to decide if and how much compression or expansion you can or should apply to the audio.
Metering and Loudness (Cubase Pro only) Loudness Measurement 1 Control Room view Activates the Control Room section. 2 Loudness meter Shows the Integrated value as a triangle in the left meter scale and the Short-Term value as a triangle in the right meter scale. 3 Measure Loudness Activates the loudness measurement. 4 Switch between LU and LUFS Switches the meter scale between LUFS (absolute values) and LU (relative values).
Metering and Loudness (Cubase Pro only) Loudness Measurement Shows the average loudness measured from start to stop. The period of measurement is shown in the Time display. The recommended value for the integrated loudness is -23 LUFS. This absolute value is the reference point for the relative LU scale where -23 LUFS equals 0 LU. 10 Range Shows the dynamic range of the audio measured from start to stop. This value helps you to decide how much dynamic compression you can apply.
Metering and Loudness (Cubase Pro only) Loudness Measurement Allows you to specify a reference value and a tolerance value for the integrated loudness. If higher values are detected, the clipping indicator in the loudness meter turns red. 5 True Peak Allows you to specify a reference value and a tolerance value for the true peak level. If higher values are detected, the clipping indicator in the loudness meter turns red.
Audio Effects Cubase comes with a number included of effect plug-ins that you can use to process audio, group, instrument, and ReWire channels. This chapter contains general details about how to assign, use, and organize effect plug-ins. The effects and their parameters are described in the separate document Plug-in Reference. Insert Effects and Send Effects You can apply effects to audio channels by using insert effects or send effects.
Audio Effects Insert Effects and Send Effects Send Effects Send effects can be added to FX channel tracks, and the audio data to be processed can be routed to the effect. This way, the send effects remain outside the audio channel’s signal path. Each audio channel has 8 sends, each of which can be freely routed to an effect (or to a chain of effects). Use send effects in the following cases: ● To control the balance between the dry and wet sound individually for each channel.
Audio Effects Insert Effects NOTE Check the processor for the passage with the largest number of events playing simultaneously to make sure that your system offers the required performance at every time position. Side-Chain Inputs Several VST 3 effects feature side-chain inputs. These allow you to control the operation of the effect via external signals that are routed to the side-chain input. The effect processing is still applied to the main audio signal.
Audio Effects Insert Effects NOTE To show all post-fader slots in the MixConsole, open the Rack Settings and activate Fixed Number of Slots. Use post-fader slots for insert effects where you want the level to remain unchanged after the effect. Dithering and maximizers are typically used as post-fader insert effects for output busses, for example. NOTE If you want to use an effect with identical settings on several channels, set up a group channel and apply your effect as a single insert for this group.
Audio Effects Insert Effects ● Locate the input channel and click Edit Channel Settings to edit the input bus. ● Locate the output channel and click Edit Channel Settings to edit the output bus. The Channel Settings window for the selected channel opens. 3. In the Inserts section, click the first insert slot on the Inserts tab, and select an effect from the selector. RESULT The selected insert effect is added to the bus and activated. The effect control panel is opened.
Audio Effects Insert Effects Rearranging Insert Effects You can change the position of an insert effect in the signal chain of the audio channel by moving it to a different slot of the same channel. You can also move an insert effect to another audio channel. PREREQUISITE You have added at least one insert effect to an audio channel. PROCEDURE 1. Select Studio > MixConsole. 2. In the Inserts rack, locate the insert effect that you want to rearrange. 3.
Audio Effects Insert Effects 2. In the Inspector, open the Inserts section, and click Bypass Insert. RESULT The effect is bypassed, but still processing in the background. Removing Insert Effects PROCEDURE 1. Select the audio track that contains the insert effect that you want to remove. 2. In the Inspector, click Select Insert. 3. In the effect selector, select No Effect. RESULT The insert effect is removed from the audio channel.
Audio Effects Insert Effects ● macOS: User/Documents In the MixConsole, the frozen audio channel is indicated by a snow flake symbol above the channel name. You can still adjust the level and panning, make EQ settings and adjust the effect sends. AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK To unfreeze a frozen track, click Freeze again. Insert Effects in Multi-Channel Configurations (Cubase Pro only) You can insert VST 2 and VST 3 effects on tracks with a multi-channel configuration.
Audio Effects Insert Effects NOTE To route a stereo plug-in through all 6 channels of a 5.1 track, add 3 instances of it and use different speaker channels for each instance. RELATED LINKS Routing Editor on page 398 Routing Editor The Routing Editor allows you to set up, to what speaker channels the effect is applied to. The Routing Editor shows the channels in the current configuration, with signals passing from top to bottom. 1 Outputs The lower squares represent the outputs from the effect plug-in.
Audio Effects Send Effects Routing Connection The audio on the speaker channel is routed through the effect channel and processed by the effect. Bypass Connection The audio on the speaker channel passes the effect without being processed. Broken Connection The audio on the speaker channel is not sent to the output. Cross Connection The audio on the specific channels is processed by the effect and output on other channels. In this example, the audio on the Ls-Rs channels is output on the L-R channels.
Audio Effects Send Effects This allows for automating various effect parameters. ● You can route the effect return to any output bus. ● You can adjust the FX channel in the MixConsole. This includes adjusting the effect return level, the balance, and the EQ. When you add an FX channel track, you can select if FX channel tracks are created inside or outside a dedicated folder. If you select Create Inside Folder, FX channel tracks are shown in a dedicated folder.
Audio Effects Send Effects 2. In the Inserts section, click an insert slot on the Inserts tab, and select an effect from the selector. RESULT The selected effect is added as an insert effect to the FX channel track. Routing Audio Channels to FX Channels If you route an audio channel send to an FX channel, the audio is routed through the insert effects that you have set up for the FX channel. PROCEDURE 1. Select the audio track. 2.
Audio Effects Send Effects The audio channel signal is sent to the FX channel before the audio channel volume fader. ● Post-fader sends The audio channel signal is sent to the FX channel after the audio channel volume fader. ● To move a send to pre-fader position, open the Channel Settings window for the audio channel, right-click a send and select Move to Pre-Fader. The Pre-/Post-Fader button indicates that the send is in pre-fader position.
Audio Effects Send Effects The send panners will then follow the pan for the channel, making the stereo imaging as clear and true as possible. NOTE In the Preferences dialog (VST page), you can set this as a default behavior for all channels. 5. Click and drag the pan control for the send. NOTE You can reset the pan control to the center position by Ctrl/Cmd-clicking on the pan control. RELATED LINKS Surround Sound (Cubase Pro only) on page 583 Setting Level for the Sends PROCEDURE 1.
Audio Effects Side-Chain Input 4. In the track list, select the audio track that is routed through the effect for which you want to set the level. 5. Click Edit Channel Settings to open the Channel Settings window for the audio track. 6. In the Sends section on the Destinations tab, locate the effect slot and drag to the left or right to set the send level. This determines how much of the signal from the audio channel is routed to the FX channel.
Audio Effects Side-Chain Input Side-Chain and Modulation Side-chain signals bypass the built-in LFO modulation and apply modulation according to the envelope of the side-chain signal. Since each channel is analyzed and modulated separately, this allows for creating astonishing spatial modulation effects. Triggering a Delay Effect with Side-Chain Signals You can use side-chain signals to create a ducking delay effect.
Audio Effects Dither Effects Triggering a Compressor with Side-Chain Signals Compression, expansion, or gating can be triggered by side-chain signals exceeding a specified threshold. This allows you to lower the volume of one audio signal every time another audio signal sets in. PREREQUISITE You have set up a project with a bass guitar and a bass drum track, for example, and you want to lower the bass guitar volume each time the bass drum hits. PROCEDURE 1. Select the bass guitar track. 2.
Audio Effects External Effects (Cubase Pro only) Set this to the resolution of your audio hardware, for playback, or to the desired resolution for the mixdown file you want to create. RELATED LINKS Export Audio Mixdown on page 922 Rack Settings on page 328 External Effects (Cubase Pro only) You can integrate external effect devices into the sequencer signal flow by setting up external FX busses.
Audio Effects Effect Presets 6 Activate Side-Chain Activates the side-chain functionality. 7 Preset browser Opens the preset browser where you can select another preset. 8 Preset Management Opens a pop-up menu that allows you to save, rename, or remove a preset. 9 Functions menu Opens a menu with specific functions and settings. NOTE For detailed information about the included effects and their parameters, see the separate document Plug-in Reference.
Audio Effects Effect Presets ● macOS: /Users//Library/Audio/Presets// RELATED LINKS Loading Effect Presets on page 410 Loading Insert Presets on page 412 Preset Browser The preset browser allows you to select a VST preset for the loaded effect. ● To open the preset browser, click the preset browser field in the effect control panel. NOTE The preset browser contains the Results and the Previewer sections.
Audio Effects Effect Presets Loading Effect Presets Most VST effect plug-ins come with a number of useful presets that you can instantly select. PREREQUISITE You have loaded an effect, either as a channel insert or into an FX channel, and the effect control panel is open. PROCEDURE 1. Perform one of the following actions: ● Click the preset browser field at the top of the control panel.
Audio Effects Effect Presets PROCEDURE 1. Open the Preset Management pop-up menu. 2. Select Save Preset The Save Preset pane opens. 3. In the New Preset section, enter a name for the new preset. 4. Optional: Click New Folder to add a subfolder inside the effect preset folder. 5. Optional: Click Show Attribute Inspector in the bottom left corner of the pane and define attributes for the preset. 6. Click OK. RESULT The effect preset is saved.
Audio Effects Effect Presets 3. Open another instance of the same effect. 4. Right-click the control panel and select Paste Setting from the context menu. Saving Insert Presets You can save the inserts of the inserts effect rack for a channel, together with all parameter settings as an inserts preset. Insert presets can be applied to audio, instrument, FX channel, or group tracks.
Audio Effects System Component Information Window 5. Double-click to apply the preset and close the pane. RESULT The effects of the insert effect preset are loaded and any plug-ins that were previously loaded for the track are removed. Loading Insert Effect Settings from Track Presets You can extract the effects that are used in a track preset and load them into your inserts rack. PROCEDURE 1. Select the track to which you want to apply the new preset. 2. In the Inspector, open the Inserts section.
Audio Effects System Component Information Window Update (only available for MIDI Plug-ins) Re-scans the designated plug-in folders for updated system component information. The following columns are available: Active Allows you to activate or deactivate a plug-in. Instances The number of plug-in instances that are used in Cubase. Name The name of the plug-in. Vendor The manufacturer of the plug-in. File The name of the plug-in, including its file name extension.
Audio Effects System Component Information Window PROCEDURE 1. In the System Component Information window, right-click in the middle of the window and select Export. 2. In the dialog, specify a name and location for the system component information export file. 3. Click Save to export the file.
Direct Offline Processing Direct Offline Processing allows you to instantly add plug-in effects (Cubase Pro only) and audio processes to the selected audio events, clips, or ranges, without destructing the original audio. Applying offline effects is common practice in dialogue editing and sound design. Offline processing has several advantages over applying realtime mixer effects: ● The workflow is clip-based. This allows you to apply different effects to events on the same track.
Direct Offline Processing Direct Offline Processing Workflow Direct Offline Processing Workflow on page 417 Direct Offline Processing Window on page 418 Direct Offline Processing Workflow You can perform offline processing operations in the Direct Offline Processing window. The window always shows the processing of the selected audio. For the Direct Offline Processing window, the following applies: ● Only one instance of the window can be open.
Direct Offline Processing Direct Offline Processing Window Direct Offline Processing Window The Direct Offline Processing window allows you to add, modify, or delete audio processing instantly for one or multiple events, clips, or selection ranges in one window. Furthermore, you can undo any audio processing, at any point and in any order. To open the Direct Offline Processing window, do one of the following: ● Select Audio > Direct Offline Processing. ● Use a key command, by default F7.
Direct Offline Processing Direct Offline Processing Window The Apply and Discard buttons allow you to apply a new plug-in effect (Cubase Pro only) or audio process or a parameter change manually to the audio or to discard it. They become available if you deactivate Auto Apply (Cubase Pro only). NOTE 3 ● If Auto Apply is activated, the Apply and Discard buttons are not available. ● Cubase Pro only: The effect parameters for plug-ins are described in the separate document Plug-in Reference.
Direct Offline Processing Direct Offline Processing Window Extend Process Range in ms Allows you to extend the process range over the left and right of the event borders. This allows you to enlarge the event at a later stage with all applied processing. Tail in ms (Cubase Pro only) Allows you to add time at the end of the rendered files. This way, reverb and delay effects can fully fade out. Show/Hide Left Zone Shows/Hides the left zone of the Direct Offline Processing window that contains the process list.
Direct Offline Processing Direct Offline Processing Window ● Click Apply to add the plug-in effect or audio process to the process list and render it into the audio. ● Click Discard to discard the plug-in effect or audio process. The process panel is emptied. RESULT The plug-in effect (Cubase Pro only) or audio process is rendered into the audio. In the Project window, the Pool or the Audio Part Editor, the processed events show a waveform symbol.
Direct Offline Processing Direct Offline Processing Window Applying Plug-in Effects with Learning Function (Cubase Pro only) You can train a plug-in effect that has a learning function, for example a plug-in for noise reduction. PROCEDURE 1. Select an audio range that you want to use for training the plug-in about the noise spectrum. For example, you can use a pause that only contains noise and no dialog. 2. In the Direct Offline Processing window, deactivate Auto Apply. 3.
Direct Offline Processing Direct Offline Processing Window RELATED LINKS Resize Events on page 195 Modifying Processes You can delete or modify some or all processing from a clip in the Direct Offline Processing window. This includes the audio processes on the Processes menu, any applied plug-in effects (Cubase Pro only), and Sample Editor operations, such as Cut, Paste, Delete, and drawing with the Draw tool. Cubase Pro only: The Auto Apply function for instant rendering is suited for most workflows.
Direct Offline Processing Direct Offline Processing Window Reordering the Process List You can reorder the operations in the Direct Offline Processing process list by dragging. PROCEDURE ● Click a plug-in effect or an audio process and move it by dragging. RESULT The offline processing operations are rendered into the audio in the specified order. Bypass Processes In the Direct Offline Processing window, you can bypass processes. This allows you to hear the audio without the processes.
Direct Offline Processing Built-In Audio Processes Built-In Audio Processes Cubase provides several built-in audio processes that can be used for Direct Offline Processing. Envelope Envelope allows you to apply a volume envelope to the selected audio. Curve Kind buttons Determine whether the corresponding envelope uses Spline Interpolation, Damped Spline Interpolation, or Linear Interpolation. Envelope display Shows the shape of the envelope.
Direct Offline Processing Built-In Audio Processes Fade display Shows the shape of the fade curve. The resulting waveform shape is shown in a dark tone, with the current waveform shape in a light tone. Click the curve to add points, and click and drag existing points to change the shape. To remove a point from the curve, drag it outside the display. Presets Allow you to set up presets that you want to apply to other events or clips. ● To save a preset, click Store, type in a name, and click OK.
Direct Offline Processing Built-In Audio Processes Normalize Normalize allows you to raise the level of audio that was recorded at too low an input level. Normalize Allows you to set a maximum level for the audio, between -50 dB and 0 dB. From this maximum level, the current maximum level of the selected audio is subtracted, and the gain is raised or lowered by the resulting amount. Phase Reverse Phase Reverse allows you to reverse the phase of the selected audio.
Direct Offline Processing Built-In Audio Processes NOTE The indicated root note has nothing to do with the key or pitch of the original audio, it just provides a way to display transpose intervals. ● To change the root note, use the settings in the Pitch Shift Base section, or hold Alt, and click the keyboard display. ● To specify a transpose interval, click one of the keys. ● To specify a chord, activate Multi Shift and click several keys. To remove a transpose interval, click a blue key.
Direct Offline Processing Built-In Audio Processes RELATED LINKS Time Stretch and Pitch Shift Algorithms on page 435 Envelope-Based Pitch Shift On the Envelope tab, you can specify an envelope curve as a base for the pitch shift. Curve Kind buttons Determine whether the corresponding envelope uses Spline Interpolation, Damped Spline Interpolation, or Linear Interpolation. Envelope display Shows the shape of the envelope curve over the waveform image of the audio selected for processing.
Direct Offline Processing Built-In Audio Processes MPEX 4 Preset Allows you to select an MPEX 4 algorithm. RELATED LINKS MPEX on page 436 Remove DC Offset Remove DC Offset allows you to remove any DC offset in the audio selection. If your audio signal contains too large a component of direct current, you may notice that it is not centered around the zero level axis. This is called DC offset. ● To verify if your audio contains DC offsets, select the audio and select Audio > Statistics.
Direct Offline Processing Built-In Audio Processes Reverse Reverse allows you to reverse the audio selection so that it sounds as if you play back a tape backwards. There are no adjustable parameters for this audio process. Silence Silence allows you to replace the selection with silence. There are no adjustable parameters for this audio process. Stereo Flip Stereo Flip allows you to manipulate the left and right channels of stereo audio selections.
Direct Offline Processing Built-In Audio Processes Beats Allows you to set the length of the selected audio in beats. Signature Allows you to set the time signature. Original Length This section contains information and settings regarding the audio that is selected for processing. Length in Samples Shows the length of the selected audio in samples. Length in Seconds Shows the length of the selected audio in seconds. Tempo in BPM Allows you to enter the actual tempo of the audio in beats per minute.
Direct Offline Processing Applying Direct Offline Processing Using Key Commands RELATED LINKS Time Stretch and Pitch Shift Algorithms on page 435 Applying Direct Offline Processing Using Key Commands You can apply offline processing by using key commands. If you add plug-in effects (Cubase Pro only) or audio processes using key commands, the following applies: ● The current settings are used. ● The Direct Offline Processing window opens.
Direct Offline Processing Applying Direct Offline Processing Using Key Commands Option Key command Paste items to process list Ctrl/Cmd-V Undo Ctrl/Cmd-Z To define key commands for further Direct Offline Processing operations, and for directly adding particular plug-in effects (Cubase Pro only) and audio processes, use the Key Commands dialog.
Time Stretch and Pitch Shift Algorithms In Cubase, time-stretching and pitch-shifting algorithms are used for offline processes, in the Sample Editor, or for the Flattening Realtime Processing function. Depending on the feature, élastique, MPEX, or Standard algorithm presets are available.
Time Stretch and Pitch Shift Algorithms MPEX MPEX MPEX is an alternative high-quality algorithm. You can choose between the following quality settings: MPEX – Preview Quality For preview purposes. MPEX – Mix Fast A very fast mode for preview. This mode works best with composite music signals (mono or stereo material). MPEX – Solo Fast For single instruments (monophonic material) and voice. MPEX – Solo Musical Higher quality for single instruments (monophonic material) and voice.
Time Stretch and Pitch Shift Algorithms Limitations Standard – Mix For pitched material with a less homogenous sound character. This mode preserves the rhythm and minimizes the artifacts. Standard – Custom Allows you to set the time-stretching parameters manually. Standard – Solo For monophonic material like solo woodwind/brass instruments or solo vocals, monophonic synths or string instruments that do not play harmonies. This mode preserves the timbre of the audio.
Audio Functions Cubase offers particular functions for analyzing the audio in your project. RELATED LINKS Detect Silence on page 438 Spectrum Analyzer on page 440 Statistics on page 443 Detect Silence Detect Silence allows you to search for silent sections in events. You can split events and remove the silent parts from the project, or create regions corresponding to the non-silent sections.
Audio Functions Detect Silence Waveform Display Allows you to zoom in on and out of the waveform by using the zoom slider to the right, by clicking in the waveform, and moving the mouse up or down. You can scroll the waveform by using the scrollbar, or by using the mouse wheel. You can adjust the Open Threshold and Close Threshold values by moving the squares at the beginning and at the end of the audio file. Open Threshold When the audio level exceeds this value, the function opens and lets the sound pass.
Audio Functions Spectrum Analyzer Auto Activate this option to analyze the audio event and update the display automatically every time you change the settings. NOTE If you are working with very long files, consider deactivating the Auto option as this may slow down the process. Removing Silent Sections The Detect Silence dialog allows you to detect and remove silent sections of your audio. PROCEDURE 1. Select one or multiple audio events with silent sections in the Project window. 2.
Audio Functions Spectrum Analyzer Size in Samples Allows you to set a size for the analysis blocks of the audio. The higher this value, the higher the frequency resolution of the resulting spectrum. Size of Overlap Allows you to set the overlap between each analysis block. Window Used Allows you to select which window type is used for the fast Fourier transform, the mathematical method used for computing the spectrum.
Audio Functions Spectrum Analyzer dB Activate this option to show dB values on the vertical axis. Deactivate this option to show values between 0 and 1. Freq. Log Activate this option to display the frequencies on the horizontal axis on a logarithmic scale. Deactivate this option to show a linear frequency axis. Precision Indicates the frequency resolution of the graph. This value is governed by the Size in Samples setting in the spectrum analyzer settings.
Audio Functions Statistics Statistics The Statistics function analyzes the selected audio events, clips, or selection ranges. The Statistics window shows the following information: Channel Shows the name of the analyzed channel. Min. Sample Value Shows the lowest sample value in dB. Max. Sample Value Shows the highest sample value in dB. Peak Amplitude Shows the largest amplitude in dB. True Peak Shows the maximum absolute level of the audio signal waveform in the continuous time domain.
Audio Functions Statistics Max. RMS All Channels Shows the highest RMS value of all channels. Max. Momentary Loudness (Cubase Pro only) Shows the maximum value of all momentary loudness values, based on a time window of 400 ms. The measurement is not gated. Max. Short-Term Loudness (Cubase Pro only) Shows the maximum value of all short-term loudness values, based on a time window of 3 s. The measurement is not gated.
Sample Editor The Sample Editor provides an overview of the selected audio event. It allows you to view and edit audio by cutting and pasting, removing, or drawing audio data, and by processing audio. Editing is non-destructive so that you can undo modifications at any time. You can open the Sample Editor in a separate window or in the lower zone of the Project window. This is useful if you want to access the Sample Editor functions from within a fixed zone of the Project window.
Sample Editor The Sample Editor in the lower zone of the Project window: The Sample Editor is divided into several sections: 446
Sample Editor Toolbar 1 Toolbar Contains tools for selecting, manipulating, and playing back audio. 2 Info Line Shows information about the audio. 3 Overview Line Shows an overview of the whole audio clip and indicates which part of the clip is shown in the waveform display. 4 Inspector Contains audio editing tools and functions. NOTE The Editor Inspector for the lower zone editor is shown in the left zone of the Project window. 5 Ruler Shows the timeline and the display format of the project.
Sample Editor Toolbar Left Divider Left Divider Allows you to use the left divider. Tools that are placed to the left of the divider are always shown. View Options Show Audio Event Highlights the section corresponding to the edited event in the waveform display and the overview line. NOTE This button is not available if you opened the audio event from the Pool. You can adjust the start and end of the event in the clip by dragging the event handles in the waveform display.
Sample Editor Toolbar Zoom Allows you to zoom in the waveform display. To zoom out, hold Alt while clicking. Draw Allows you to edit audio. Play Allows you to play back the clip from the position where you click until you release the mouse button. Scrub Allows you to locate positions. Time Warp (Cubase Pro only) Allows you to drag a musical position to a certain position in time.
Sample Editor Toolbar Allows you to select a color scheme for VariAudio segments. This makes it easier to see which segments belong to which event when working with several audio events. Right Divider Right Divider Allows you to use the right divider. Tools that are placed to the right of the divider are always shown. Window Zone Controls Open in Separate Window This button is available in the lower zone editor. It opens the editor in a separate window.
Sample Editor Info Line Editing Audio Samples with the Draw Tool You can edit the audio clip at sample level with the Draw tool. This way, you can remove audio clicks manually, for example. PROCEDURE 1. On the audio waveform, locate the sample position that you want to edit and zoom in to the lowest zoom level. 2. Select the Draw tool. 3. Click at the beginning of the section that you want to correct and draw in the new curve.
Sample Editor Overview Line ● To show or hide the info line, click Set up Window Layout on the toolbar and activate or deactivate the Info Line option. The on/off status of the info line in the Sample Editor window and in the lower zone editor are independent of each other. NOTE Initially, length and position values are displayed in the format specified in the Project Setup dialog.
Sample Editor Sample Editor Inspector ● To open or close the Inspector sections, click their names. RELATED LINKS Opening the Editor Inspector on page 55 Definition The Definition section allows you to adjust the audio grid and define the musical context of your audio. You can use the available functions to match an audio file or audio loop to the project tempo. ● To open the Definition section, click its tab in the Inspector.
Sample Editor Sample Editor Inspector Hitpoints The Hitpoints section allows you to edit hitpoints to slice your audio. Here you can create groove quantize maps, markers, regions, events, and warp markers based on hitpoints. ● To open the Hitpoints section, click its tab in the Inspector. Range The Range section allows you to edit ranges and selections or create a sampler track from the selected range. ● To open the Range section, click its tab in the Inspector.
Sample Editor Ruler Zoom Opens a menu with the zoom functions for ranges. Create Sampler Track Allows you to create a sampler track from the range selection. Process The Process section regroups the most important audio editing commands from the Audio and Edit menus. ● To open the Process section, click its tab in the Inspector. Ruler The ruler shows the timeline and display format of the project, the project tempo grid. The ruler is located above the waveform display. It is always shown.
Sample Editor Waveform Display Waveform Display The waveform display shows the waveform image of the edited audio clip. 1 Level Scale Indicates the amplitude of the audio. 2 Level Scale options Allow you to select whether the level is shown as percentage or in dB. 3 Ruler Shows the project tempo grid. 4 Audio waveform Shows the waveform image of the selected audio. 5 Half Level Axis To show the half level axis, open the audio waveform context menu and select Show Half Level Axis.
Sample Editor Range Editing NOTE You can zoom in horizontally to a scale of less than one sample per pixel. This is required for drawing with the Draw tool. ● If you have zoomed in to one sample per pixel or less, the appearance of the samples depends on the Interpolate Audio Waveforms option in the Preferences dialog (Event Display—Audio page). Zoom Submenu The Zoom submenu of the Edit menu contains options for zooming in the Sample Editor. ● To open the Zoom submenu, select Edit > Zoom.
Sample Editor Range Editing Shared Copies on page 200 Selecting a Range PREREQUISITE Snap to Zero Crossings is activated on the toolbar. This option ensures that the start and the end of the selection are always at zero crossings. PROCEDURE 1. On the toolbar, activate the Range Selection tool. 2. Click at the position in the waveform display where you want the range to start and drag to the position, where you want the range to end. 3.
Sample Editor Range Editing Loop Selection Activates playback from the start of the selection and keeps starting over again at the selection end. Select Menu on the Edit Menu If you select Edit > Select, the following functions are available: All Selects the whole clip. None Deselects everything. In Loop Sets the audio between the left and the right locators. From Start to Cursor Selects the audio between the clips start and the project cursor.
Sample Editor Range Editing ● Click Replace if you want to replace the original. ● Click No if you want to keep the original. RESULT A new Sample Editor window opens with the new clip. It refers to the same audio file as the original clip, but it contains the audio corresponding to the selection range only. Creating Sampler Tracks from Selection Ranges You can create a sampler track that contains only the selected range. PROCEDURE 1. Select a range. If you select no range, the event Start/End is used.
Sample Editor Regions List Event or Range as Region Creates a region from the selected range. Make Direct Offline Processing Permanent Allows you to apply all offline processing permanently to the audio. RELATED LINKS Shared Copies on page 200 Applying Offline Processing Permanently on page 424 Direct Offline Processing for Ranges You can apply plug-in effects (Cubase Pro only) and audio processes to selection ranges.
Sample Editor Regions List Allows you to remove the selected region. 4 Select Region If you select a region in the list and click this button above, the corresponding section of the audio clip is selected (as if you had selected it with the Range Selection tool) and zoomed. This is useful if you want to apply processing to the region only. 5 Play Region Plays back the selected region. 6 Regions list Allows you to select and display regions in the audio waveform.
Sample Editor Snap Point Adjusting Start and End Positions of Regions PREREQUISITE You have clicked Set up Window Layout on the toolbar and activated the Regions option. You have created regions. PROCEDURE ● Perform one of the following actions: ● Drag the Region Start or Region End handle in the waveform display. ● Double-click the Start or End field in the regions list and enter a new value.
Sample Editor Snap Point The snap point is set at the audio event start. But you can move it to another relevant position in the audio. The snap point is used when Snap is activated on the Project window toolbar and you insert a clip from the Sample Editor in the event display. It is also used when you move or copy events in the event display.
Sample Editor Snap Point RESULT The event snap point is adjusted to the position where you dragged it. NOTE You can also adjust the snap point by setting the project cursor at the desired position and selecting Audio > Snap Point To Cursor.
Hitpoints Hitpoints mark musically relevant positions in audio files. Cubase can detect these positions and create hitpoints automatically by analyzing onsets and melodic changes of the audio. NOTE All hitpoint operations can be performed in the Sample Editor window and in the lower zone editor. When you add an audio file to your project by recording or by importing, Cubase automatically detects hitpoints.
Hitpoints Calculating Hitpoints NOTE If your audio file is very long, this may take a while. 2. Select the audio event in the Project window and make sure the zoom factor is high enough. RESULT The calculated hitpoints for the selected event are shown in the Project window. NOTE You can disable automatic hitpoint detection by deactivating Enable Automatic Hitpoint Detection in the Preferences dialog (Editing—Audio page). Hitpoint Filters Cubase automatically detects and filters hitpoints.
Hitpoints Calculating Hitpoints 2. Move the mouse to the waveform display and click between two hitpoints. The mouse pointer changes to a speaker icon and the tooltip Play back Slice is shown. The slice is played back from the beginning to the end. 3. To disable a hitpoint that you do not need, press Shift and click on the line that represents the hitpoint. The mouse pointer changes to a cross icon and the tooltip Disable Hitpoint is shown.
Hitpoints Locating to Hitpoints in the Project Window RELATED LINKS Hitpoint Filters on page 467 Locating to Hitpoints in the Project Window You can navigate through the hitpoints of an audio event in the Project window. PREREQUISITE Enable Automatic Hitpoint Detection is activated in the Preferences dialog (Editing—Audio page). PROCEDURE 1. Select the audio track that contains the audio event for which you want to locate hitpoints. 2.
Hitpoints Slices ● In the Hitpoints section, click Create Slices. ● Select Audio > Hitpoints > Create Audio Slices from Hitpoints. RESULT The areas between the hitpoints are sliced and become separate events. The original audio event is replaced by an audio part containing the slices. On playback, the audio plays back seamlessly at the project tempo. AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK Change the project tempo. The slices are moved accordingly, keeping their relative positions within the part.
Hitpoints Creating a Groove Quantize Map ● Select Audio > Advanced > Close Gaps (Crossfade). This applies crossfades to the slices and closes the gaps. NOTE If you decide to change the tempo again, undo your actions and use the original, unstretched file. Project Tempo Is Higher Than the Original Audio If the project tempo is higher than the tempo of the original audio event, the slice events in the part may overlap.
Hitpoints Creating Regions RESULT If your project has no marker track, a marker track is added and activated automatically, and a marker is created at every hitpoint position. RELATED LINKS Markers on page 306 Creating Regions You can create regions at hitpoint positions. This allows you to isolate recorded sounds. PREREQUISITE The audio event from which you want to create regions is opened in the Sample Editor, and the hitpoints are set at the correct positions.
Hitpoints Creating MIDI Notes RESULT Warp markers are created at every hitpoint position. AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK Open the AudioWarp section to show and edit the warp markers. RELATED LINKS Tempo Matching Audio on page 475 Creating MIDI Notes You can export hitpoints to a MIDI part containing a MIDI note for each hitpoint. This allows you to double, replace, or enrich drum hits by triggering sounds of a VST instrument.
Hitpoints Creating MIDI Notes Length Sets a note length for all created MIDI notes. Destination Allows you to select a destination: ● To place the MIDI part on the first selected MIDI or instrument track, select First Selected Track. NOTE Any MIDI parts from previous conversions on this track will be deleted. ● To create a new MIDI track for the MIDI part, select New MIDI Track. ● To copy the MIDI part to the clipboard, select Project Clipboard.
Tempo Matching Audio You can tempo match audio to adapt its tempo to the project tempo, for example. NOTE All tempo matching operations can be performed in the Sample Editor window and in the lower zone editor. The following functions are described: ● Stretch to Project Tempo Stretches the selected event to match the project tempo. ● Musical Mode Applies realtime time stretching to audio clips, so that they match the project tempo. ● Auto Adjust Extracts a definition grid from your audio.
Tempo Matching Audio Stretching Audio Events to the Project Tempo RELATED LINKS Time Stretch and Pitch Shift Algorithms on page 435 Stretching Audio Events to the Project Tempo You can stretch audio loops to the project tempo. PROCEDURE 1. Select File > Import > Audio File, select the audio loop that you want to import, and click OK. 2. Select the audio loop in the project. 3. Select Audio > Advanced > Stretch to Project Tempo. RESULT The audio loop is stretched to match the project tempo.
Tempo Matching Audio Musical Mode 4. On the toolbar, verify that the length in bars corresponds to the length of the imported audio file. If necessary, listen to your audio and enter the correct length in bars and beats. 5. On the toolbar, open the Algorithm pop-up menu, and select a preset. 6. Listen to the loop and if necessary correct the Bars and Beats values on the toolbar. 7. Activate Musical Mode. RESULT The loop is warped and stretched to the project tempo. The rulers reflect the change.
Tempo Matching Audio Auto Adjust Auto Adjust The Auto Adjust function is useful if you do not know the tempo of your audio file, or if its beat is not straight. It allows you to extract a definition grid from your audio before tempo matching it to the project tempo with the Musical Mode. The Auto Adjust function extracts a local definition grid that you can match with the project tempo using Musical Mode.
Tempo Matching Audio Manual Adjust Correcting the Audio Definition Grid If the extraction of a definition grid with the Auto Adjust function did not bring satisfying results, you can correct the grid and tempo of your audio file with the Manual Adjust function. PROCEDURE 1. Double-click the audio clip or event in the Project window to open it in the Sample Editor. 2. Open the Definition section, and activate Manual Adjust. 3. Move the mouse pointer to the beginning of the audio clip.
Tempo Matching Audio Free Warp NOTE You can remove misplaced beat edits by pressing any modifier key and clicking with the Erase tool. RESULT The definition grid is corrected, the audio tempo definition ruler reflects your edits. AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK Activate Musical Mode. Free Warp The Free Warp tool allows you to correct the timing of individual positions in the audio material. You can create and edit warp markers and drag them to musically relevant time positions in an audio event.
Tempo Matching Audio Free Warp Correcting the Timing with the Free Warp Tool PROCEDURE 1. Double-click the audio clip or event in the Project window to open it in the Sample Editor. 2. On the toolbar, activate Snap to Zero Crossing. If this button is activated, warp markers snap to zero crossings. 3. Optional: If you want to correct the timing of individual positions in the audio, define the local definition with the Auto Adjust or the Manual Adjust function, and activate Musical Mode. 4.
Tempo Matching Audio Flattening Realtime Processing RESULT The warp marker is removed from the waveform. Resetting Warp Markers PROCEDURE ● In the AudioWarp section, click Reset Warp Changes. RESULT The warp markers are removed from the waveform, and the warp edits of the waveform are reset. NOTE If Musical Mode is activated, only Free Warp edits are reset. Flattening Realtime Processing You can flatten warp modifications.
Tempo Matching Audio Unstretching Audio Files RESULT All realtime time stretching is removed.
VariAudio (Cubase Pro only) The VariAudio features in Cubase allow you to edit pitch, correct timing and intonation of individual notes in monophonic vocal recordings. Any modifications to the audio material can be undone. NOTE All VariAudio operations can be performed in the Sample Editor window and in the lower zone editor. NOTE The VariAudio features are optimized for monophonic recordings of vocals. Other monophonic recordings, such as saxophone, may work well.
VariAudio (Cubase Pro only) Segmenting Monophonic Audio ● Cutting, pasting, deleting or drawing in the Sample Editor. Segmenting Monophonic Audio To be able to edit the pitch and correct the timing of monophonic recordings, Cubase must analyze the audio and split it into segments. PROCEDURE 1. In the Project window, double-click the monophonic vocal recording to open the Sample Editor. 2. In the Sample Editor Inspector, click VariAudio to open the VariAudio section.
VariAudio (Cubase Pro only) Segments and Gaps Segments and Gaps Cubase automatically analyzes the audio and splits it into segments that are shown in the waveform image. To understand and edit the segmentation, the following concepts are crucial: 1 Pitch Position The pitch position of the segments is indicated by the piano keyboard to the left of the waveform. Pitches represent the perceived fundamental frequency of the sound. The average pitch of a segment is calculated from its micro-pitch curve.
VariAudio (Cubase Pro only) Manual Editing of Segments ● Moving segments on the timeline by dragging them to the left or right. ● Deleting segments. Navigating and Zooming You can navigate through the segments and zoom in on them. This makes manual editing more comfortable. ● To navigate through the segments, use the Left Arrow key or the Right Arrow key on your computer keyboard. ● To zoom in on segments, hold down Alt and draw a selection rectangle.
VariAudio (Cubase Pro only) Manual Editing of Segments Changing the Start and End Point of Segments If the start and end points of the segments do not match with the waveform envelope, you can change them. PREREQUISITE You have opened the audio in the Sample Editor and activated the Segments tool in the VariAudio section. PROCEDURE 1. Compare the start and end positions of the segments with the waveform envelope for each note. 2.
VariAudio (Cubase Pro only) Manual Editing of Segments 2. Optional: Select one or several segments and on the Sample Editor toolbar, activate the Audition to audition the segments. 3. Perform one of the following actions: ● If a segment includes more than a note, move the mouse pointer over the lower border of the segment and click to cut the segment.
VariAudio (Cubase Pro only) Manual Editing of Segments NOTE You can only move the segment until the boundaries of the next segment. Segments cannot overlap. RESULT The segment is moved. The average pitch of the segment is recalculated. NOTE Changing the length of a segment may lead to different average pitch and therefore to a pitch change. If the non-tonal portions of the audio increase, the segment may be deleted.
VariAudio (Cubase Pro only) Manual Editing of Segments 2. Click the x symbol. RESULT The segment is grayed out to indicate that it is muted. AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK You can unmute the segment by clicking the x symbol again. Segment Colors You can select a color scheme for VariAudio segments. If you work with several audio events, this makes it easier to see which segments belong to which event. The following options are available: Auto Segments that belong to the same audio event get the same color.
VariAudio (Cubase Pro only) Pitch Changes Pitch Changes The VariAudio features allow you to change the pitch of audio segments for corrective purposes but also creatively. By changing note pitches you can change the melody of the original audio with or without preserving a natural sound. Pitch changes include the following: ● Raising or lowering pitches. ● Quantizing pitches. ● Changing the micro-pitch curve. ● Straightening pitches.
VariAudio (Cubase Pro only) Pitch Changes Changing Pitches by MIDI Input You can change segment pitches by pressing a key on your MIDI keyboard or by using the OnScreen Keyboard. PREREQUISITE The audio file is segmented and the segments are correct. You have opened the audio in the Sample Editor and activated the Pitch & Warp tool in the VariAudio section. You have connected and set up a MIDI keyboard. PROCEDURE 1. Select one or several segments. 2. In the VariAudio section, activate MIDI Input. 3.
VariAudio (Cubase Pro only) Micro-Pitch Changes Use this mode if you want to step through the segments while changing their pitches. This allows you to work in a more creative way, for example, to develop completely new melody lines via MIDI. After you have assigned a MIDI note to a segment, the next segment is automatically selected. RELATED LINKS Step Input on page 722 Quantizing Pitches You can quantize the audio pitch to the nearest semitone position.
VariAudio (Cubase Pro only) Micro-Pitch Changes This is useful if you want to adjust only the start or the end of a segment. Tilting an Entire Micro-Pitch Curve PREREQUISITE The audio file is segmented and the segments are correct. You have opened the audio in the Sample Editor and activated the Pitch & Warp tool in the VariAudio section. PROCEDURE 1. Move the mouse pointer over the upper left or right border of the segment. The mouse pointer becomes an up/down arrow. 2.
VariAudio (Cubase Pro only) Micro-Pitch Changes RESULT The Solo algorithm is selected automatically, and the micro-pitch curve is tilted from the segment border to the anchor. RELATED LINKS Removing Anchors on page 496 Rotating a Micro-Pitch Curve around an Anchor on page 496 Removing Anchors PROCEDURE 1. Hold down Alt and move the mouse pointer over the position of the anchor at the upper border of the segment. The mouse pointer becomes a glue tube. 2. Click at the position of the anchor point.
VariAudio (Cubase Pro only) Micro-Pitch Changes RESULT The Solo algorithm is selected automatically, and the micro-pitch curve is rotated around the anchor. RELATED LINKS Removing Anchors on page 496 Tilting a Micro-Pitch Curve from a Segment Border to an Anchor on page 495 Straightening Micro-Pitch Curves You can straighten micro-pitch curves to compensate for the rise and fall of notes, that is, the deviation from a representative pitch.
VariAudio (Cubase Pro only) Timing Modifications Timing Modifications Modifying the timing of segments, or warping, is useful if you want to align a musical accent to a certain time position or change the timing of segments in monophonic vocal recordings. If you warp audio segments, warp markers are created. These are shown in the VariAudio and the AudioWarp sections of the Sample Editor Inspector. Warping Segments PREREQUISITE The audio file is segmented and the segments are correct.
VariAudio (Cubase Pro only) Reset Functions 2. Move the mouse pointer over the warp handle and drag it to the beginning of the waveform. The mouse pointer becomes a double arrow and the background is highlighted to indicate which part of the waveform is affected by the change. RESULT Now the beginning of the waveform matches the beginning of the bar. Deleting Warp Markers You can delete warp markers. PREREQUISITE The audio file is segmented and the segments are correct.
VariAudio (Cubase Pro only) Extracting MIDI from Audio Pitch Changes Resets pitch changes including micro-pitch modifications with the Tilt Micro Pitches tool either for the selected segments (if available) or for the whole file. Warp Changes Resets warp changes. Pitch + Warp Changes Resets pitch, micro-pitch, and warp changes either for the selected segments (if available) or for the whole file. Reanalyze Audio Resets the segmentation and reanalyzes the audio.
VariAudio (Cubase Pro only) Extracting MIDI from Audio Extract MIDI Dialog The Extract MIDI dialog allows you to specify which audio data is used when creating a MIDI part with the Extract MIDI function. To open the Extract MIDI dialog, open the VariAudio section of the Sample Editor Inspector, activate the Segments tool, and click Extract MIDI. The following pop-up menus are available: Pitch Mode Allows you to specify which data is included if you extract MIDI.
VariAudio (Cubase Pro only) Flattening Realtime Processing Fixed Velocity Assigns the same velocity to all created MIDI notes. In the Velocity field you can specify a velocity value. Dynamic Velocity Assigns an individual velocity value to each created MIDI note according to the amplitude of the audio signal. Volume Controller Curve Creates a continuous volume controller curve within the MIDI part. In the MIDI Controller field you can specify the MIDI controller.
VariAudio (Cubase Pro only) Harmony Voices for Audio RESULT Any loop that was previously pitch shifted plays back exactly the same, but Musical Mode is deactivated, and VariAudio data is lost. Harmony Voices for Audio Cubase allows you to quickly create harmonies for monophonic audio material. You have the following options: ● You can have Cubase create default harmony voices for your audio.
Audio Part Editor The Audio Part Editor provides an overview of the selected audio parts. It allows you to view, audition and edit parts by cutting and pasting, crossfading, drawing level curves, or by processing parts. Editing is non-destructive so that you can undo modifications at any time. You can open the Audio Part Editor in a separate window or in the lower zone of the Project window.
Audio Part Editor The Audio Part Editor in the lower zone of the Project window: 1 Toolbar Contains tools for selecting, editing, and playing back audio parts. 2 Info Line Displays information on the audio parts.
Audio Part Editor Toolbar 3 Ruler Displays the timeline and the display format of the project. RELATED LINKS Opening the Editor in the Lower Zone on page 65 Opening the Editor Inspector on page 55 Ruler on page 47 Info Line on page 49 Toolbar on page 506 Toolbar The toolbar contains tools for selecting, editing, and playing back audio parts. ● To show or hide the toolbar elements, right-click the toolbar and activate or deactivate the elements.
Audio Part Editor Toolbar Plays back the edited audio. Audition Loop loops the playback until you deactivate the Audition icon. The Audition Volume slider allows you to adjust the volume. Tool Buttons Object Selection Allows you to select audio parts. Range Selection Allows you to select ranges. Zoom Allows you to zoom in the waveform display. To zoom out, hold Alt while clicking. Erase Allows you to erase events from audio parts. Split Allows you to split audio parts.
Audio Part Editor Toolbar Shows/Hides part borders for the active audio part, within the left and right locators. Edit Active Part Only Restricts editing operations to the active part. Currently Edited Part Lists all parts that were selected when you opened the editor, and allows you to activate a part. Nudge Palette Trim Start Left Increases the length of the selected element by moving its start to the left. Trim Start Right Decreases the length of the selected element by moving its start to the right.
Audio Part Editor Toolbar ● Grid Relative grid. ● Events ● Shuffle changes the order of events if you drag one event to the left or right of other events. ● Magnetic Cursor ● Grid + Cursor snaps events to the quantize grid that is selected in the Quantize Presets pop-up menu or to the cursor position. ● Events + Cursor the cursor position.
Audio Part Editor Info Line Allows you to use the right divider. Tools that are placed to the right of the divider are always shown. Window Zone Controls Open in Separate Window This button is available in the lower zone editor. It opens the editor in a separate window. Open in Lower Zone This button is available in the editor window. It opens the editor in the lower zone of the Project window. Show/Hide Info Allows you to activate/deactivate the info line.
Audio Part Editor About Lanes About Lanes Lanes can make it easier to work with several audio events in a part. Moving some of the events to another lane can make selecting and editing much easier. If Snap is deactivated and you want to move an event to another lane without accidentally moving it horizontally, press Ctrl/Cmd while dragging it up or down. RELATED LINKS Track Handling on page 152 Operations All operations can be performed in the Audio Part Editor window and in the lower zone editor.
Audio Part Editor Operations ● If there is no selection, the whole part will be played back. If the project cursor is within the part, playback starts from the current cursor position. If the cursor is outside the part, playback starts from the beginning of the part. ● If Audition Loop is activated, playback will continue until you deactivate Audition. Otherwise, the section will be played back once.
Audio Part Editor Operations NOTE The events are looped as long as the Loop button is activated and the Audio Part Editor is open. RELATED LINKS Using the Setup Options on page 994 Scrubbing In the Audio Part Editor, the Scrub tool has a separate icon on the toolbar. Apart from that, scrubbing works exactly as in the Project window.
Audio Part Editor Operations ● It is possible to cycle between parts, making them active using key commands. In the Key Commands dialog – Edit category, there are two functions: Activate Next Part and Activate Previous Part. If you assign key commands to these, you can use them to cycle between parts.
Controlling Sample Playback with Sampler Tracks The sampler track features allow you to chromatically play back any audio from your audio sample library via MIDI. You can create and edit new sounds based on specific samples, and integrate them into an existing project. The sampler track features include: ● A sampler track that allows you to control the playback of the audio sample that is loaded in Sampler Control. ● Sampler Control that allows you load and edit audio samples.
Controlling Sample Playback with Sampler Tracks Creating Sampler Tracks ● To load a MIDI part, drag it from the MediaBay, the Project window event display, or the File Explorer/macOS Finder and drop it in Sampler Control. IMPORTANT If Sampler Control already contains MIDI, it is overwritten. Cubase creates an audio file from the MIDI part. This includes the instrument sound and the channel settings from the VST instrument or the return channel. The audio file is copied to the project audio folder.
Controlling Sample Playback with Sampler Tracks Sampler Control If the envelope editors for the pitch, filter, or amp section are shown, you can adjust their envelope curve settings here. 3 Sound Parameter Section Allows you to make settings for time stretching and formant shifting (AudioWarp section), tuning and pitch modulation (Pitch section), filtering (Filter section), or level and panorama (Amp section).
Controlling Sample Playback with Sampler Tracks Sampler Control Import Audio File Opens the Import Audio dialog that allows you to load an audio file into Sampler Control. NOTE If Sampler Control already contains an audio file, the original file is replaced by the new file. File Name Shows the file name of the sample. Tempo Shows the tempo of the sample. Root Key Shows the root key that determines the pitch of the sample.
Controlling Sample Playback with Sampler Tracks Sampler Control between played note and root key is disregarded and all keys play the sample just as it was recorded. Reverse Sample Reverses the sample. This allows you to play back the sample backwards. Monophonic Mode Activates monophonic playback. For solo instruments, this usually results in a more naturally sounding performance.
Controlling Sample Playback with Sampler Tracks Sampler Control Sustain Loop End Defines where the sustain loop ends. When this marker is reached, playback jumps back to the sustain loop start. Fade-In Length Defines the fade-in length. Fade-Out Length Defines the fade-out length. Sustain Loop Crossfade Length Loop crossfades allow for smoother loops. This marker defines the length for the loop crossfade. Ruler The ruler shows the timeline in the specified display format.
Controlling Sample Playback with Sampler Tracks Sampler Control AudioWarp Sync Mode Allows you to match the playback speed of the sample to the project tempo. ● If Off is selected, the playback speed is specified manually, in percent. ● If Tempo is selected, the playback speed is calculated using the ratio between the original tempo of the sample and the tempo of the host. Legato If this option is deactivated, each note that is played via MIDI starts playback from the Sampler Control position cursor.
Controlling Sample Playback with Sampler Tracks Sampler Control Show/Hide Pitch Envelope Shows the pitch envelope editor. RELATED LINKS Envelope Editors on page 523 Filter In the Filter section, you can adjust the tone color of the sample sound. The filter envelope allows you to control the cutoff frequency to shape the harmonic content over time. ● To activate the filter settings, click Activate/Deactivate Filter . Cutoff Controls the cutoff frequency of the filter.
Controlling Sample Playback with Sampler Tracks Sampler Control Envelope Editors You can adjust the Pitch, Filter, and Amp envelope curves. Each of these envelopes can contain up to 128 nodes. ● Click Show/Hide Envelope envelope editor. at the top right of a section to show the corresponding Pitch Envelope Envelope Amount Determines how much the selected envelope affects the audio. This parameter allows for positive and negative values. If the Envelope Amount is set to 0, the envelope has no effect.
Controlling Sample Playback with Sampler Tracks Sampler Control The level of the envelope depends on the velocity setting and on how hard you hit a key. Higher values increase the level of the envelope the harder you hit a key. RELATED LINKS Selecting Nodes on page 524 Adding and Removing Nodes on page 524 Adjusting the Envelope Curve on page 524 Zoom Functions in the Envelope Editors on page 524 Selecting Nodes You can select single nodes or multiple nodes. Selected nodes are edited together.
Controlling Sample Playback with Sampler Tracks Sample Editing and Playback Functions RELATED LINKS Key Commands on page 974 Keyboard Section In the keyboard section of Sampler Control you can set the root key and the key range of the sample, and the modulation range of the pitchbend wheel on your MIDI keyboard. Pitchbend Determines the maximal modulation that is applied when you move the pitchbend wheel on your MIDI keyboard. You can set the pitchbend range in semitone steps up to 12 semitones.
Controlling Sample Playback with Sampler Tracks Sample Editing and Playback Functions RELATED LINKS Setting Sample Start and End on page 525 Setting the Root Key Manually The Root Key shows the original pitch of the sample. Sometimes, if the sample does not contain any root key information or if you want the sample to play at a different pitch you must set the root key manually. NOTE If you load a sample that does not contain any root key information, the root key is automatically set to C3.
Controlling Sample Playback with Sampler Tracks Transferring Samples from Sampler Control to VST Instruments RESULT If Fixed Pitch is deactivated, the sample is played back and the pitch is defined by the notes you play. If you hit lower keys, the sample is played back with a low pitch. If you hit higher keys, the sample is played back with a high pitch. If Fixed Pitch is activated, the sample is played back in its original pitch.
Pool Every time that you record on an audio track, a file is created on your hard disk. A reference to this file, a clip, is added to the Pool. The following rules apply to the Pool: ● All audio and video clips that belong to a project are listed in the Pool. ● Every project has a separate Pool. The way the Pool displays folders and their contents is similar to the way the File Explorer/macOS Finder displays folders and file lists.
Pool Pool Window The content of the Pool is divided into the following folders: Audio Folder Contains all audio clips and regions that are in the project. If the projects contains one or more sampler tracks, a dedicated Sampler Track subfolder is created in the audio folder. This subfolder contains all clips of samples that you have loaded into Sampler Control. Video Folder Contains all video clips that are in the project.
Pool Pool Window 10 Pool Record Folder Displays the path to the record folder of the active project. By default, this is the Audio folder. However, you can create a new Audio subfolder and designate this as your Pool record folder. Pool Window Columns Various information about the clips and regions can be viewed in the Pool window columns. The columns contain the following information: Media Contains the Audio, Video, and Trash folders.
Pool Pool Window Info For audio clips, this column displays the sample rate, bit resolution, number of channels, and length. For regions, it displays start and end times in frames. For video clips, it displays the frame rate, resolution, number of frames, and length. Type Displays the file format of the clip. Date Displays the date when the audio file was last changed. Origin Time Displays the original start position where a clip was recorded in the project.
Pool Working with the Pool ● To rearrange the order of columns, drag a column heading to the left or right. Working with the Pool NOTE Most of the Pool-related main menu functions are also available on the Pool context menu. Renaming Clips or Regions in the Pool IMPORTANT Renaming clips or regions in the Pool also renames the referenced files on disk. It is recommended to rename clips or regions in the Pool. Otherwise, the reference from the clip to the file may get lost. PROCEDURE 1.
Pool Working with the Pool If several clips are selected, choose whether to insert them on one track or each on a different track. NOTE The clips are positioned so that their snap points are aligned with the selected insert position. If you want to adjust the snap point before inserting a clip, double-click a clip to open the Sample Editor. Here, you can adjust the snap position and then perform the insert options. RESULT The clip is inserted on the selected track or on a new audio track.
Pool Working with the Pool RESULT The clips are no longer available in the Pool for this project, but the files still exist on the hard disk and can be used in other projects, etc. This operation can be undone. Deleting Files from the Hard Disk To delete a file permanently from the hard disk, you must first move the corresponding clips to the Trash folder in the Pool. IMPORTANT Make sure that the audio files that you want to delete are not used in other projects. PROCEDURE 1.
Pool Working with the Pool Locating Events and Clips You can quickly display to which clips the selected events belong and to which events the selected clips belong. Locating Events via Clips in the Pool You can find out which events in the project refer to a particular clip in the Pool. PROCEDURE 1. In the Pool window, select one or more clips. 2. Select Media > Select in Project. RESULT All events that refer to the selected clips are now selected in the Project window.
Pool Working with the Pool The search will include the selected folder and all subfolders. NOTE Folders that you have recently selected using the Select Search Path function appear on the pop-up menu, so that you can quickly select them again. 4. Click Search. The search is started and Search is labeled Stop. ● To cancel the search, click Stop. When the search is finished, the files that are found are listed on the right. 5.
Pool Working with the Pool 6. Optional: To remove a search filter settings preset, open the extended search pop-up menu, select the preset, and then select Remove Preset. Find Media Window The Find Media window is a stand-alone window that offers the same functionality as the Search Media option in the Pool. ● To open the Find Media window, select Media > Search Media.
Pool Working with the Pool process audio and stored in the Edits folder within the project folder), it may be possible for the program to reconstruct it by recreating the editing to the original audio file. PROCEDURE 1. In the Pool window, locate the clips for which files are missing. 2. Check the Status column. If the status of the files is “Reconstructible”, the files can be reconstructed by Cubase. 3. Select the reconstructible clips and select Media > Reconstruct.
Pool Working with the Pool Opening Clips in the Sample Editor The Sample Editor allows you to perform detailed editing on the clip. ● To open a clip in the Sample Editor, double-click a clip waveform icon or a clip name in the Media column. ● To open a certain region of a clip in the Sample Editor, double-click a region in the Pool. You can use this to set a snap point for a clip, for example.
Pool Working with the Pool Importing Audio CDs into the Pool You can import tracks or sections of tracks from an audio CD directly into the Pool. This opens a dialog in which you can specify which tracks are copied from the CD, converted to audio files, and added to the Pool. ● To import an audio CD to the Pool, select Media > Import Audio CD.
Pool Working with the Pool Conforming Files on page 545 Exporting Regions as Audio Files If you have created regions within an audio clip, these can be exported as separate audio files. If you have two clips that refer to the same audio file, you can create a separate audio file for each clip. PROCEDURE 1. In the Pool window, select the region that you want to export. 2. Select Audio > Bounce Selection. 3. Select the folder in which you want the new file to be created and click OK. 4.
Pool Working with the Pool Organizing Clips and Folders If you accumulate a large number of clips in the Pool, it can be difficult to quickly find specific items. Organizing clips in new subfolders with names that reflect the content can be a solution. For example, you could put all sound effects in one folder, all lead vocals in another, etc. PROCEDURE 1. In the Pool window, select the type of folder, audio, or video for which you want to create a subfolder.
Pool Working with the Pool IMPORTANT This operation will permanently change the selected audio files in the Pool. This cannot be undone. If you only want to create the minimized audio files as a copy, leaving the original project untouched, you can use the Back up Project option. NOTE Minimizing files clears the entire edit history. PROCEDURE 1. In the Pool window, select the files that you want to minimize. 2. Select Media > Minimize File. 3. Click Minimize.
Pool Working with the Pool You must specify a project folder for the new library in which media files will be stored. The library appears as a separate Pool window. ● To open a library, select File > Open Library. ● To save a library, select File > Save Library. Converting Files In the Pool, you can convert files to another format. PROCEDURE 1. In the Pool window, select the files that you want to convert. 2. Select Media > Convert Files. 3.
Pool Working with the Pool original file to the new file. Select the latter option if you want your audio clips to refer to the converted file, but want to keep the original file on disk, for example, if the file is used in other projects. Conforming Files You can align the file attributes with the project attributes. This is useful if the attributes of the selected files are different from the project attributes. PROCEDURE 1. In the Pool window, select the clips that you want to conform. 2.
MediaBay The MediaBay allows you to manage all your media files and presets from multiple sources. Media Rack in Right Zone You can open the Media rack in the right zone of the Project window. This is useful if you want to access the MediaBay functions from within a fixed zone of the Project window. To open the Media rack in the right zone, do the following: ● Click Show/Hide Right Zone zone, click the Media tab.
MediaBay Media Rack in Right Zone Instruments Tile Shows all included VST instruments. Loops & Samples Tile Shows audio loops, MIDI loops, or instrument sounds ordered by content set. Presets Tile Shows track presets, strip presets, pattern banks, FX chain presets, and VST FX presets. User Presets Tile Shows track presets, strip presets, pattern banks, FX chain presets, VST FX presets, and instrument presets that are listed in the User Content folder.
MediaBay Media Rack in Right Zone Results Page The Results page shows all media files that are found in the selected folder. 1 Select Media Types Allows you to select the media types that are displayed in the Results list. 2 Shuffle Results Shuffles the Results list. 3 Reset Attribute Filter Lights up if an attribute filter is set. Click this button to reset the attribute filter. 4 Show/Hide Attribute Filters Shows/Hides the Attribute Filters section.
MediaBay Media Rack in Right Zone Favorites Page The Favorites page allows you to add your own favorite folders to the Media rack. 1 Add Favorite Opens a file dialog where you can navigate to the location of a folder and add it as a favorite folder. 2 Favorite Folders The folders that you added as favorites, are shown as tiles on the Favorites page. ● To show the content of a folder, click it. ● To delete a folder from the Favorites page, click its close button.
MediaBay Media Rack in Right Zone Results Page for the File Browser The Results page for the File Browser shows all media files that are found in the File Browser. 1 File Browser Allows you to browse and select folders. 2 Results List Shows all supported media files that are found in the selected folder and allows you to select a media file. 3 Previewer Allows you to preview the selected media file.
MediaBay Media Rack in Right Zone Once you have located the media file, the instrument, or the preset that you want to use, and selected it in the Results list, you can insert it into your project by using drag & drop, by using the context menu options, or by double-clicking. RELATED LINKS Media Rack in Right Zone on page 546 Results Page on page 548 Adding Instruments You can use the Media rack to add VST instruments to your project. This works only for VST instruments contained in Cubase. PROCEDURE 1.
MediaBay MediaBay Window 5. Click OK. RESULT In the File Browser, a new folder with the specified name is added to the Favorites folder. On the Favorites page, a new tile with the specified name is added. MediaBay Window To open the MediaBay in a separate window, do one of the following: ● Select Media > MediaBay. ● Press F5. MediaBay The MediaBay is divided into the following sections: 1 File Browser Allows you to scan specific folders in your file system, and to add favorites.
MediaBay MediaBay Window 6 Attribute Inspector (Cubase Pro only) Allows you to view, edit, and add media file attributes or tags. RELATED LINKS File Browser Section on page 554 Favorites Section on page 555 Filters Section on page 565 Results Section on page 556 Previewer Section on page 561 Attribute Inspector on page 569 Setting Up the MediaBay on page 553 Setting Up the MediaBay You can show and hide the different sections of the MediaBay.
MediaBay MediaBay Window Accordingly, the Include Folders and Subfolders button is shown in the Favorites section, and if you hide that section, it is shown in the Results section. This allows you to navigate to files and folders at any time. File Browser Section The File Browser section allows you, to scan specific folders in your file system and to add favorites. To show the supported media files in the Results section of the MediaBay, you must scan all folders that you want to include in the search.
MediaBay MediaBay Window ● At the top right of the page, click Add Favorite ● Right-click the folder, and from the context menu, select Add Favorite. . 3. In the Set Name dialog that opens, enter a name for the folder. 4. Click OK. RESULT In the File Browser section, a new folder with the specified name is added to the Favorites folder. In the Favorites section, the added favorite is available in the Select Defined Favorite pop-up menu.
MediaBay MediaBay Window Open this pop-up menu to select a different Favorite. This allows you to quickly browse to the files you are looking for. 2 Include Folders and Subfolders If this option is activated, the media files that are located in the folders and subfolders of the selected Favorite are also displayed in the Results list.
MediaBay MediaBay Window To exclude a particular category, select Select None on the corresponding submenu. If Allow Editing in Results List is activated in the MediaBay Settings, you can also edit attributes in the Results list. Otherwise, this is only possible in the Attribute Inspector.
MediaBay MediaBay Window 2. Activate the media types that you want to be displayed in the Results list. RESULT The files are filtered by the selected media type. Show Media Types Selector You can activate the media types that you want to be displayed in the Results list. The following media types are available: Audio Files If this option is activated, the list shows all audio files. The supported formats are .wav, .w64, .aiff, .aifc, .rex, .rx2, .mp3, .mp2, .ogg, .sd2 (macOS only), .wma (Windows only).
MediaBay MediaBay Window FX Chain Presets If this option is activated, the list shows all effect chain presets (file name extension .fxchainpreset). These presets contain insert effect chains. Video Files If this option is activated, the list shows all video files. Projects If this option is activated, the list shows all project files (from Cubase, Nuendo): .cpr, .npr.
MediaBay MediaBay Window ● To reset the text search, delete the text. RELATED LINKS Logical Filter on page 565 Boolean Text Search You can perform advanced searches, using boolean operators or wildcards. The following elements can be used: And [+] [a and b] When entering strings separated by “and” (or a plus sign), all files are found that contain both a and b. [And] is the default setting when no boolean operator is used, for example, you can also enter [a b].
MediaBay MediaBay Window RELATED LINKS Applying a Logical Filter on page 566 Resetting the Results List You can reset all filter settings and filter results. ● To reset the Results list, click Reset Result Filters in the MediaBay. Previewer Section You can preview individual files in the Previewer section to find out which one to use in your project. The elements visible in this section and their functions depend on the media type.
MediaBay MediaBay Window RELATED LINKS Musical Mode on page 476 Previewing MIDI Files IMPORTANT To preview a MIDI file, you must load a VST instrument and select it as output device from the Output pop-up menu. 1 Transport Controls Allow you to start and stop the preview. 2 Preview Level Fader Allows you to specify the preview level. 3 Output Allows you to select the output device. 4 Auto Play New Results Selection If this option is activated, the selected file is automatically played back.
MediaBay MediaBay Window If this option is activated, the events of the MIDI loop are transposed to play back in context with the chord track. Note that you need a chord track with chord events for this. If this option is activated, and you insert a MIDI loop into the project, Follow Chord Track is automatically activated for the track.
MediaBay MediaBay Window RESULT The notes received from the MIDI file are played back with the settings of the track preset applied. NOTE The recently used MIDI files are kept on the menu for quick access. To remove an entry from this list, select it on the menu and then select Remove MIDI File. Previewing Presets Using the Memo Recorder Mode The Memo Recorder mode continually repeats a given sequence of notes as a loop. NOTE You cannot use the Memo Recorder mode when previewing presets using a MIDI file.
MediaBay MediaBay Window Allow you to start and stop the preview. 2 Preview Level Fader Allows you to specify the preview level. 3 Keyboard The keyboard allows you to preview the selected pattern bank. In the Previewer section, choose a subbank (the number at the top) and pattern (a key), and click Play. One pattern bank contains 4 subbanks which in turn contain 12 patterns each. Subbanks can contain empty patterns. Selecting an empty pattern in the Previewer section has no effect.
MediaBay MediaBay Window <= The search result must be lower than or equal to the number specified in the field to the right. is empty Use this option to find files for which certain attributes have not been specified yet. matches The search result must include the text or number entered in the text field to the right. You can also use boolean operators. Add apostrophes to find exact matches for the entered words, for example, ‘drum’ AND ‘funky’. This option allows for a very advanced text search.
MediaBay MediaBay Window ● To reset all search fields to their default settings, click Reset Filter in the top right corner of the Filters section. RESULT The Results list is automatically updated, showing only the files that correspond to your search conditions. Advanced Text Search You can perform advanced text searches using boolean operators. PREREQUISITE In the Favorites section, select the defined Favorite in which you want to search for files. PROCEDURE 1.
MediaBay MediaBay Window Allow you to select different attribute categories. If the columns are wide enough, the number of files that match this criteria is displayed to the right of the value. 2 Attribute values Displays the attribute values and how often a certain attribute value is available among your media files. NOTE ● Some attributes are directly linked to each other. For example, for each category value, there are certain sub-category values available.
MediaBay MediaBay Window ● To reset the filter, click Reset Result Filters. Resetting the Filter PROCEDURE ● To reset the filter, click Reset Filter at the top of the Filters section. This also resets the Results list. Attribute Inspector When you have selected one or more files in the Results list, the Attribute Inspector shows a list of attributes and their values. NOTE The Attribute Inspector is not available in the Media rack in the right zone.
MediaBay MediaBay Window Select Media Types Allows you to select one or several media types. You can then manage which attributes are displayed in the Attribute Inspector for the selected media types. +/Opens the Add User Attribute dialog, where you can add or remove custom user attributes. You can select the Attribute Type and the Display Name. Reset to Default Resets the attribute list to the default settings. Attribute Shows the attribute name.
MediaBay MediaBay Window Information on the meaning of the colors that are used in the Attribute Inspector is also displayed in a tooltip when you move the mouse pointer over one of the color icons below the Attribute Inspector. Editing Attributes The search functions, especially the attribute filter, are a powerful media management tool when making extensive use of tagging, that is, when adding and editing attributes.
MediaBay MediaBay Window PROCEDURE 1. In the Results list, select the files for which you want to make settings. You can make settings for several files simultaneously, except for the attribute name, which must be unique for every file. 2. Click in the column for the value that you want to change and make the settings. RELATED LINKS MediaBay Settings on page 581 Editing Attributes of Multiple Files Simultaneously You can edit attributes for multiple files at the same time.
MediaBay MediaBay Window ● If a file has pending tags, and you want to write the corresponding attributes to the file, you must remove the write protection, then right-click the file, and select Write Tags to File. NOTE If you use other programs than Cubase to change the write-protection status of files, you must rescan the files in the MediaBay to reflect these changes.
MediaBay MediaBay Window 3. Click +. 4. In the Add User Attribute dialog, specify the Attribute Type and the Display Name. The display name must be unique in the attribute list. The Database Name field indicates if a certain name is valid or not. 5. Click OK. RESULT The new attribute is added to the list of available attributes and is displayed in the Attribute Inspector and the Results list.
MediaBay MediaBay Window RESULT The media file is inserted on the new track or at the insert position. RELATED LINKS Show Media Types Selector on page 558 Loading Track Presets PROCEDURE 1. 2. Do one of the following: ● In the MediaBay, open the media types selector, click Track Presets, and select a preset. ● In the Media rack in the right zone, click Presets > Track Presets, and click the following tiles until you can select the preset in the Results list.
MediaBay MediaBay Window Loading Effect Plug-In Presets PROCEDURE 1. Do one of the following: ● In the MediaBay, open the media types selector, click Plug-in Presets, and select a preset. ● In the Media rack in the right zone, click Presets > VST FX Presets, and click the following tiles until you can select the preset in the Results list. 2. In the Project window, select an audio track. 3. Drag the plug-in preset from the MediaBay and insert it on the open Inserts section of the Inspector.
MediaBay Working with MediaBay-Related Windows RESULT The strip preset is applied to the track, and all settings of the preset are loaded. RELATED LINKS Show Media Types Selector on page 558 Saving/Loading Strip Presets on page 357 Loading Pattern Banks PROCEDURE 1. 2. Do one of the following: ● In the MediaBay, open the media types selector, click Pattern Banks, and select a preset.
MediaBay Working with MediaBay-Related Windows Applying Track Presets You can choose from a variety of track presets. PROCEDURE 1. In the Inspector, click the Preset Management icon on the right of the Inserts section. 2. Select From Track Preset. 3. In the Results browser, double-click a track preset to apply it. RELATED LINKS Track Presets on page 179 Applying Instrument Presets When working with VST instruments, you can choose from a variety of presets via the Results browser. PROCEDURE 1.
MediaBay Working with Volume Databases VST presets for instruments can be divided into the following groups: Presets Presets contain the settings of the entire plug-in. For multi-timbral instruments, this includes the settings for all sound slots as well as the global settings. Programs Programs contain only the settings for one program. For multi-timbral instruments, this includes only the settings for one sound slot.
MediaBay Working with Volume Databases Creating a Volume Database PROCEDURE ● In the File Browser section, right-click the external storage medium, drive, or partition of your computer system for which you want to create a database, and select Create Volume Database. IMPORTANT You must select the topmost directory level for this. You cannot create a database file for a lower-level folder. RESULT The file information for this drive is written into a new database file.
MediaBay MediaBay Settings RESULT The metadata is integrated in the local MediaBay database file, and the volume database file is deleted. NOTE If the drive contains a large amount of data, this process may take some time. Mounting and Unmounting Volume Databases Volume databases that are made available while Cubase is running must be mounted manually.
MediaBay MediaBay Key Commands Scan Unknown File Types When scanning for media files, the MediaBay ignores files with an unknown file extension. If this option is activated, the MediaBay tries to open and scan any file in the search location and ignores those files that cannot be recognized. MediaBay Key Commands You can display the available MediaBay key commands from within the MediaBay window. This is useful if you want to get a quick overview over the assigned and the available MediaBay key commands.
Surround Sound (Cubase Pro only) Cubase provides integrated surround sound features with support for several formats. All audiorelated channels and busses can handle multi-channel speaker configurations. A channel in the MixConsole can contain either complete surround mixes, or an individual speaker channel which is part of a surround setup. Cubase offers the following surround-related features: ● You can route audio-related tracks, that is audio, instrument, and sampler tracks, to surround channels.
Surround Sound (Cubase Pro only) Available Surround Channel Configurations Available Surround Channel Configurations Cubase supports several surround channel configurations. The following surround channel configurations are supported: LRC This format uses the channels left, right, and center. Quadro This is the original quadraphonic format for music, with one speaker in each corner. This format was intended for vinyl record players. 5.
Surround Sound (Cubase Pro only) Preparations for Surround Mixing Preparations for Surround Mixing You must prepare Cubase for surround sound by defining input and output busses in a surround format and specifying which audio inputs and outputs are used for the different channels in the busses. Output Bus Configuration Before you can start working with surround sound, you must configure a surround output bus through which all the speaker channels of the selected surround format are routed.
Surround Sound (Cubase Pro only) Preparations for Surround Mixing Output bus in 5.1 channel configuration with stereo child bus RELATED LINKS Adding Child Busses (Cubase Pro only) on page 29 Surround Routing The processing format of VST MultiPanner depends on the channel routing. You can use the Routing and the Direct Routing racks in the MixConsole to route audio-related tracks to output busses or group channels with a surround configuration. For example, if a mono source channel is routed to a 5.
Surround Sound (Cubase Pro only) Preparations for Surround Mixing NOTE If a stereo audio channel is routed directly to a speaker channel, the left and the right channels are mixed to mono. The pan control for the audio channel determines the balance between the left and the right channel in the resulting mono mix. Center pan produces a mix of equal proportion.
Surround Sound (Cubase Pro only) VST MultiPanner ● You have prepared surround premixes, for example, stems, that you want to record on a new audio track with a surround configuration. RELATED LINKS Importing Audio Files on page 254 Adding Input and Output Busses on page 29 VST MultiPanner The VST MultiPanner plug-in allows you to position a sound source in the surround field or to modify existing premixes. The plug-in distributes the incoming audio in various proportions to the output surround channels.
Surround Sound (Cubase Pro only) VST MultiPanner ● To open the VST MultiPanner plug-in panel in a separate window, double-click a miniature view of VST MultiPanner in the Inspector or the MixConsole. The following settings and options are available: Movement restriction buttons Allow you to restrict the movement to one axis when moving the sound source with the mouse. NOTE ● The controls in the positioning section below the pan area are not affected by the movement restriction buttons.
Surround Sound (Cubase Pro only) VST MultiPanner To zoom out of the pan area, activate Overview Mode. Speaker channel buttons The speaker buttons around the pan area represent the output configuration. The buttons allow you to solo, mute, and disable the corresponding channels. NOTE You cannot automate the soloing of output channels. Output level meter Shows the output level for all speaker channels. The numeric values above the meters indicate the peak levels registered for the channels.
Surround Sound (Cubase Pro only) VST MultiPanner LFE Level Sets the signal amount that is sent to the LFE (Low Frequency Effects) channel. NOTE The LFE channel is used as a full range channel, no low-pass filtering is applied.
Surround Sound (Cubase Pro only) VST MultiPanner ● In the Inspector miniature view, you can also solo, mute, and disable channels. NOTE In all miniature panner views, you can hold the Shift key while moving the sound source to allow for more accurate positioning.
Surround Sound (Cubase Pro only) VST MultiPanner Position the Sound Source in the Pan Area The pan area allows you to use the mouse for positioning the sound source in the room. In the pan area, the virtual position of the sound source is shown as a circle. The left and right stereo channels are shown in yellow and red. Mono channels are shown in blue.
Surround Sound (Cubase Pro only) VST MultiPanner NOTE The movement restriction buttons do not affect the controls in the positioning section below. The following positioning modes and modifier keys are available: Standard Positioning Mode Mouse movements are not restricted. Fine-Scaled Positioning Mode Mouse movements are scaled to allow very fine movements. This is useful when panning in one of the miniature displays, for example.
Surround Sound (Cubase Pro only) VST MultiPanner is not possible to record automation for one stereo channel and then add automation for the other stereo channel in a second go, for example. Overview Mode Overview Mode visualizes panning movements outside the pan area. However, the actual panning is done in the standard view. If you have moved the sound source to outside of the pan area, Overview Mode allows you to see where the positioning handle and the panning balls are located.
Surround Sound (Cubase Pro only) VST MultiPanner Rotate Control The Rotate Signal around Z-Axis control allows you to rotate the sound source. Orbit Controls The orbit controls allow you to rotate the sound source, including all input channels, around the center of the surround field. 1 Orbit Center 2 Radius Orbit Center This is the main control that allows you to perform the rotation.
Surround Sound (Cubase Pro only) VST MultiPanner If you position the source signal inside this range, the signal is sent to all 3 channels. Divergence Controls Front Divergence, Front/Rear Divergence, and Rear Divergence determine the attenuation curves used when positioning sound sources for x-axis front, y-axis (front/rear), and x-axis back. If all divergence controls are set to 0 %, positioning a sound source on a speaker sets all other speakers to level zero.
Surround Sound (Cubase Pro only) VST MultiPanner ● 100 % corresponds to the complete width or depth of the surround field. ● If you reduce both values to 0 %, the distance is reduced to zero and all source channels are centered in one spot. NOTE Signal Depth is only available for configurations with front and rear channels. Soloed, Muted, and Disabled Speaker Channels The speaker buttons around the pan area represent the output configuration and allow you to disable, solo, or mute channels.
Surround Sound (Cubase Pro only) MixConvert V6 RELATED LINKS Constant Power Panning on page 588 MixConvert V6 MixConvert V6 is a plug-in that converts one multi-channel audio source into another multichannel destination. It is most frequently used to downmix a multi-channel surround mix into a format with fewer channels, for example, a 5.1 surround mix into a stereo mix. This plug-in can be used as an insert effect in the MixConsole like other plug-ins but it also has special functions.
Surround Sound (Cubase Pro only) Surround Mix Export Surround Tracks Routing Destination Surround Pan Option Mono ● MixConvert V6 Stereo ● MixConvert V6 Surround ● VST MultiPanner ● MixConvert V6 ● VST MultiPanner ● MixConvert V6 ● MixConvert V6 Surround with larger channel width Surround with smaller channel width You can select the surround pan option in the context menu of the panner miniature views in the MixConsole, in the Channel Settings window, and in the Inspector.
Automation In essence, automation means recording the values for a particular MixConsole or effect parameter. When you create your final mix, Cubase can adjust this particular parameter control. Automation Curves Within a Cubase project, the changes in a parameter value over time are reflected as curves on automation tracks.
Automation Writing Automation Data NOTE R is automatically enabled when you enable W. This allows Cubase to read existing automation data at any time. You can separately deactivate W if you only want to read existing data. There are also global read and write indicator buttons Activate/Deactivate Read/Write for All Tracks on the MixConsole toolbar and at the top of the track list. These buttons light up as soon as there is an enabled R or W button on any channel/track within your project.
Automation Writing Automation Data RESULT All actions that you recorded are reproduced exactly. When you drag a plug-in to a different insert slot on the same channel, any existing automation data moves with the plug-in. When you drag it to an insert slot on a different channel, any existing automation data is not transferred to the new channel. Manual Writing of Automation Data You can add automation events manually by drawing automation curves on an automation track. PROCEDURE 1.
Automation Editing Automation Events The following Line tool modes are available: Line mode If you click on the automation track and drag with the Line tool in Line mode, you can create automation events in a line. This is a quick way to create linear fades, etc. Parabola mode If you click and drag on the automation track with the Line tool in Parabola mode, you can create more natural curves and fades. NOTE The result depends on the direction from which you draw the parabolic curve.
Automation Editing Automation Events Creating Smooth Transitions Between Automation Events (Bézier Automation Curves) Cubase supports bézier automation curves that allow you to create smooth transitions between automation events. This way, you can edit linear ramp curves with much more precision, flexibility, and intuition. PREREQUISITE The Object Selection tool is active. PROCEDURE 1. Move the mouse pointer on the linear ramp curve segment that you want to edit. A handle is shown on the curve segment.
Automation Editing Automation Events ● To select multiple events, drag a selection rectangle with the Object Selection tool or Shift-click the events. ● To select multiple events, select a range with the Range Selection tool or Shift-click the events. ● To select all automation events on an automation track, right-click the automation track and select Select All Events from the context menu. Selected events are indicated by a dark color.
Automation Editing Automation Events 4 Move Vertically If you click on the upper border of the editor, you can move the entire curve vertically. This allows you to raise or lower the values of the event values of the curve. 5 Compress Right If you Alt-click in the upper right corner of the editor, you can compress or expand the right part of the curve. This allows you to compress or expand the event values at the end of the curve.
Automation Editing Automation Events RESULT The curve segment between the two automation events is scaled. Moving Automation Events Moving Single Automation Events ● To move a selected automation event, click it and drag to the left or to the right. ● To restrict the direction of the movement, press Ctrl/Cmd and drag. NOTE Snap is taken into account when you move automation curves horizontally. To turn it off temporarily, hold down Ctrl/Cmd and any other modifier, and drag.
Automation Automation Tracks Automation Tracks Most of the tracks in your project have automation tracks, one for each automated parameter. To show automation tracks, you must open them. Showing/Hiding Automation Tracks ● Position the mouse pointer over the lower left corner of the track and click the arrow icon (Show/Hide Automation) that appears. ● Right-click the track in the track list and select Show/Hide Automation from the context menu.
Automation Virgin Territory vs. Initial Value (Cubase Pro only) switch back to the replaced parameter. On the pop-up menu, an asterisk (*) is shown after the parameter name for hidden automation tracks. Muting Automation Tracks By muting an automation track, you turn off automation for a single parameter. ● To mute individual automation tracks, click Mute Automation in the track list. Virgin Territory vs.
Automation Automation Panel (Cubase Pro only) Automation Panel (Cubase Pro only) The Automation panel is a floating window, similar to the MixConsole and Transport panel, and can be left open while you work. To show the Automation panel, do one of the following: ● Select Project > Automation Panel. ● On the Project window toolbar, click Open Automation Panel. ● Press F6. Read/Write Buttons In the upper part of the Automation Panel, you will find the Read and Write buttons.
Automation Automation Panel (Cubase Pro only) ● If you activate Fast Forward/Rewind. ● If the project cursor reaches the right locator in Cycle mode. ● If you click in the ruler to move the project cursor. This is user-definable and can be controlled via the Automation Panel. RELATED LINKS Automation Settings on page 619 Touch Touch mode is useful in situations where you want to make a change lasting only a few seconds to an already set up parameter.
Automation Automation Panel (Cubase Pro only) Auto-Latch Auto-Latch is useful in situations where you want to keep a value over a longer period of time – for example when making EQ settings for a particular scene. In Auto-Latch mode, there is no specific punch out condition other than those that are valid in all modes. ● Once your pass has started, the writing of automation data continues for as long as playback lasts or Write is enabled.
Automation Automation Panel (Cubase Pro only) ● When you re-touch the fader and move it towards the original value, punch out occurs automatically as soon as you cross the original curve. RELATED LINKS Automation Settings on page 619 Trim Trim allows you to modify the automation curve from a previous pass. If you activate Trim, a trim curve is positioned in the middle of the automation track. NOTE Trim works for channel volume and cue send level adjustments.
Automation Automation Panel (Cubase Pro only) Freeze Trim You can freeze your trim curve automatically or manually. This renders all trim data into a single automation curve. ● To freeze your trim curve automatically whenever a write operation is finished, open the Automation Settings and select On Pass End in the Freeze Trim pop-up menu. ● To freeze your trim curve automatically when Trim mode is switched off, open the Automation Settings and select On Leaving Trim Mode in the Freeze Trim pop-up menu.
Automation Automation Panel (Cubase Pro only) Activating To Punch PROCEDURE 1. On the Automation Panel, activate Touch, and activate To Punch as Fill option. 2. Start playback. 3. Move the fader until you have found the volume setting that you need and release the fader to punch out. The volume curve is set from the point of punch out back to where you punched in.
Automation Automation Panel (Cubase Pro only) NOTE When Trim is active, Gap has no effect. This is because Trim only modifies already existing data. PROCEDURE 1. On the Automation Panel, activate Touch, and activate Gaps to activate it as Fill option. 2. Start playback. 3. Move the fader until you have found the volume setting that you need and release the fader to punch out.
Automation Automation Panel (Cubase Pro only) Suspend Options This section on the Automation Panel allows you to exclude specific parameters from the reading or writing of automation data. This way, you have full manual control of these parameters. Suspend Read Suspending the reading for a specific parameter during automation gives you full manual control of it. ● To suspend the reading of automation data for a specific parameter, click the corresponding parameter.
Automation Automation Panel (Cubase Pro only) The automation tracks are opened even if no automation data was recorded on these tracks. ● To step through the individual parameter sets of parameter groups, for example Pan, EQ, Sends, and Inserts, click the respective button repeatedly. ● To show only the automation tracks for which automation data has already been written, activate Used Only and click one of the options. ● To show all automation tracks that contain automation data, activate Show Used.
Automation MIDI Controller Automation Spike Detection Range Defines a period of time in which sudden changes in the automated parameter are considered to be unwanted spikes. The spikes can be removed using the Delete Automation Spikes function. You can set values from 0 to 200 ms. Freeze Trim In this pop-up menu, you can specify how to freeze your trim curve. ● To freeze your trim curve manually, select Manually. ● To perform a freeze whenever a write operation is finished, select On Pass End.
Automation MIDI Controller Automation MIDI Controller Automation Setup In the MIDI Controller Automation Setup dialog, you can specify how existing MIDI automation is handled on playback and new automation data is recorded in a MIDI part or as track automation. All settings that you make in this dialog are saved with the project. ● To open the MIDI Controller Automation Setup select MIDI > CC Automation Setup.
Automation MIDI Controller Automation Save As Default Allows you to save the current settings as default settings. When you create a new project, the default settings are used. Load Default Allows you to load the default settings.
VST Instruments VST instruments are software synthesizers or other sound sources that are contained within Cubase. They are played internally via MIDI. You can add effects or EQ to VST instruments. Cubase allows you to make use of VST instruments in the following ways: ● By adding a VST Instrument and assigning one or several MIDI tracks to it. ● By creating an instrument track. This is a combination of a VST instrument, an instrument channel, and a MIDI track.
VST Instruments Creating Instrument Tracks NOTE In the Preferences dialog (VST—Plug-ins page), you can specify what happens when you load a VST instrument. ● A folder with the name of the instrument that is added within a VST Instruments folder. The instrument folder contains two automation tracks: one for the plug-in parameters and one for the synth channel in the MixConsole. Creating Instrument Tracks You can create instrument tracks that hold dedicated VST instruments. PROCEDURE 1.
VST Instruments VST Instruments Window RELATED LINKS Showing/Hiding Zones on page 40 VST Instruments Window The VST Instruments window allows you to add VST instruments for MIDI and instrument tracks. All instruments that are used in your project are shown. You can access up to 8 quick controls for each added instrument. To open the VST Instruments window, select Studio > VST Instruments.
VST Instruments VST Instrument Controls VST Instrument Controls The VST instrument controls allow you to make settings for a loaded VST instrument. The following controls are available on each instrument: 1 Activate Instrument Activates/Deactivates the instrument. 2 Edit Instrument Opens the instrument panel. 3 Freeze Instrument Freezes the instrument. This allows you to save CPU power. 4 Instrument Selector Allows you to select another instrument. Double-click to rename the instrument.
VST Instruments Presets for Instruments Side-Chain Input for VST Instruments on page 634 VST Instrument Context Menu The following functions are available in the instruments context menu: Copy/Paste Instrument Setting Allows you to copy the instrument settings and paste them to another instrument. Load/Save Preset Allows you to load/save an instrument preset. Default Preset Allows you to define and save a default preset. Switch to A/B Setting Activates the setting A or B.
VST Instruments Presets for Instruments Loading VST Presets You can load VST Presets from the VST Instruments window, from the instrument panel or from the Inspector. PROCEDURE 1. 2. Do one of the following: ● Select the track that contains the VST instrument and in the Inspector, click the Programs field. ● In the VST Instruments window, click Preset Browser for the instrument, and select Load Preset. ● In the control panel for the VST instrument, click Preset Browser, and select Load Preset.
VST Instruments Playing Back VST Instruments Saving Track Presets You can save your settings on instrument tracks as track presets for further use. PROCEDURE 1. Do one of the following: ● Select the instrument track and in the Inspector, click Save Track Preset. ● Right-click the instrument track and from the context menu, select Save Track Preset. 2. In the Save Track Preset dialog, enter a name for the preset. 3. Optional: Click Show Attribute Inspector and define attributes for the preset. 4.
VST Instruments Latency ● Select Studio > VST Instruments. ● Select the instrument track and open the top Inspector section. 2. Click Freeze. 3. In the Freeze Instrument Options dialog, make your settings. 4. Click OK. RESULT ● The instrument is rendered to an audio file and on playback you hear the same sound as before freezing. ● Less CPU load is used. ● The Freeze button lights up. ● The MIDI/instrument track controls are grayed out. ● The MIDI parts are locked.
VST Instruments Import and Export Options If the latency is too high to allow comfortable realtime VST instrument playback from a keyboard, you can use another MIDI sound source for live playback and recording, and switch to the VST instrument for playback. RELATED LINKS Selecting an Audio Driver on page 12 Delay Compensation During playback Cubase automatically compensates any delay inherent in the VST plug-ins you use.
VST Instruments Import and Export Options 3. In the results list, select a MIDI loop and drag it to an empty section in the Project window. RESULT An instrument track is created and the instrument part is inserted at the position where you dragged the file. The Inspector reflects all settings that are saved in the MIDI loop, for example, the VST instrument that was used, applied insert effects, track parameters, etc. NOTE You can also drag MIDI loops onto existing instrument or MIDI tracks.
VST Instruments VST Quick Controls VST Quick Controls VST Quick Controls allow you to remote-control a VST instrument from within the VST Instruments window. To show the VST Quick Controls on the VST Instruments window, activate Show/Hide all VST Quick Controls. The following controls are available on each rack: 1 Show/Hide VST Quick Controls Allows you to show/hide the VST Quick Controls for the instrument. 2 VST Quick Controls Allow you to remote-control the parameters of the instrument.
VST Instruments Side-Chain Input for VST Instruments 8. Select the next slot in the Control Name column and repeat the previous steps. 9. Click OK. NOTE In addition to using the Learn function to set up the table in the Quick Controls section, you can modify the values manually. The available options are identical to the ones available for the Generic Remote device. RESULT The quick controls are now associated with control elements on your external remote controller.
VST Instruments Side-Chain Input for VST Instruments ● Apply ducking to the instrument, that is, reduce the volume of the instrument track when a signal is present on the audio track. You can route the audio signal to the side-chain input of an instrument in different ways: ● To process the audio signal completely through the instrument, route the output of the audio track to the side-chain input of an instrument.
VST Instruments External Instruments (Cubase Pro only) NOTE For detailed information about Retrologue and its parameters, see the separate document Retrologue. External Instruments (Cubase Pro only) An external instrument bus is an input (return) to your audio hardware, along with a MIDI connection via Cubase and few additional settings. External instrument busses are created in the Audio Connections window.
Installing and Managing PlugIns Installing VST Plug-Ins Cubase supports the VST 2 and VST 3 plug-in standards. You can install effects and instruments that comply with these formats. A plug-in is a piece of software that adds a specific functionality to Cubase. The audio effects and instruments that are used in Cubase are VST plug-ins. Effect or instrument plug-ins normally have their own installation application. Read the documentation or readme files before installing new plug-ins.
Installing and Managing Plug-Ins VST Plug-In Manager The VST Plug-in Manager window shows the following: VST Effects This tab lists all VST effects that are loaded in Cubase. You can sort the list by name, vendor, category, etc. by clicking the corresponding column heading. VST Instruments This tab lists all VST instruments that are loaded in Cubase. You can sort the list by name, vendor, category, etc. by clicking the corresponding column heading.
Installing and Managing Plug-Ins VST Plug-In Manager Search Field Enter the name of a plug-in in the search field. The list of all effects or VST instruments is filtered to show only those plug-ins whose names contain the text that you entered. Display Options Allows you to choose which plug-ins are shown: ● To show all loaded plug-ins, select Show All Plug-ins. ● To hide all plug-ins that are part of the active collection, select Hide Plug-ins That Are in Active Collection.
Installing and Managing Plug-Ins Compiling a New Effects Collection RELATED LINKS VST Plug-In Manager on page 637 VST Audio System on page 13 Compiling a New Effects Collection You can create a new collection of effects or VST instruments for use in the plug-in selectors. PREREQUISITE A number of effect plug-ins is correctly installed on your computer, and these plug-ins are listed on the VST Effects tab of the VST Plug-in Manager window. PROCEDURE 1.
Track Quick Controls Cubase can give you instant access to up to 8 different parameters, for example, track, effect, or instrument controls. This is done with the aid of the Quick Controls, set up in the Quick Controls section of the Inspector for the corresponding track. The Quick Controls section can be used as a kind of track control center, an area in which your most important parameters are assembled in one place.
Track Quick Controls Assigning Parameters to Quick Controls 3 Remove all QC Assignments Assignment via the Learn Function Using QC Learn Mode in the Quick Controls section in the Inspector, you can assign a parameter by moving the corresponding control. This procedure applies to all automatable controls. PROCEDURE 1. In the Inspector for your track, open the Quick Controls section. 2. Activate QC Learn Mode. 3. Select the slot to which you want to assign a parameter. 4. Use the desired control.
Track Quick Controls Assigning Parameters to Quick Controls PROCEDURE ● Right-click the parameter. ● To assign the parameter to the next empty slot, select Add “x” to Quick Controls (where x is the name of the parameter). ● To assign the parameter to a specific slot, select Add “x” to Quick Controls Slot (where x is the name of the parameter). Then select the slot from the submenu.
Track Quick Controls Assigning Parameters to Quick Controls 2. Click Get Default QCs from Plug-in. Removing Parameter Assignments ● To remove a parameter from a slot, double-click the parameter name to select it and press the Delete or Backspace key. Confirm by pressing Return. Alternatively, you can click in the corresponding slot and select No parameter from the pop-up menu. ● To remove the Quick Control assignments for all slots, click Remove All QC Assignments.
Track Quick Controls Connecting Quick Controls with Remote Controllers RELATED LINKS Manual Assignment via the Inspector Section on page 643 Connecting Quick Controls with Remote Controllers Quick Controls become powerful when used in combination with a remote controller. PREREQUISITE Your remote device is connected to Cubase via MIDI. PROCEDURE 1. Select Studio > Studio Setup. 2. In the Devices list, select Track Quick Controls or VST Quick Controls. This opens the respective section on the right. 3.
Track Quick Controls Quick Controls and Automatable Parameters the previous value of a parameter in a way that it is initially set to the zero position, before it is changed. Thus, you always lose your previous setting of the parameter. To avoid this, you can activate Pick-up Mode. This has the effect that when you move your hardware control, you can only change the parameter once the control reaches the parameter’s previous value. The control picks up the parameter at the value to which it was last set.
Track Quick Controls Quick Controls and Automatable Parameters RESULT The Quick Controls section has become a secondary mixer, dedicated to quick-controlling parameters on other tracks. IMPORTANT Quick Controls that are assigned that way cannot work when saved as track presets.
Remote Controlling Cubase It is possible to control Cubase via MIDI. A large number of MIDI control devices is supported. This chapter describes how to set up Cubase for remote control. The supported devices are described in the separate document Remote Control Devices. There is also a Generic Remote Device option, allowing you to use any MIDI controller to remote control Cubase.
Remote Controlling Cubase Setting Up 2. If you cannot find the remote device you are looking for, click on the plus sign in the top left corner and select the device from the pop-up menu. The selected device is added to the Devices list. NOTE Note that it is possible to select more than one remote device of the same type. If you have more than one remote device of the same type, these will be numbered in the Devices list.
Remote Controlling Cubase Operations dialog. The Send Reset Message to all Devices button at the top left of the dialog next to the + and - buttons will reset every device in the Devices list. Operations Global Options for Remote Controllers In the Studio Setup dialog, on the page for your remote device, some (or all) of the following global functions may be available (depending on your remote device): Bank Pop-Up Menu If your remote device contains several banks, you can select the bank you want to use.
Remote Controlling Cubase Operations Assigning remote key commands For some remote devices, you can assign any Cubase function (to which a key command can be assigned) to generic buttons, wheels, or other controls. PROCEDURE 1. Select Studio > Studio Setup. 2. In the Devices list, select your remote device. On the right side of the window you will find a table. This is where you assign commands. 3.
Remote Controlling Cubase The Generic Remote Device The Generic Remote Device If you have a generic MIDI controller, you can use this for remote control of Cubase by setting up the Generic Remote device: PROCEDURE 1. Select Studio > Studio Setup. If the Generic Remote device is not on the Devices list, you need to add it. 2. Click the “+” sign in the top left corner and select the “Generic Remote” device from the pop-up menu.
Remote Controlling Cubase The Generic Remote Device Column Description Control Name Double-clicking this field allows you to enter a descriptive name for the control (typically a name written on the console). This name is automatically reflected in the Control Name column in the lower table. MIDI Status Clicking in this column opens a pop-up menu, allowing you to specify the type of MIDI message sent by the control such as Controller, Prog. Change Trigger.
Remote Controlling Cubase The Generic Remote Device Select the control in the upper table (by clicking in the Control Name column), move the corresponding control on your MIDI device and click the Learn button to the right of the table. The MIDI Status, MIDI Channel, and Address values are automatically set to those of the moved control. ● If you use the Learn function for a control that sends a Program Change value, the “Prog.
Remote Controlling Cubase Track Quick Controls Column Description Push Button and Toggle is useful for remote controls which do not latch the state of a button. One example is controlling mute status with a device on which pressing the Mute button turns it on, and releasing the Mute button turns it off. If Push Button and Toggle are activated, the Mute status will change between on and off whenever the button is pressed on the console. ● 8.
Remote Controlling Cubase The Remote Control Editor The Remote Control Editor Often, the automatic mapping of plug-in parameters to remote control devices appears rather random, and not very intuitive. The Remote Control Editor allows you to define your own mapping of VST plug-in parameters to the controls of the supported hardware controllers. ● To open the Remote Control Editor, right-click the plug-in panel of the plug-in that you want to remote-control and select “Remote Control Editor”.
Remote Controlling Cubase The Remote Control Editor Inspector Section The Inspector contains the settings and the parameter assignment for the selected cell. The upper section contains settings for the text label. The lower section contains settings for the knob and the switches. Status Bar When you position the mouse pointer over an element in the editor window, the status bar shows information on what you can do with this element.
Remote Controlling Cubase The Remote Control Editor Click the “Set up Cell Layout” button to open the Cell Layout Configuration panel. Here, you can make the following settings: ● Use the pop-up menu to specify the number of cells per page. ● In the lower section, select the switch layout that you want to use for the pages. You can specify the number of switches for a cell by activating/deactivating them. Defining the Controls You can define the operation for a particular switch or knob.
Remote Controlling Cubase The Remote Control Editor Control Type Settings for Switches The following options are available for switches: Momentary The assigned function is active for as long as you keep the switch pressed. Increasing Stepwise Pressing the switch steps through the available settings until the maximum is reached. Decreasing Stepwise Pressing the switch steps through the available settings in reverse order until the minimum is reached.
Remote Controlling Cubase The Remote Control Editor 5. Press Esc to end Learn mode. Removing the Parameter assignment ● To remove the parameter assignment for a cell, activate Learn mode, select the cell, and press Delete or Backspace. ● To remove all assignments, click the “Remove All Assignments” button. Assignment Status You can show the current assignment of all cells in a layout by activating the “i” button in the top right corner of the editor.
Remote Controlling Cubase Apple Remote (macOS only) Navigating ● You can use the cursor keys to navigate in all directions. ● When Learn mode is active, pressing Shift allows you to step between the controls within the cells. ● To step forwards or backwards through the different layouts, use Tab and Shift-Tab. Adding/Removing Pages ● To add a page to a layout, click the “+” button on the right of a page. ● To remove a page, click the corresponding “-” button.
Remote Controlling Cubase Apple Remote (macOS only) By default, the Apple Remote always controls the application that has the focus on your Macintosh computer (provided that this application supports the Apple Remote). NOTE When the “Disable when application is not in front” option is not selected, the Apple Remote will control Cubase even if it does not have the focus.
MIDI Realtime Parameters and MIDI Effects MIDI realtime means that you can change or transform MIDI events on MIDI or instrument tracks before they are sent to the MIDI outputs. This allows you to change the way MIDI data is played back. The actual MIDI events on the track are not affected. Therefore, MIDI real time changes are not reflected in any MIDI editor.
MIDI Realtime Parameters and MIDI Effects MIDI Track Parameters Use the Input Transformer for the following purposes: ● Set up split keyboard combinations for recording left and right hands separately. ● Convert a controller such as a foot pedal into MIDI notes (for playing bass drum the right way). ● Filter out a specific type of MIDI data on one MIDI channel only. ● Turn aftertouch into any controller and vice versa. ● Invert velocity or pitch.
MIDI Realtime Parameters and MIDI Effects MIDI Modifiers Allows you to set up the filter conditions, determining which elements to find. The list can contain one or several conditions, each on a separate line. 4 Action list Allows you to specify any changes that are made to the found events. 5 Function pop-up menu Allows you to select between Filter and Transform as a basic type of editing to be performed. Specifying Filter Conditions PROCEDURE 1. Select a MIDI or instrument track. 2.
MIDI Realtime Parameters and MIDI Effects MIDI Modifiers MIDI Modifiers Section NOTE If you want to compare the result of your modifier settings with the unprocessed MIDI, you can use the bypass button in the MIDI modifiers section. If this button is activated, the MIDI modifiers settings are temporarily disabled. Transpose Allows you to transpose all notes on the track in semitones. Extreme transpositions can give rather strange and unwanted results.
MIDI Realtime Parameters and MIDI Effects MIDI Modifiers Range Allows you to specify a pitch or velocity range and either force all notes to fit within this range, or exclude all notes outside this range from playback. HMT: Follow Activate this button to apply Hermode tuning to the notes played on this track. HMT: Use for Analysis Activate this option to use the notes you played on this track to calculate retuning.
MIDI Realtime Parameters and MIDI Effects MIDI Modifiers Range Modes On the Range pop-up menu, you can select different range modes. Values are shown as numbers, from 0 to 127, for the velocity modes and as note numbers, from C-2 to G8, for the pitch modes. Vel. Limit Allows you to force all velocity values to fit within the range that you specify with the min and max values. Values below the lower limit are set to the min value, velocity values above the higher setting are set to the max value. Vel.
MIDI Realtime Parameters and MIDI Effects MIDI Modifiers RELATED LINKS Hermode Tuning on page 669 Hermode Tuning You can select different Hermode tuning types. ● To select a Hermode Tuning type, select Project > Project Setup and select an option from the HMT Type pop-up menu. The following options are available: None No tuning is applied. Reference (pure 3/5) Tunes pure thirds and fifths. Classic (pure 3/5 equalized) Tunes pure thirds and fifths. In conflict situations, a slight equalization is applied.
MIDI Realtime Parameters and MIDI Effects MIDI Effects RELATED LINKS MIDI Track Inspector on page 113 MIDI Effects MIDI effects allow you to transform the MIDI data played back from the track in real time. You can add new events by using MIDI effects, or change MIDI event properties like pitches, for example. NOTE The included MIDI effect plug-ins are described in the separate document Plug-in Reference. MIDI Inserts MIDI insert effects are inserted in the signal chain of MIDI channels.
MIDI Realtime Parameters and MIDI Effects MIDI Effects Applying a MIDI Insert Effect You can apply MIDI insert effects to a MIDI track. PROCEDURE 1. Select the MIDI track. 2. In the Inspector, open the MIDI Inserts section. 3. Click Select Effect Type to open the MIDI effect pop-up menu. 4. Select a MIDI effect from the pop-up menu. RESULT The effect is automatically activated and its control panel is opened, allowing you to make settings for the effect.
MIDI Realtime Parameters and MIDI Effects MIDI Effects You can add up to four MIDI send effects. Bypass Allows you to bypass all send effects for the track. Activate Send Allows you to activate/deactivate the selected effect. Pre/Post Activate this to send the MIDI signals to the send effects before the MIDI modifiers and insert effects. Open/Close Send Effect Editor Allows you to open/close the control panel for the selected effect.
MIDI Realtime Parameters and MIDI Effects Transpose and Velocity on the Info Line Presets Some of the MIDI effects come with a number of presets for instant use. 1 MIDI In/MIDI Out Activity Indicates if the plug-in receives or transmits MIDI data. 2 Save Preset/Remove Preset Allows you to save your settings as a preset or to remove saved presets. Saved presets are available in the Select Preset pop-up menu for all instances of that MIDI plug-in, and in all projects.
Using MIDI devices The MIDI Device Manager allows you to specify and set up your MIDI devices, making global control and patch selection easy. But the MIDI Device Manager also features powerful editing functions that can be used to create MIDI device panels (Cubase Pro only). MIDI device panels are internal representations of external MIDI hardware, complete with graphics.
Using MIDI devices MIDI devices – general settings and patch handling correct sound. Also, selecting patches by numbers this way seems unnecessarily cumbersome, when most instruments use names for their patches nowadays. To help with this, you can use the MIDI Device Manager to specify which MIDI instruments you have connected by selecting from a vast list of existing devices or by specifying the details yourself.
Using MIDI devices MIDI devices – general settings and patch handling Output Here you specify to which MIDI output the selected device is connected. Commands (Cubase Artist only) This pop-up menu lets you edit the selected device (provided that “Enable Edit” is ticked). The patch structure for the selected device is shown on the left side of the dialog.
Using MIDI devices MIDI devices – general settings and patch handling Defining a new MIDI device (Cubase Artist only) If your MIDI device is not included in the list of pre-configured devices (and is not a “plain” GM or XG device), you need to define it manually to make it possible to select patches by name. PROCEDURE 1. In the MIDI Device Manager, click the Install Device button. The Add MIDI Device dialog opens. 2. Select “Define New…” and click OK. A dialog appears. 3.
Using MIDI devices MIDI devices – general settings and patch handling ● You can rename a device in the Installed Devices list by double-clicking and typing – this is useful if you have several devices of the same model, and want to separate them by name instead of by number. ● To remove a device from the Installed Devices list, select it and click Remove Device. NOTE Note that if there already exists a panel for the device (Cubase Pro only), opening the device might open this panel first.
Using MIDI devices MIDI devices – general settings and patch handling Selecting a patch for an installed device If you return to the Project window at this point, you will find that the installed device has been added to the MIDI Output menus (in the track list and the Inspector). Now you can select patches by name, in the following way: PROCEDURE 1. Open the Output menu (in the track list or Inspector) for the track you want to associate the installed device with, and select the device.
Using MIDI devices MIDI devices – general settings and patch handling NOTE You can also make more radical changes to the patch structure in a device (adding or deleting patches, groups or banks). For example, this is useful if you expand your MIDI device by adding extra storage media such as RAM cards. Patch Structure Patches are structured as follows: ● Banks are the main categories of sounds – typically patches, performances and drums.
Using MIDI devices MIDI devices – general settings and patch handling to choose “CC: BankSelect MSB”, “Bank Select 14 Bit”, “Bank Select 14 Bit MSB-LSB Swapped” or some other option. Add Multiple Presets This opens a dialog, allowing you to set up a range of presets to be added to the selected bank or folder. Adding Multiple Presets PROCEDURE 1. Add the event types required for selecting a patch in the MIDI device.
Using MIDI devices About Device panels (Cubase Pro only) About Device panels (Cubase Pro only) On the following pages we will describe how to use MIDI Device panels and the powerful MIDI device panel editing features of the MIDI Device Manager. NOTE We recommend that you first configure the patch banks, then export the device setup before editing the panels. This way, most of your settings will be saved in case of panel configuration problems. The panels are saved in XML format.
Using MIDI devices About Device panels (Cubase Pro only) RESULT Now the Device panel can be opened by clicking the Open Device Panels button in the Inspector or in the channel for the corresponding track in the MixConsole. NOTE Note that Ctrl/Cmd-clicking the Open Device Panels button allows you to open a subpanel via the panel browser pop-up menu. Showing panels in the Inspector PROCEDURE 1. In the Inspector, open the Device Panel section and click on the arrow on the right.
Using MIDI devices About Device panels (Cubase Pro only) The Panels folder is displayed like in the Inspector, but with different available panels. Just like in the Inspector, the panel has to “fit” into the available space to be selectable. 4. Select a panel. The panel is shown in the Channel Racks section of the MixConsole. Automating device parameters Automation works just like for normal audio and MIDI tracks: PROCEDURE 1.
MIDI Functions MIDI functions allow you to permanently edit MIDI events or MIDI parts in the Project window or from within a MIDI editor. Which events are affected when you use a MIDI function depends on the function, the active window and the current selection: ● In the Project window, the MIDI functions apply to all selected parts, affecting all events of the relevant types in them. ● In the MIDI editors, MIDI functions apply to all selected events.
MIDI Functions Merging MIDI Events into a New Part ● Select a root note and a scale type for the new scale in the New Scale pop-up menus. NOTE If the new root note differs from the current root note, this leads to an entirely different key. Use Range Limits the transposition of notes to the note values that you specify with the Low and High settings. NOTE Notes that would end up outside the range after transposition, are shifted to another octave, keeping the correct transposed pitch if possible.
MIDI Functions Dissolve Part Freezing MIDI Modifiers on page 669 MIDI Merge Options Dialog The following options are available: Include Inserts Applies MIDI insert effects and MIDI modifiers. Include Sends Applies MIDI send effects. Erase Destination Deletes MIDI data between the left and right locators on the destination track. Include Chase Includes events placed outside the selected part but relating to it in the processing, for example, a program change right before the left locator.
MIDI Functions Dissolve Part Separate Channels Separates MIDI events according to their channel. This is useful for MIDI parts on MIDI channel Any that contain events on different MIDI channels. Separate Pitches Separates MIDI events according to their pitch. This is useful for drum and percussion tracks, where different pitches usually correspond to separate drum sounds. Optimized Display Automatically removes silent areas of the resulting parts.
MIDI Functions Bouncing MIDI Parts Dissolving Parts into Separate Pitches You can dissolve MIDI parts that contain events of different pitches and distribute the events into new parts on new tracks, one for each MIDI pitch found. This is useful when the different pitches are used for separating different sounds such as MIDI drum tracks or sampler sound FX tracks. By dissolving such parts, you can work with each sound individually, on a separate track. PROCEDURE 1.
MIDI Functions Repeating MIDI Events of Independent Track Loops Repeating MIDI Events of Independent Track Loops You can repeat the MIDI events inside an independent track loop to fill up a MIDI part. This is useful, if you want to convert the events of an independent track loop to actual MIDI events. PREREQUISITE You have set up an independent track loop and the Key Editor is open. The part ends after the end of the independent track loop. PROCEDURE ● Select MIDI > Repeat Loop.
MIDI Functions Fixing MIDI Note Lengths Fixing MIDI Note Lengths You can set the length of selected MIDI notes to the Length Quantize value. PREREQUISITE A MIDI part with some note events is open in the Key Editor. PROCEDURE 1. In the Key Editor toolbar, open the Length Quantize pop-up menu and select the desired note length. 2. Select the note events that you want to fix. 3. Select MIDI > Functions > Fixed Lengths. RESULT The selected note events are set to the specified Length Quantize value.
MIDI Functions Deleting Overlaps 2. Select MIDI > Functions > Pedals to Note Length. RESULT The selected notes are lengthened to match the sustain pedal off position, and the sustain controller on/off events are removed. Deleting Overlaps You can delete overlaps of notes that have the same or different pitches. This is useful, if your MIDI instruments cannot handle overlapping events. PROCEDURE 1. Select the note events. 2. Do one of the following: ● Select MIDI > Functions > Delete Overlaps (mono).
MIDI Functions Deleting Double Notes Compress/Expand Uses the Ratio setting (0 to 300 %) to compress or expand the dynamic range of MIDI notes. A factor higher than 1 (over 100 %) expands the differences between velocity values, while using a factor lower than 1 (under 100 %) compresses them. ● To compress the dynamic range, use ratio values below 100 %. After compression, you can add a velocity amount to maintain the average velocity level. ● To expand the dynamic range, use ratio values above 100 %.
MIDI Functions Restricting Polyphonic Voices Restricting Polyphonic Voices You can restrict polyphonic voices in selected MIDI notes or parts. This is useful when you have an instrument with limited polyphony and want to make sure all notes are played. PROCEDURE 1. Select the MIDI notes or parts that contain the voices. 2. Select MIDI > Functions > Restrict Polyphony. 3. Specify how many voices you want to use. 4. Click OK.
MIDI Functions Reversing the Playback Order of MIDI Events RELATED LINKS MIDI Controller Automation on page 620 Creating a Tempo Track from Tapping (Cubase Pro only) on page 695 Reversing the Playback Order of MIDI Events You can invert the order of the selected events or of all events in a selected parts rhythmically. This causes the MIDI to play backwards. However, this is different from reversing an audio recording. The individual MIDI notes still play as usual, but the playback order changes.
MIDI Functions Creating a Tempo Track from Tapping (Cubase Pro only) RELATED LINKS Tempo Track Editor on page 889 696
MIDI Editors There are several ways to edit MIDI in Cubase. You can use the tools and functions in the Project window for large-scale editing or the functions on the MIDI menu to process MIDI parts in various ways. To manually edit your MIDI data on a graphical interface, you can use the MIDI editors. ● The Key Editor presents notes graphically in a piano roll-style grid. The Key Editor also allows for detailed editing of non-note events such as MIDI controllers.
MIDI Editors Common MIDI Editor Functions Zooming in MIDI Editors The MIDI editors provide several zooming options: ● The zoom sliders. ● The Zoom tool. ● The Zoom submenu in the Edit menu. When you use the Zoom tool for zooming, you can determine if you want to zoom horizontal only or horizontal and vertical at a time. ● To activate/deactivate the corresponding option, activate/deactivate Zoom Tool Standard Mode: Horizontal Zooming Only in the Preferences dialog (Editing—Tools page).
MIDI Editors Common MIDI Editor Functions Velocity The note events get different colors depending on their velocity values. Pitch The note events get different colors depending on their pitch. Channel The note events get different colors depending on their MIDI channel value. Part The note events get the same color as their corresponding part in the Project window. Use this option if you are working with 2 or more tracks in an editor, to see which note events belong to which track.
MIDI Editors Common MIDI Editor Functions Selecting Note Events Using the Select Submenu The Select submenu offers you several options to select note events. To open the Select submenu, select Edit > Select. All Selects all note events in the edited part. None Deselects all note events. Invert Inverts the selection. All selected note events are deselected and all notes that were not selected are selected instead.
MIDI Editors Common MIDI Editor Functions ● To unmute a note event, click it or enclose it with the Mute tool. You can also select a note event and select Edit > Unmute. Muted notes are dimmed in the note display. Toggle Selections ● To toggle selected elements within a selection rectangle, press Ctrl/Cmd and enclose the same elements within a new selection rectangle. Once you release the mouse button, the previous selection is deselected and vice versa.
MIDI Editors Common MIDI Editor Functions You can also press Alt and drag the right edge of the note events to the right to create copies of the note events. Finding Exact Positions with Snap The Snap function restricts horizontal movement and positioning to certain positions. This helps you find exact positions in the note display when editing note events in a MIDI editor. Affected operations include moving, duplicating, drawing, sizing, etc. ● To activate/deactivate snap, click Snap .
MIDI Editors Common MIDI Editor Functions When you select a part from the list, it is automatically active and centered in the note display. ● To zoom in on an active part, select Edit > Zoom > Zoom to Event. ● To display defined borders for the active part, activate Show Part Borders. If this option is activated, all parts, except the active part, are grayed out. ● To restrict editing operations to the active part, activate Edit Active Part Only.
MIDI Editors Key Editor Key Editor The Key Editor is the default MIDI editor. It displays notes graphically in a piano roll-style grid. The Key Editor allows for detailed editing of notes and non-note events, such as MIDI controllers. You can open the Key Editor in a separate window or in the lower zone of the Project window. Opening the Key Editor in the lower zone of the Project window is useful if you want to access the Key Editor functions from within a fixed zone of the Project window.
MIDI Editors Key Editor The Key Editor is divided into several sections: 1 Toolbar Contains tools and settings. 2 Status line Informs about the mouse time position, the mouse note position, and the current chord. 3 Info line Displays note event information about a selected MIDI note. 4 Ruler Displays the timeline. 5 Inspector Contains tools and functions for working with MIDI data. 6 Note display Contains a grid in which MIDI notes are displayed as boxes.
MIDI Editors Key Editor Static Buttons Solo Editor Solos the editor during playback if the editor has the focus. Record in Editor Enables the recording of MIDI data in the editor if the editor has the focus. NOTE This only works if MIDI Record Mode is set to Merge or Replace. Left Divider Left Divider Allows you to use the left divider. Tools that are placed to the left of the divider are always shown.
MIDI Editors Key Editor Erase Allows you to delete events. Trim Allows you to trim events. Split Allows you to split events. Mute Allows you to mute events. Glue Allows you to glue together events of the same pitch. Zoom Allows you to zoom in/out. Hold Alt and click to zoom out. Line Allows you to create a series of contiguous events. Time Warp (Cubase Pro only) Allows you to drag a musical position to a certain position in time.
MIDI Editors Key Editor NOTE If you activate Independent Track Loop, the Link Project and Lower Zone Editor Cursors function is automatically deactivated in the lower zone editor. Show Note Expression Data Show Note Expression Data Shows note expression data. Multiple Part Controllers Show Part Borders Shows/Hides part borders for the active MIDI part within the left and right locators. Edit Active Part Only Restricts editing operations to the active part.
MIDI Editors Key Editor Moves the selected event to the right. Trim End Left Decreases the length of the selected event by moving its end to the left. Trim End Right Increases the length of the selected event by moving its end to the right. Transpose Palette Move Up Transposes the selected event up by a half note. Move Down Transposes the selected event down by a half note. Move Up More Transposes the selected event up by an octave. Move Down More Transposes the selected event down by an octave.
MIDI Editors Key Editor ● Grid + Events + Cursor snaps events to the quantize grid that is selected in the Quantize Presets pop-up menu, to the start or end of other events or to the cursor position. Grid Type Allows you to select one of the following grid types: ● Use Quantize activates a grid where events snap to the value that is selected in the Quantize Preset pop-up menu. ● Adapt to Zoom activates a grid where events snap to the zoom level.
MIDI Editors Key Editor Record Pitch Includes the pitch when you insert notes. Record NoteOn Velocity Includes the NoteOn velocity when you insert notes. Record NoteOff Velocity Includes the NoteOff velocity when you insert notes. Event Colors Event Colors Allows you to select event colors. Edit VST Instrument Edit VST Instrument Opens the VST Instrument that the track is routed to. Right Divider Right Divider Allows you to use the right divider.
MIDI Editors Key Editor Status Line The status line shows information about the mouse time position, the mouse note position, and the current chord. To show or hide the status line, click Set up Window Layout on the toolbar, and activate or deactivate Status Line. The on/off status of the status line in the Key Editor window and in the lower zone editor are independent of each other. Mouse Time Position Displays the exact time position of the mouse pointer, depending on the selected ruler display format.
MIDI Editors Key Editor Key Editor Inspector In a MIDI editor, the inspector is located left of the note display. The inspector contains tools and functions for working with MIDI data. Expression Map (Cubase Pro only) Allows you to load an expression map. Expression maps are useful for working with articulations. Note Expression (Cubase Pro only) Contains functions and settings related to Note Expression. Chord Editing Allows you to enter chords instead of single notes.
MIDI Editors Key Editor RELATED LINKS Expression Maps (Cubase Pro only) on page 785 Setting up the Note Expression Inspector Section on page 799 Quantize Panel on page 269 Transpose Functions on page 298 Opening the Editor Inspector on page 55 Note Display The note display is the main area in the Key Editor. It contains a grid in which note events are shown as boxes. The width of a box corresponds to the note length.
MIDI Editors Key Editor Operations Events other than velocity values are shown as blocks. The block corresponds to the event values. The beginning of an event is marked by a curve point. NOTE Unlike note events, controller events have no length. The value of a controller event in the display is valid until the beginning of the next controller event. Key Editor Operations This section describes the principal editing operations within the Key Editor.
MIDI Editors Key Editor Operations ● To draw a note, click in the note display. The note event has the length that is set on the Length Quantize pop-up menu. ● To draw longer note events, click and drag in the note display. The length of the note event is a multiple of the Length Quantize value. If Length Quantize is set to Quantize Link, the note value is determined by the quantize grid. The Snap function is taken into account.
MIDI Editors Key Editor Operations The Line Tool Modes The Line tool allows you to create a series of contiguous note events along different line shapes. You can also edit multiple controller events simultaneously. To select a different line mode, click Line and select a mode from the menu. The following line modes are available: Line If this option is activated, you can click and drag to insert note events in the note display along a straight line in any angle.
MIDI Editors Key Editor Operations RELATED LINKS Transpose Setup on page 685 Resizing Note Events Do one of the following: ● To resize the note event, position the Object Selection tool at the start or the end of a note event and drag the mouse cursor to the left or right.
MIDI Editors Key Editor Operations line, allowing you to set the same start or end time for all edited notes. You can change the Trim tool key commands in the Preferences dialog (Editing—Tool Modifiers page). Splitting Note Events ● To split the note at the position that you point, click on a note with Split . If several notes are selected, they are all split at the same position. The snap setting is taken into account.
MIDI Editors Key Editor Operations Chord Editing Section The Chord Editing section in the Inspector allows you to insert and edit chords, and change voicings. Chord Type Shows the chord type of the selected chords. Add to Chord Track Adds the chord indicated in the Chord Type field to the chord track. The chord event is inserted at the position on the chord track that corresponds to the position of the MIDI notes. Any existing chord events at this position are overwritten.
MIDI Editors Key Editor Operations Drop Notes - Move the third highest note an octave lower Moves the third highest note of a chord down by one octave. Drop Notes - Move the second and fourth highest notes an octave lower Moves the second and fourth highest notes of a chord down by one octave. Create Chord Symbols Performs a chord analysis of the selected notes. If nothing is selected, the whole MIDI part is analyzed.
MIDI Editors Key Editor Operations ● In the note event if the zoom factor is high enough. ● When dragging a note event. Expression Map Handling (Cubase Pro only) When an expression map is assigned to a MIDI track, the musical articulations that are defined for that map are displayed in the following locations of the Key Editor: ● On the info line in the Articulations field. ● On the controller lane. ● In the note event if the vertical zoom factor is high enough.
MIDI Editors Key Editor Operations 2. Use the note buttons to the right to determine which properties are included when you insert the note events. For example, you can include the note-on velocity and/or note-off velocity of the played notes. You can also deactivate the pitch property, in which case all notes get a pitch C3, no matter what you play. 3. Click anywhere in the note display to set the start position of the first note event or chord.
MIDI Editors Key Editor Operations The controller display with lanes. ● To add a controller lane, click Create Controller Lane or open the Controller Selection and Functions menu and select Create Controller Lane. ● To remove a controller lane, open the Controller Selection and Functions pop-up menu and select Remove this Lane. This hides the lane from view. It does not affect the events in any way. If you remove all lanes, the controller display is hidden.
MIDI Editors Key Editor Operations Setting up Available Continuous Controllers In the MIDI Controller Setup dialog, you can specify which continuous controllers are available for selection. NOTE The MIDI Controller Setup dialog can be opened from different areas in the program. The settings are global, that is, the setup you choose here affects all areas of the program where MIDI controllers can be selected. PROCEDURE 1. Select Controller Selection and Functions > Setup. 2.
MIDI Editors Key Editor Operations ● To create a new event for any other event type, click with the Draw tool or the Line tool in the controller display. NOTE In the Key Editor, you can also add modulation controller events (CC1) by copying note events from the event display and pasting them on the controller lane. Editing Events in the Controller Display All controller values can be edited with the Draw tool or the Line tool.
MIDI Editors Key Editor Operations RELATED LINKS Controller Event Editor on page 731 Editing Events in the Controller Display Using the Line Tool You can draw and edit events in the controller display with the Line tool. Line Mode In Line mode, you can draw events in a straight line. ● To draw a straight line in the controller display, click where you want the ramp to start and drag the cursor to where you want the ramp to end.
MIDI Editors Key Editor Operations NOTE If Length Quantize is set to Quantize Link and you enter data in Sine, Triangle or Square mode, the density of the events depends on the zoom factor. You can use modifier keys to determine the shape of the curve. ● To change the phase of the beginning of the curve, press Ctrl/Cmd. ● To change the position of the whole curve, press Alt-Ctrl/Cmd.
MIDI Editors Key Editor Operations ● To step through the available dynamics symbols, use the mouse wheel or the One down and One up key commands. If several events are selected, they all change in increments, that is, relative to the original values. ● To modify the settings for the dynamics symbols, open the Controller Selection and Functions pop-up menu and select Dynamics Mapping Setup. Moving and copying dynamics events is identical to working with other events on the controller lane.
MIDI Editors Key Editor Operations 1 The controller curve before the part starts. This curve depends on the existing controller data and on the selected merge mode. 2 Controller curve entered on the controller lane. 3 Resulting controller curve if controller automation was also recorded on a track. These values depend on the selected automation merge mode. On the controller lane, you can also see the controller curve that is applied before the part starts.
MIDI Editors Key Editor Operations Controller Event Editor The controller event editor allows you to perform additional scaling operations for selection ranges on existing controller curves. ● To open the controller event editor, activate the Object Selection tool and drag a selection rectangle on the controller lane.
MIDI Editors Key Editor Operations Editing Selection Ranges The controller lane editor allows you to perform additional scaling operations for selection ranges on existing controller curves. ● To open the controller lane editor, use the Object Selection tool to create a selection rectangle on the controller lane, encompassing the controller events that you want to edit. For velocity lanes, press Alt to get the Object Selection tool.
MIDI Editors Basic Score Editor (Cubase Artist only) You can also delete notes by deleting their velocity bars in the controller display. If there is more than one note at the same position, there may still only be one velocity bar visible. Make sure that you delete only the desired notes! Selecting Controllers within the Note Range A note range lasts until the start of the next note or the end of the part. Selected controllers for notes are moved when the corresponding notes are moved.
MIDI Editors Basic Score Editor (Cubase Artist only) The Score Editor is divided into several sections: 1 Toolbar Contains tools and settings. 2 Status line Informs about the mouse time position, the mouse note position, and the current chord. 3 Info line Displays note event information about a selected MIDI note. 4 Extended toolbar Contains note value buttons and enharmonic shift buttons.
MIDI Editors Basic Score Editor (Cubase Artist only) Solos the editor during playback if the editor has the focus. Record in Editor Enables the recording of MIDI data in the editor if the editor has the focus. NOTE This only works if MIDI Record Mode is set to Merge or Replace. Tool Buttons Object Selection Allows you to select events. Erase Allows you to delete events. Insert Note Allows you to insert notes. Split Allows you to split events. Glue Allows you to glue together events of the same pitch.
MIDI Editors Basic Score Editor (Cubase Artist only) ● Grid snaps events to the grid that is selected in the Quantize Presets popup menu. ● Grid Relative grid. keeps the relative positions when snapping events to the Quantize Iterative Quantize On/Off Activates/Deactivates iterative quantize. Quantize Presets Allows you to select a quantize or a groove preset. Apply Quantize Applies the quantize settings. Open Quantize Panel Opens the Quantize Panel.
MIDI Editors Basic Score Editor (Cubase Artist only) Includes the NoteOn velocity when you insert notes. Record NoteOff Velocity Includes the NoteOff velocity when you insert notes. Right Divider Right Divider Allows you to use the right divider. Tools that are placed to the right of the divider are always shown. Window Zone Controls Open in Separate Window This button is available in the lower zone editor. It opens the editor in a separate window.
MIDI Editors Basic Score Editor (Cubase Artist only) Current Chord Display When the project cursor is positioned over notes that form a chord, this chord is displayed here. Info Line The info line shows values and properties of the selected MIDI notes. If several notes are selected, the values for the first note are displayed in color. To show or hide the info line, click Set up Window Layout on the toolbar, and activate or deactivate Info Line.
MIDI Editors Score Editor Operations (Cubase Artist only) Score Display The main area of the Score Editor window shows the notes in the edited parts on one or several staves. Parts on different tracks are shown on different staves. ● If you are editing one or several parts on the same track, as much of them as possible is shown on several staves, comparable with a score on paper. ● If you are editing parts on several tracks, they are put on a grand staff.
MIDI Editors Score Editor Operations (Cubase Artist only) NOTE The time signature follows the time signatures that are set in the Tempo Track editor. These settings are common to all tracks/staves in the score. Staff Mode The Staff Mode determines how the staff is shown. ● In Single mode, all notes in the part are shown in the same staff. ● In Split mode, the part is split on the screen into a bass and treble clef, as in a piano score. The Split Point value determines where you want the split to occur.
MIDI Editors Score Editor Operations (Cubase Artist only) Rests This value is used as a recommendation. Cubase does not display rests smaller than this value, except where necessary. In effect, this setting also determines how the length of notes is displayed. Set this value according to the smallest note value (length) that you want to be displayed for a single note, positioned on a beat. Auto Quantize Allows you to make your score look as legible as possible.
MIDI Editors Score Editor Operations (Cubase Artist only) Clean Lengths If this option is activated, notes that are considered to be chords are shown with identical lengths. Longer notes are displayed shorter than they are. Notes with very short overlaps are also cut off. This is similar to the No Overlap option, but with a more subtle effect. No Overlap If this option is activated, one note is never shown as overlapping another, lengthwise.
MIDI Editors Score Editor Operations (Cubase Artist only) 2. ● Click the note symbols on the extended toolbar. ● Select an option from the Length Quantize pop-up menu on the toolbar. Select the Insert Note tool. If you selected the note value via the extended toolbar buttons, the Insert Note tool is automatically selected. 3. Open the Quantize Presets pop-up menu on the toolbar and select a quantize value. 4. Move the mouse over the staff to find the correct position.
MIDI Editors Score Editor Operations (Cubase Artist only) Changing the Note Length The displayed note length is not necessarily the actual note length. It also depends on the note values and rest values for Display Quantize in the Staff Settings dialog. This is important to remember when you change the length of a note. You can change the length of a note in the following ways: ● Select the notes that you want to change and Ctrl/Cmd-click on one of the note icons on the extended toolbar.
MIDI Editors Score Editor Operations (Cubase Artist only) Working with Text You can use the Text tool to add comments, articulation, or instrumentation advice and other text strings anywhere in the score display. Adding Text PROCEDURE 1. On the toolbar, select the Text tool. 2. Click anywhere in the score. A blinking cursor indicates that you can enter text. 3. Enter the text and press Return. Editing Text ● To edit existing text, double-click it with the Object Selection tool.
MIDI Editors Drum Editor Font Allows you to specify the font for the text. Which fonts are available on the pop-up menu depends on the fonts that you have installed on your computer. IMPORTANT Do not use the Steinberg fonts. These are special fonts used by the program, for example, for score symbols, and not suited for common text. Size Sets the size of the text. Frame Allows you to enclose the text in a rectangular (box) or oval frame.
MIDI Editors Drum Editor If the MIDI track has a drum map assigned and Editor Content Follows Event Selection and Use Drum Editor when Drum Map is assigned are activated in the Preferences dialog (Editors page), you can do the following to open a MIDI part in the Drum Editor: ● Double-click a MIDI part in the Project window. ● Select a MIDI part in the Project window and press Return or Ctrl/Cmd-E. ● Select a MIDI part in the Project window and select MIDI > Open Drum Editor.
MIDI Editors Drum Editor The Drum Editor is divided into several sections: 1 Toolbar Contains tools and settings. 2 Status line Informs about the mouse time position and the mouse note position. 3 Info line Displays information about the selected event. 4 Inspector Contains tools and functions for working with MIDI data. 5 Drum sound list Lists all drum sounds. 6 Drum map Lets you select the drum map for the edited track or a list of drum sound names. 7 Ruler Displays the time line.
MIDI Editors Drum Editor NOTE You can activate/deactivate the status line, the info line, and the controller lanes by clicking Set up Window Layout on the toolbar and activating/deactivating the corresponding options. Toolbar The toolbar contains tools and various settings for the Drum Editor. ● To show or hide the toolbar elements, right-click the toolbar and activate or deactivate the elements. Static Buttons Solo Instrument (Requires Drum Map) Solos the instrument during playback.
MIDI Editors Drum Editor NOTE You cannot activate Link Project and Lower Zone Editor Cursors if Independent Track Loop is active. Auto-Scroll Keeps the project cursor visible during playback. The Switch Auto-Scroll Settings pop-up menu allows you to activate Page Scroll or Stationary Cursor and to activate Suspend Auto-Scroll when Editing. Switch Auto-Scroll Settings Allows you to specify the auto-scroll settings. Tool Buttons Object Selection Allows you to select events.
MIDI Editors Drum Editor Auto Select Controllers Auto Select Controllers Automatically selects controller data of the selected MIDI notes. Independent Track Loop Independent Track Loop Activates/Deactivates the independent track loop. NOTE If you activate Independent Track Loop, the Link Project and Lower Zone Editor Cursors function is automatically deactivated in the lower zone editor.
MIDI Editors Drum Editor Trim Start Right Decreases the length of the selected event by moving its start to the right. Move Left Moves the selected event to the left. Move Right Moves the selected event to the right. Trim End Left Decreases the length of the selected event by moving its end to the left. Trim End Right Increases the length of the selected event by moving its end to the right. Transpose Palette Move Up Transposes the selected event up by a half note.
MIDI Editors Drum Editor ● Shuffle changes the order of events if you drag one event to the left or right of other events. ● Magnetic Cursor ● Grid + Cursor snaps events to the quantize grid that is selected in the Quantize Presets pop-up menu or to the cursor position. ● Events + Cursor the cursor position. ● Grid + Events + Cursor snaps events to the quantize grid that is selected in the Quantize Presets pop-up menu, to the start or end of other events or to the cursor position.
MIDI Editors Drum Editor Moves all note events to the right of the step input position to the right to make room for the inserted event when you insert notes. NOTE This only works if Step Input is activated. Record Pitch Includes the pitch when you insert notes. Record NoteOn Velocity Includes the NoteOn velocity when you insert notes. Record NoteOff Velocity Includes the NoteOff velocity when you insert notes. Event Colors Event Colors Allows you to select event colors.
MIDI Editors Drum Editor Set up Toolbar Opens a pop-up menu where you can set up which toolbar elements are visible. RELATED LINKS Zooming in MIDI Editors on page 698 Status Line The status line is displayed below the toolbar. It displays important mouse information. To show or hide the status line, click Set up Window Layout on the toolbar, and activate or deactivate Status Line. The on/off status of the status line in the Drum Editor window and in the lower zone editor are independent of each other.
MIDI Editors Drum Editor Drum Editor Inspector The Inspector is located to the left of the note display. The inspector contains tools and functions for working with MIDI data. Expression Map Allows you to load an expression map. Expression maps are useful for working with articulations. Quantize Allows you to access the main quantize parameters. These are identical with the functions on the Quantize Panel. Length Contains length-related options, similar to the Functions submenu of the MIDI menu.
MIDI Editors Drum Editor Note Display The note display of the Drum Editor contains a grid in which note events are shown. The notes are displayed as diamond symbols. If you activate Show Note Length On/Off on the toolbar, notes are displayed as boxes and show the note length. The vertical position of the notes corresponds to the drum sound list to the left, while the horizontal position corresponds to the note’s position in time.
MIDI Editors Drum Editor Events other than velocity values are shown as blocks. The block corresponds to the event values. The beginning of an event is marked by a curve point. When you select a line in the drum sound list, only the velocity controller events that belong to the note events on this line are displayed in the controller display. If you select more than one line in the drum sound list, the controller lane shows all velocity controller events for all notes on the selected lines.
MIDI Editors Drum Editor NOTE The number of columns in the list depends on whether a drum map is selected for the track or not. Pitch Note number of the drum sound. Instrument Name of the drum sound. Snap This is used when entering and editing notes. Mute Allows you to mute drum sounds. I-Note Input note for the drum sound. When you play this note, it is mapped to the corresponding drum sound and automatically transposed according to the Pitch setting for the sound.
MIDI Editors Drum Editor Operations Reverse Drum Sound List Reverses the order of the sounds displayed in the drum sound list. Drum Map and Names Menus Below the drum sound list are pop-up menus that are used for selecting a drum map for the edited track or, if no drum map is selected, a list of drum sound names. RELATED LINKS Drum Maps on page 763 Drum Editor Operations This section describes the general editing operations within the Drum Editor.
MIDI Editors Drum Editor Operations NOTE If you want to snap positions according to the Quantize Presets setting on the toolbar, activate Use Quantize. PROCEDURE ● Perform one of the following actions: ● On the toolbar, select the Object Selection tool, double-click in the event display and drag to the right. ● On the toolbar, select the Drumstick tool, click in the event display and drag to the right. RESULT The note events are inserted.
MIDI Editors Drum Editor Operations RESULT The note length is changed. Snap is taken into account. Deleting Note Events PROCEDURE ● Perform one of the following actions: ● Select the Erase tool and click the event. ● Select the Object Selection tool and double-click the event. ● Select the Drumstick tool and click the event. RESULT The note event is deleted. Deleting Multiple Note Events You can delete multiple note events of the same pitch with the Object Selection tool or the Drumstick tool.
MIDI Editors Drum Maps Transpose is also affected by the global transpose setting. ● To transpose note events via the Transpose Setup dialog, select the note events and select MIDI > Transpose Setup. ● To transpose note events in steps of one octave, press Shift and use the Up Arrow/Down Arrow keys. NOTE ● When you move selected note events to a different position, any selected controllers for these note events move accordingly. ● You can also adjust the position of note events by quantizing.
MIDI Editors Drum Maps When you want to try your drum pattern on another instrument, you simply switch to the corresponding drum map, and your snare drum sound remains a snare drum sound. If you want to have the same drum maps included in your projects, you can load these into the template. NOTE Drum maps are saved with the project files. If you have created or modified a drum map, use the Save function to save it as a separate XML file to make it available for loading into other projects.
MIDI Editors Drum Maps NOTE If you audition a sound in the Drum Map Setup dialog and the sound is set to MIDI output Default, the output that is selected on the Output pop-up menu in the lower left corner is used. When auditioning a default output sound in the Drum Editor, the MIDI output selected for the track is used. The Functions pop-up menu contains the following options: New Map Adds a new drum map to the project. The drum sounds are named “Sound 1, Sound 2, etc.
MIDI Editors Drum Maps Importing Drum Maps from Virtual Instruments You can import your drum map settings to an instrument track that is routed to Groove Agent SE. PREREQUISITE To import your drum map settings to an instrument track, the track has to be routed to Groove Agent SE or another drum instrument that supports drum maps. PROCEDURE 1. Load a drum kit in Groove Agent SE. 2. In the Inspector for the track, open the Drum Maps pop-up menu and select Create Drum Map from Instrument.
MIDI Editors Drum Maps NOTE Initially, the Map pop-up menu only contains GM Map. I-Notes, O-Notes and Pitches Going through the following theory helps you make the most out of the drum map concept – especially if you want to create your own drum maps. A drum map is a kind of filter that transforms notes according to the settings in the map.
MIDI Editors List Editor Setting Pitches of Notes According to their O-Note Settings You can set the pitch of notes according to their O-note settings. This is useful if you want to convert a track to a regular MIDI track with no drum map and still have the notes play back the correct drum sound. It is a typical use case to export your MIDI recording as a standard MIDI file. If you first perform an O-note conversion, you make sure that your drum tracks play back as intended when they are exported.
MIDI Editors List Editor 5 Ruler 6 Event display 7 Value display NOTE The filters, the status line, and the value display can be activated/deactivated by clicking Set up Window Layout on the toolbar and activating/deactivating the corresponding options. Toolbar The toolbar contains tools and various settings for the List Editor. ● To show or hide the toolbar elements, right-click the toolbar and activate or deactivate the elements.
MIDI Editors List Editor Zoom Allows you to zoom in/out. Hold Alt and click to zoom out. Mute Allows you to mute events. Trim Allows you to trim events. Acoustic Feedback Acoustic Feedback Automatically plays back events when you move or transpose them, or when you create them by drawing. Independent Track Loop Independent Track Loop Activates/Deactivates the independent track loop.
MIDI Editors List Editor Nudge Palette Trim Start Left Increases the length of the selected event by moving its start to the left. Trim Start Right Decreases the length of the selected event by moving its start to the right. Move Left Moves the selected event to the left. Move Right Moves the selected event to the right. Trim End Left Decreases the length of the selected event by moving its end to the left. Trim End Right Increases the length of the selected event by moving its end to the right.
MIDI Editors List Editor Quantize Iterative Quantize On/Off Activates/Deactivates iterative quantize. Quantize Presets Allows you to select a quantize or a groove preset. Apply Quantize Applies the quantize settings. Open Quantize Panel Opens the Quantize Panel. Length Quantize Length Quantize Allows you to set a value for quantizing event lengths. Step/MIDI Input Step Input Activates/Deactivates MIDI step input.
MIDI Editors List Editor Event Colors Event Colors Allows you to select event colors. Right Divider Right Divider Allows you to use the right divider. Tools that are placed to the right of the divider are always shown. Edit VST Instrument Edit VST Instrument Opens the VST Instrument that the track is routed to. Window Zone Controls Show/Hide Right Zone Allows you to show/hide the right zone. Set up Window Layout Allows you to set up the window layout.
MIDI Editors List Editor Current Chord Display When the project cursor is positioned over notes that form a chord, this chord is displayed here. Track Loop Start/End If Independent Track Loop is activated on the toolbar, its start/end position are displayed. RELATED LINKS Toolbar on page 749 Filters Bar The filters bar allows you to hide events from view, based on their type and other properties. To show or hide the status line, click Set up Window Layout on the toolbar, and activate or deactivate Filters.
MIDI Editors List Editor Event List The Event List lists all events in the selected MIDI parts, in the order in which they are played back from top to bottom. The list allows you to perform detailed numerical editing of the event properties. The following options are available: > An arrow in this column indicates the event that starts closest before the project cursor position. You can use this column for auditioning when you are editing in the list.
MIDI Editors List Editor Event Display The Event Display displays events graphically. The vertical position of an event in the display corresponds to its entry in the list, that is, to the playback order. The horizontal position corresponds to the actual event position in the project. In the event display, you can add new parts or events, and drag events to another position.
MIDI Editors List Editor Operations List Editor Operations This section describes the principal editing operations within the List Editor. Drawing Events The Draw tool allows you to insert single events in the event display. When you move the cursor inside the event display, its position is indicated on the status line. The snap function is taken into account. ● To change the event type that you want to draw, select it from the Insert Event Type popup menu.
MIDI Editors List Editor Operations The values of the other selected events are also changed. Any initial value differences between the events are maintained. ● To set the values of all selected events to the same value, press Ctrl/Cmd and edit the value for one event. ● For SysEx events, you can only edit the Start position in the list. However, when you click the Comment column, the MIDI SysEx Editor opens, in which you can perform detailed editing of system exclusive events.
MIDI Editors List Editor Operations RELATED LINKS Using MIDI devices on page 674 Bulk Dumps In any programmable device, the settings are saved as numbers in computer memory. If you change these numbers, you will change the settings. Normally, MIDI devices allow you to dump (transmit) all or some settings in the device’s memory in the form of MIDI SysEx messages.
MIDI Editors List Editor Operations ● If you want the sequencer to dump the pertinent sounds to your instrument whenever you load a project, put the SysEx data in a silent count-in before the project itself starts. ● If the dump is very short, for example, a single sound, you can put the dump in the middle of the project to quickly re-program a device. However, you can achieve the same effect by using Program Change. This is preferable, since less MIDI data is sent and recorded.
MIDI Editors List Editor Operations The display shows the entire message on one or several lines. SysEx messages always begin with F0 and end with F7 and a number of arbitrary bytes in between. If the message contains more bytes, so that they do not entirely fit on one line, it continues on the next line. The Address indication to the left helps you find out on which position in the message a certain value is located. You can edit all values except for the first (F0) and the last ones (F7).
MIDI Editors In-Place Editor In-Place Editor The In-Place Editor allows you to edit MIDI notes and controllers directly in the Project window, for quick and efficient editing in context with other tracks. The In-Place Editor expands the MIDI track to show a miniature Key Editor. When you select a MIDI note, the Project window info line shows the same information about the note as the info line in the Key Editor. You can perform the same editing here as in the Key Editor.
MIDI Editors In-Place Editor Lists all parts that were selected when you opened the editor, and allows you to activate a part. Indicate Transpositions Indicate Transpositions Allows you to display the transposed pitches of MIDI notes. Auto Select Controllers Auto Select Controllers Automatically selects controller data of the selected MIDI notes. Insert Velocity Insert Velocity Allows you to specify a velocity value for new notes.
MIDI Editors In-Place Editor Working with the In-Place Editor ● To zoom or scroll the In-Place Editor, point at the left part of the piano keyboard display so that the pointer changes to a hand. Then drag to the right or left to zoom in or out vertically, and drag up or down to scroll the editor. ● To add or remove controller lanes, right-click below the controller name field and select an option from the context menu.
Expression Maps (Cubase Pro only) Expression maps allow you to set up a map for all your articulations. This allows you to audition to a project including articulations. You can select expression maps in the Inspector for MIDI or instrument tracks, and specify the sound mapping and characteristics for all your articulations. If you select an expression map for a MIDI or instrument track, the articulations defined in the map are automatically applied during playback.
Expression Maps (Cubase Pro only) Articulations Articulations Musical articulations define how specific notes are sung or performed on a given instrument. They can also define the relative volume of notes or the changes in pitch. The following articulation types are available: ● Directions Directions such as pizzicato are valid for all notes from their insert position on, until the insert position of the next direction. They are applied to a continuous range of notes, or even an entire piece of music.
Expression Maps (Cubase Pro only) Creating and Editing Expression Maps 3 Output Mapping Shows the output mapping that corresponds to the sound slot that is selected in the Sound Slots section. 4 Articulations Allows you to organize articulations in groups. 5 Remote Settings Allows you to set up remote keys for triggering articulations via a MIDI input device. Here, you can also specify if you want to use key switches or program change messages to play a certain sound slot.
Expression Maps (Cubase Pro only) Creating and Editing Expression Maps 4. In the Expression Maps section, click + to create a new map. 5. Enter a name for the expression map. Adding Sound Slots You must create sound slots for each articulation that you want to add. PREREQUISITE The Expression Map Setup window is open and an expression map is selected in the Expression Maps section. PROCEDURE 1. 2.
Expression Maps (Cubase Pro only) Creating and Editing Expression Maps 6. Optional: Click the Col column to assign a color to the sound slot. When working in the MIDI editors, you can color your events according to the color of the sound slots. RESULT The sound slots are added and the articulations are available. You can create as many sound slots as you need.
Expression Maps (Cubase Pro only) Creating and Editing Expression Maps Output Mapping The Output Mapping section allows you to map sound slots to specific sound characters of an instrument. The available sounds depend on the instrument that is selected for the MIDI or instrument track. NOTE Some virtual instruments require multiple key switches or combinations of key switches and controllers to select a particular articulation. In this case, click + to add multiple output events to a single sound slot.
Expression Maps (Cubase Pro only) Creating and Editing Expression Maps Remote Settings The remote settings allow you to specify key switches or program change messages to trigger specific sound slots. NOTE If you do not plan to record or trigger articulations via a MIDI input device, you do not need to specify remote keys. Active remote keys are indicated in the Inspector for the track. Pop-up menu Allows you to select, if you want to use Key Switches or Progam Change Messages to switch sound slots.
Expression Maps (Cubase Pro only) Creating and Editing Expression Maps PROCEDURE 1. In the Remote Settings section, click Set Remote Keys. 2. In the Set Remote Keys dialog, use the Start Key field to specify the first key on the MIDI input device that you want to trigger a sound slot. 3. In the Key Mapping pop-up menu, specify with which keys on your device you want to trigger the sound slots. 4. Click OK.
Expression Maps (Cubase Pro only) Creating and Editing Expression Maps 6. Make the desired settings, enter a name for the map, and click Save. RESULT The expression map is saved and you can load it from the Select Expression Map for the track pop-up menu on the Expression Map section of the Inspector. RELATED LINKS Creating Expression Maps on page 787 Track Presets on page 179 Saving Expression Maps If you have created and set up your expression map, you must save it. PROCEDURE 1.
Expression Maps (Cubase Pro only) Inserting Articulations 4. In the file dialog, locate and select the expression map that you want to load, and click Open. The expression map is now available in the Expression Maps section. 5. Repeat the steps for all the maps that you want to make available, and close the dialog. RESULT All loaded maps are available on the Expression Map pop-up menu in the Inspector.
Expression Maps (Cubase Pro only) Inserting Articulations Inserting Articulations in the Score Editor You can insert articulation symbols in the Score Editor. PROCEDURE 1. Select the MIDI part. 2. Select Scores > Open Score Editor. 3. In the Symbols Inspector, open the Expression Map section. 4. Activate the articulation symbol, and click at the desired position in the note display. IMPORTANT When you insert articulation symbols, make sure that they do not conflict with other articulations.
Expression Maps (Cubase Pro only) Inserting Articulations IMPORTANT When you insert articulation symbols, make sure that they do not conflict with other articulations. RELATED LINKS Groups on page 789 Inserting Articulations in the List Editor You can insert articulation symbols via the comment column of the List Editor. This only works, if your MIDI part already contains some articulation symbols. PROCEDURE 1. Select a MIDI note in the event display of the List Editor. 2.
Note Expression Introduction Note Expression offers a very intuitive way of controller editing in Cubase. As an alternative to working with controller lanes in the Key Editor, controller data can be viewed and edited directly on the associated MIDI note events in the event display. With Note Expression, a note and its associated controller data are treated as a unit. When you quantize, move, copy, duplicate, or delete notes, all their associated controller information will follow.
Note Expression Introduction feel. Furthermore, VST 3 controllers allow for a value range that exceeds the MIDI range of 0 to 127, which offers a more comfortable value editing and fine-tuning. To be able to work with VST controllers, you need a VST instrument that offers this kind of controller parameters and is capable of playing back these controller messages. Included with Cubase is HALion Sonic SE, which is compatible with Note Expression.
Note Expression Setting up the Note Expression Inspector Section Overdubbing on page 803 Recording Note Expression data via MIDI input on page 804 Editing Note Expression data on page 805 Setting up the Note Expression Inspector Section To be able to work with Note Expression, you have to set up the parameters first. This is done in the Note Expression section in the Inspector of the Project window or the Key Editor. The top area of the Note Expression section shows a list of parameters.
Note Expression Setting up the Note Expression Inspector Section MIDI Learn button You can assign any control of your external MIDI controller to the selected parameter. Click the MIDI Learn button and move the fader or knob on the external device. Parameter range controls (Min/Max) If you want to use only a certain value range of the parameter, you can specify it here. Set the range by changing the minimum and maximum values or use the slider below the fields.
Note Expression Mapping controllers This controller is hidden. Filtering the list If you click on the Parameter column header, a pop-up menu opens, containing the following filter commands: Show only used Parameters Select this command to only display the parameters in the list for which data exists. Make all Parameters visible Select this command to display all available parameters in the event display.
Note Expression Recording RELATED LINKS Selecting the Event Type on page 724 MIDI Learn Another way to assign the knobs and faders of your MIDI instrument to Note Expression parameters is using the MIDI Learn function. PROCEDURE 1. Select the parameter to which you want to assign a MIDI controller. 2. Below the list, click the MIDI Learn button to the right of the MIDI assignment pop-up menu. 3.
Note Expression Recording You can use the data range controls to use only a subrange of the full parameter range. This allows for finer recording and editing. 4. Record some MIDI notes and use the mapped controls on your MIDI device to record the corresponding Note Expression data. 5. Open the Key Editor and activate the “Show Note Expression Data” button on the toolbar. The Note Expression data is shown on the notes for which it was recorded.
Note Expression Recording When you now start overdubbing, the values for all these controls are attached to the notes that are passed during overdub recording, replacing any existing controller data of the same type. 1 Reset Latch Buffer 2 Click here to activate Latch mode. RELATED LINKS Mapping controllers on page 801 Resetting the Latch buffer Whenever data is present in the Latch buffer, the “Reset Latch buffer” button becomes available.
Note Expression Editing Note Expression data Editing Note Expression data In the Key Editor, you can view and edit the Note Expression data for notes in the Note Expression event editor. This is opened by double-clicking a note in the event display. In the editor, you can add Note Expression data from scratch. All parameters that are marked as visible in the Inspector are displayed as curves in the editor.
Note Expression Editing Note Expression data The value display The value display in the lower right corner of the editor shows the current value at the (vertical) mouse pointer position. The value range differs depending on the parameter type. For MIDI controllers you can enter values from 0 to 127, for Tuning you can enter semitones or cents. Selection ranges You can select a range of controller values by clicking and dragging in the editor with the Object Selection tool.
Note Expression Editing Note Expression data ● If the number of source notes is smaller than the number of destination notes, the source note data will be pasted repeatedly into the destination notes in the order in which they appear.
Note Expression Editing Note Expression data Note Expression Event Editor The Note Expression event editor offers various modes for editing the Note Expression data. Most editing modes are activated by clicking the various smart controls, situated on the editor frame. ● To open the note expression event editor, double-click a note in the event display.
Note Expression Editing Note Expression data Editing the release phase of a note Sometimes it can be necessary to edit the release phase of a note. You can work on the tail of a note which is still sounding after the note-off message was sent, for example. These settings are made in the release section of the editor. To add a release phase, click and drag the release length handle in the lower right corner of the editor.
Note Expression Note Expression and MIDI Editing multiple notes simultaneously When you have opened the editor for several notes, any editing, such as entering Note Expression data, applying time stretch or modifying the length of the release phase, affects all the notes that are present at the time position where you perform the editing.
Note Expression Note Expression and MIDI The dialog contains the following options: Controller Activate this option if you want to use MIDI controllers when working with Note Expression. In the table below, activate the MIDI controllers you want to use and deactivate the MIDI controllers that should be disregarded in the Note Expression context. If MIDI controller data for a deactivated controller is received in Cubase, it will end up on the controller lane.
Note Expression Note Expression and MIDI 2. Make sure that the MIDI controllers to be recorded are activated in the “Note Expression MIDI Setup” dialog. 3. On the MIDI menu, open the Note Expression submenu and select “Convert to Note Expression”. The MIDI data of the types you specified in the Note Expression MIDI Setup dialog is converted from controller lane data into Note Expression data, leaving the corresponding controller lanes empty.
Note Expression HALion Sonic SE 3. Enable the “MIDI as Note Expression” button and record or enter MIDI notes with expression as needed. 4. On the MIDI menu, open the Note Expression submenu and select “Distribute Notes to MIDI Channels”. This will distribute the MIDI notes to different channels (starting at channel 1). 5. Edit Note Expression for each note independently without controller conflicts.
Chord Functions The chord functions provide you with many possibilities for working with chords. The chord functions allow you to: ● Build chord progressions by adding chord events to the chord track. ● Convert chord events to MIDI. ● Use the chord track to control audio playback (Cubase Pro only) or MIDI playback. ● Use the chord track voicing to change the pitches of your MIDI. ● Extract chord events from MIDI data to get an overview of the harmonic structure of a MIDI file.
Chord Functions Chord Events Chord Events Chord events are representations of chords that control or transpose playback on MIDI, instrument, and audio tracks (Cubase Pro only). Chord events alter the pitches of MIDI notes and VariAudio segments (Cubase Pro only) if their tracks are set up to follow the chord track. Chord events have a specific start position. Their end, however, is determined by the start of the next chord event.
Chord Functions Chord Events 3 Chord definition buttons Activate these buttons to define a root note, a chord type, a tension, and a bass note for your chord event. NOTE If you do not select a separate bass note, the setting is linked to the root note, so that no extra bass note is heard. 4 Keyboard display Shows the notes of the chord event, considering the current voicing settings. 5 Define Chord by Text Input Allows you to define a chord using the computer keyboard.
Chord Functions Chord Events NOTE If you have activated Solfège in the Note Name pop-up menu in the Preferences dialog (Event Display—Chords page), you can also enter chords in this format. You must capitalize the first letter and write “Re” instead of “re”, for example. Otherwise, the chord is not recognized. 4. Press Tab to add a new chord and define it. Chord Assistant The Chord Assistant allows you to use a chord as a starting point to get suggestions for the next chord.
Chord Functions Chord Events 1 Go to Previous Chord/Go to Next Chord Allow you to select the previous/next chord on the chord track for editing. 2 Add Chord Adds a new undefined chord event on the chord track. NOTE This works only if the last chord event on the chord track is selected. 3 Suggestions Shows suggestions for the next chord. Click a chord suggestion to select it. 4 Complexity Filter Allows you to increase the complexity and thus the number of suggestions.
Chord Functions Chord Events 8 Chord Assistant tabs Click the tabs to open one of the chord assistant modes. Chord Assistant – Proximity (Cubase Pro only) The Proximity mode of the Chord Assistant takes a set of harmonic rules into account to offer suggestions that match the origin chord. If you open the Chord Assistant for a chord event, the previous event is set as origin chord. This is shown in the bottom center of the Chord Assistant.
Chord Functions Chord Events ● 5. To display the suggestions in a graphic, click the Proximity tab. Click a suggestion to select it. RESULT The suggested chord is added as a chord event to the chord track. Repeat the steps above to create as many chord events as required by your harmonic structure. Chord Assistant – Circle of Fifths The Circle of Fifths mode of the Chord Assistant shows the chords in an interactive visualization of the circle of fifths.
Chord Functions Chord Events The roman numerals mark the chords of the current key with their scale degree. You can use these chords to create typical chord progressions or you can use the other chords for more creative results. ● To play a chord and assign it to the selected chord event, click it. The last 3 chords that you clicked are shown with a highlighted border.
Chord Functions Scale Events Changing How Chord Events Are Displayed You can change how chord events are displayed. This is useful if chord events overlap each other at low zoom levels or if you do not like the font type. PROCEDURE 1. On the chord track, activate Resolve Display Conflicts. 2. In the Preferences dialog, select Event Display > Chords, and set up the chord font. Here you can also determine the note name and naming format.
Chord Functions Voicings The keys that correspond to the scale are highlighted. Voicings Voicings determine how chord events are set up. They define the vertical spacing and order of the pitches in a chord, but also the instrumentation and genre of a musical piece. For example, a C chord can be spread over a wide range of pitches, and a pianist will choose different notes than a guitarist. The pianist may also play completely different pitches for different musical genres.
Chord Functions Voicings 5 Automatic Scales Activate this to let Cubase set the scales automatically. 6 Mapping Offset If you enter a negative number of ticks, the chord events will affect the MIDI notes that have been triggered too early. Configure Voicing Parameters If you click Configure voicing parameters in the Voicings section of the Inspector, you can configure your own voicing parameters for a specific voicing scheme.
Chord Functions Converting Chord Events to MIDI Highest Note Sets the limit for the highest note, except the root note. In the Style section for Guitar voicings, you can set up the following parameters: Triads Sets a triad with 4, 5 or 6 voices. 4-note chords Sets a 4-note chord with 4, 5 or 6 voices without tensions. 3-string triads Sets a 3-string triad. Modern Jazz Sets 4-note, 5-note, and 6-note chords, partly without root note, but with tensions.
Chord Functions Controlling MIDI or Audio Playback Using the Chord Track 4. On your MIDI keyboard, hit the corresponding keys to play back the chords. Assigning Chord Events to HALion Sonic SE Pads PREREQUISITE Create a chord progression on the chord track and add an instrument track with HALion Sonic SE as VST instrument to your project. PROCEDURE 1. On the chord track, select the chord events and drag them to the HALion Sonic SE pads.
Chord Functions Controlling MIDI or Audio Playback Using the Chord Track 5. Click OK. RESULT The events on your track now match the chord progression on the chord track. NOTE If you matched your MIDI track to the chord track, some of the original MIDI notes may be muted. To hide these notes in the editors, activate Hide Muted Notes in Editors in the Preferences dialog (Editing—Chords page).
Chord Functions Controlling MIDI or Audio Playback Using the Chord Track NOTE If you apply this mode to a selection of tracks that contain separate voices, you can set up one track as master and the others as voicing slaves. This way, you can change the voicing of the master and the slaves will follow automatically.
Chord Functions Assigning Voices to Notes RELATED LINKS Follow Chord Track Modes on page 827 Assigning Voices to Notes You can transpose MIDI notes to match the voices of a selected voicing library. PROCEDURE ● Select Project > Chord Track > Assign Voices to Notes. RESULT The note pitches now match the voicing of the chord track and you can still edit the MIDI notes. If you now select a note in the Key Editor, you see that Voice on the info line is assigned.
Chord Functions Recording Chord Events with a MIDI Keyboard NOTE Cubase Pro only: You can now open the Chord Assistant to create variations. RELATED LINKS Create Chord Symbols Dialog on page 830 Create Chord Symbols Dialog This dialog allows you to determine, which MIDI data should be taken into account when extracting chord events from MIDI. Include Bass Notes Activate this if you want your chord events to contain a bass note.
Chord Functions Recording Chord Events with a MIDI Keyboard NOTE The chord track uses its own voicing settings. The recorded chord events may therefore sound different.
Chord Pads Chord pads allow you to play with chords, and to change their voicings and tensions. In terms of harmonies and rhythms, they allow for a more playful and spontaneous approach to composition than the chord track functions. You can: ● Perform with chords in real time via a MIDI keyboard. ● Record your performance as MIDI events on a MIDI or instrument track or even on the chord track. NOTE We assume that you have a MIDI keyboard connected and set up.
Chord Pads Chord Pads 1 Current Player Shows the current player and opens a menu where you can select another player. 2 Current Mode Shows the current player mode and opens a menu where you can select another player mode. 3 Chord Pad Each chord pad can contain a chord symbol. To change it, click the Open Editor control on the left edge of the chord pad. 4 Keyboard Shows which keys are played when you trigger a chord pad. To zoom the keyboard, click a key and drag up or down.
Chord Pads Chord Pads 1 Open Editor Opens the chord editor that allows you to select a chord for the chord pad. 2 Voicing Indicators Shows the voicing used for the chord. Voicing indicators can only be displayed if the horizontal zoom level for the chord pads is high enough. 3 Adaptive Voicing Reference/Use X as Origin for Chord Assistant When the active chord pad is set as adaptive voicing reference, its borders are shown in yellow.
Chord Pads Functions Menu Functions Menu ● Show Voicing Indicators Allows you to activate/deactivate the voicing indicators that can be displayed at the bottom of each chord pad. ● Assign Pads from Chord Track Assigns the chord events from the chord track to the chord pads in the same order as they appear on the chord track. Chord events that have more than one occurrence are only assigned once.
Chord Pads Chord Assistant Chord Assistant The Chord Assistant allows you to use a chord as a starting point for suggestions for the next chord. It assists you in finding the right chords for creating a chord progression for your song. ● Click Show/Hide Chord Assistant on the left side of the chord pads area to open the Chord Assistant.
Chord Pads Chord Assistant ● To play a suggested chord, click it. The last 3 suggested chords that you clicked are shown with a highlighted border. ● To assign a suggestion to the next unassigned chord pad, right-click the suggested chord and select Assign to Pad. You can also drag the suggested chord and drop it on a chord pad.
Chord Pads Assigning Chords to Chord Pads ● To play a chord, click it. The last 3 chords that you clicked are shown with a highlighted border. ● To assign a chord to the next unassigned chord pad, right-click the suggested chord and select Assign to Pad. You can also drag the suggested chord and drop it on a chord pad. ● To assign a suggestion to the next unassigned chord pad and use this chord as origin, right-click the chord and select Assign to Pad and Use as Origin.
Chord Pads Assigning Chords to Chord Pads Assigning Chords with the Chord Editor If you know exactly which chord you want to assign to a specific chord pad, you can use the chord editor. PROCEDURE 1. Move the mouse pointer to the left edge of the chord pad, and click Open Editor. 2. In the chord Editor window, use the chord definition buttons to define a root note, a chord type, a tension, and a bass note. The new chord is triggered automatically to give an acoustic feedback.
Chord Pads Assigning Chords to Chord Pads Assigning Chords with the Chord Assistant – Circle of Fifths Mode If you have a chord that you want to use as a starting point for a chord progression, but you do not know how to create such a progression, you can use the Chord Assistant – Circle of Fifths window. PROCEDURE 1. Right-click the chord pad that you want to use as a starting point and activate Use X as Origin for Chord Assistant.
Chord Pads Moving and Copying Chord Pads The chord and its voicing is assigned to the chord pad, and you hear an acoustic feedback of the chord. NOTE The assigned voicing can be changed by the Adaptive Voicing setting. Therefore, if you want to keep the voicing for that specific pad, right-click the chord pad and select Lock from the context menu. RELATED LINKS Adaptive Voicing on page 851 Assigning Chords from the Chord Track You can assign the chord events from the chord track to the chord pads.
Chord Pads Playing Back and Recording Chords Playing Back and Recording Chords Playing Back Chord Pads with your MIDI Keyboard PREREQUISITE You have connected and set up a MIDI keyboard. PROCEDURE 1. Select Project > Add Track > Instrument. 2. In the Add Instrument Track dialog, select a VST instrument. 3. Click Add Track. An instrument track with the selected VST instrument is added to your project. 4. On the instrument track, click Record Enable. 5.
Chord Pads Chord Pad Settings – Remote Control Recording Chords on the Chord Track You can record the triggered chords on the chord track. This way, you can easily create chord events for a lead sheet, for example. PREREQUISITE You have connected and set up a MIDI keyboard, you have opened and set up the chord pads, and you have added an instrument or a MIDI track for which a VST instrument is loaded. PROCEDURE 1. On the instrument track, enable Monitor. 2.
Chord Pads Chord Pad Settings – Remote Control Allows you to set up remote keys for the section player. On the keyboard, these are highlighted in brown. 4 Pads Remote Range The keys that are assigned as remote keys for the chord pads are highlighted in blue. 5 Voicings/Tensions/Transpose The keys that are assigned as remote keys for voicings, tensions, and transpose control are highlighted in green.
Chord Pads Chord Pad Settings – Remote Control Activates/Deactivates the remote key assignment for the parameters voicings, tensions, and transpose. If this option is deactivated, only the remote key assignment for the pads remote range is active. 5 Latch Chords Activate this if you want the chord pad to play back until it is triggered again.
Chord Pads Chord Pad Settings – Remote Control Default Remote Assignment Default Remote Assignment for Pad Control By default, the MIDI events C1 to B1 trigger the chords that are assigned to the chord pads. All keys that are not assigned for remote control can be used for regular playback.
Chord Pads Chord Pad Settings – Players NOTE If you use the remote keys for voicings, tensions, or transposition after releasing the remote key for the chord pad, the next played chord is affected. Default Remote Assignment for Player Control By default, the MIDI events G2 to B2 trigger the chord notes corresponding to the sections. The remote keys for Subsections, and also for selecting or muting players in a multitrack project, are not assigned by default. Remote assignments are saved globally.
Chord Pads Chord Pad Settings – Players 3 4 Plain Chords/Pattern/Sections ● Select Plain Chords to trigger all notes of a chord simultaneously. ● Select Pattern to break up the chords into their individual notes. ● Select Sections to control the playback of single notes or groups of notes of a chord. Manage Players Opens a menu where you can select the player that you want to add. From here, you can also rename or remove the current player.
Chord Pads Chord Pad Settings – Players Custom Settings for Section Player The custom settings for the section player allow you to determine how the sections are triggered, how they are distributed, or if they are played at all. Only sections with remote keys assigned are available. ● On the Players tab, activate the Sections tab and click Custom.
Chord Pads Chord Pad Settings – Players Subsection Assignments These are available if you have set up remote keys for subsections on the Remote Control tab in the Player Control settings. ● Open the assigned to pop-up menu to assign a subsection to a section. ● Use the Offset controls to specify an offset from the section. This way, when you press the remote key for the subsection, you will hear the chord notes that correspond to the section, transposed by the specified offset.
Chord Pads Chord Pad Settings – Players Adaptive Voicing In Cubase, the adaptive voicing setting ensures that pitches in chord progressions do not change abruptly. Adaptive voicing is activated and the voicings of the chord pads are determined automatically according to specific voice leading rules. If you want to set the voicing of a specific chord pad manually, and do not want it changed automatically, you can use the voicing control to the right of a chord pad.
Chord Pads Chord Pad Settings – Pad Layout ● Activate Pattern to use the velocity values from the MIDI loop or the MIDI part that is selected as a pattern. AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK If you have a pattern that you want to use in other projects, you can save it using the presets section in the pattern player.
Chord Pads Chord Pads Presets 1 Show/Hide Settings Opens the settings for the chord pads. 2 Keyboard Activate this to show the chord pads in a keyboard layout. You can display 1 or 2 octaves, and you can select if the first chord pad starts with C, A or E. 3 Grid Activate this to show the chord pads in a grid layout. You can display up to 4 rows and 16 columns. 4 Layout display Shows how the active chord pad layout is displayed.
Chord Pads Creating Events from Chord Pads 3. Click OK to save the preset and exit the dialog. Creating Events from Chord Pads You can use the chords assigned to the chord pads to create chord events or MIDI parts in the Project window. ● To create a chord event, drag a chord pad and drop it on the chord track. ● To create a MIDI part with the length of one bar, drag a chord pad and drop it on a MIDI or instrument track.
Logical Editor The Logical Editor is a powerful tool for search and replace functions on MIDI data. IMPORTANT The Logical Editor is only available in Cubase Pro. However, the Transformer MIDI insert and the Input Transformer that share many of the functions with the Logical Editor are also available in Cubase Artist. The principle of the Logical Editor is this: ● ● You set up filter conditions to find certain elements.
Logical Editor Filter Conditions 1 Filter Conditions Allows you to specify the conditions such as type, attribute, value, position, that a specific element must meet to be found. You can combine any number of filter conditions using AND/OR operators. 2 Action List Allows you to set up a list of actions that specifies exactly what is done. This is not necessary for all functions. 3 Function pop-up menu Allows you to select a function. 4 Apply Applies your settings.
Logical Editor Filter Conditions Parameter 2 Only available if one of the Range options is set in the Condition column. Allows you to find all elements with values inside or outside the range between Parameter 1 and Parameter 2. Bar Range/Time Base Only available if the Filter Target is set to Position. If one of the Bar Range options is selected in the Condition column, you use the Bar Range/Time Base column to specify zones within each bar.
Logical Editor Filter Conditions Bigger or Equal Has a value that is the same as or higher than the one set up in the Parameter 1 column. Less Has a value lower than the one set up in the Parameter 1 column. Less or Equal Has a value that is the same as or lower than the one set up in the Parameter 1 column. Inside Range Has a value that is between the values set up in the Parameter 1 and Parameter 2 columns. Note that Parameter 1 should be the lower value and Parameter 2 the higher.
Logical Editor Filter Conditions Searching for Elements at Specific Positions (Logical Editor only) You can search for elements starting at specific positions, either relative to the start of the project or within each bar. PROCEDURE 1. Open the Filter Target pop-up menu and select Position. This allows you to find elements starting at specific positions, either relative to the start of the project or within each bar. 2.
Logical Editor Filter Conditions RELATED LINKS Combining Multiple Condition Lines on page 880 Value 1 and Value 2 MIDI events can be composed of value 1 and value 2. Value 1 and value 2 have different meanings for different event types: Event type Value 1 Value 2 Notes The Note Number/Pitch. The velocity of the note. Poly Pressure The key that was pressed. The amount of pressure for the key. Controller The type of Controller, displayed as a number. The amount of Control Change.
Logical Editor Filter Conditions NOTE To find all notes of a certain key, in all octaves, open the Condition pop-up menu and select Note is equal to. 3. Click below the list to add another condition line. Parameter 1 is automatically set to Note. Also, Value 1 and Value 2 will be displayed as Pitch and Velocity respectively. RELATED LINKS Combining Multiple Condition Lines on page 880 Searching for Controllers PROCEDURE 1. Open the Filter Target pop-up menu and select Value 1. 2. Click 3.
Logical Editor Filter Conditions Searching for Properties You can search for properties that are not part of the MIDI standard but rather Cubase-specific settings. PROCEDURE 1. Open the Filter Target pop-up menu and select Property. 2. Open the Parameter 1 pop-up menu and select the property that you want to search for. 3. Open the Condition pop-up menu and select one of the following options: ● Select Property is set if you want to search for events that have the specified property.
Logical Editor Filter Conditions In this example, the action is performed after playing the C1. Searching for Chords (Logical Editor only) You can search for chords in a MIDI part or on the chord track. PREREQUISITE NOTE A note belongs to a chord if at least 2 other notes play at the same time. PROCEDURE 1. Open the Filter Target pop-up menu and select Context Variable. 2. Open the Parameter 1 pop-up menu and select the property that you want to search for. 3.
Logical Editor Filter Conditions Voice If you set Parameter 2 to the voice in the chord, this finds the specified voice in the selected MIDI part. NOTE The Musical Context presets give you an idea of the possibilities of this filter target. Combining multiple condition lines You can add condition lines and combine them by using boolean And and Or operators and brackets. ● To add a new condition, click below the list. The new line is added at the bottom of the list.
Logical Editor Selecting a function EXAMPLE You can set up the Logical Editor to find all MIDI notes with the pitch C3, as well as all events (regardless of their type) set to MIDI channel 1. You can set up the Logical Editor to find all notes that either had the pitch C3 or the MIDI channel 1 (but no non-note events). Selecting a function The pop-up menu at the bottom of the Logical Editor is where you select the function, that is, the basic type of editing to be performed.
Logical Editor Specifying actions Copy (Logical Editor only) Copies all found elements, transforms them according to the action list and pastes them into a new part on a new MIDI track. The original events are not affected. Extract (Logical Editor only) Transforms all found events and moves them to a new part on a new MIDI track. Select (Logical Editor only) Selects all found events and highlights them for further work in the regular MIDI editors.
Logical Editor Specifying actions VST 3 Value Operation (Logical Editor only) Allows you to perform common operations within the VST 3 value range (0.0 to 1.0) instead of the standard MIDI value range (0-127), for finer adjustments. NOTE The Position and Length parameters are interpreted via the time base setting in the Bar Range/ Time Base column, with the exception of the Random setting, which uses the time base of the affected events.
Logical Editor Specifying actions added). When Transpose to Scale is selected, you can specify a musical scale using the Parameter 1 and Parameter 2 columns. Parameter 1 is the key (C, C#, D, etc.) while Parameter 2 is the type of scale (major, melodic or harmonic minor, etc.). Each note will be transposed to the closest note in the selected scale. Use Value 2 This is only available if you set Action Target to Value 1.
Logical Editor Applying the Defined Actions Applying the Defined Actions Once you have set up filter conditions, selected a function and set the required actions or loaded a preset, you apply the actions defined with the Logical Editor by clicking the Apply button. IMPORTANT The MIDI insert effect Transformer does not feature an Apply button. Here, the current settings are automatically applied in realtime during playback or live playing. Logical Editor operations can be undone just like any other editing.
Logical Editor Presets NOTE The list of presets is read each time the Logical Editor is opened.
Project Logical Editor (Cubase Pro only) The Project Logical Editor is a powerful tool for search and replace functions in the Project window. The Project Logical Editor allows you to specify filter conditions and combine them with actions. This way you can search for all open folder tracks in your project, for example, and close them. The Project Logical Editor comes with a number of presets that show you the possibilities of this feature, and that you can use as a starting point for your own settings.
Project Logical Editor (Cubase Pro only) Filter Conditions Allows you to set up a list of actions that specifies exactly what is done. This is not necessary for all functions. 3 Function pop-up menu Allows you to select if the found elements are transformed, deleted, or selected. 4 Macro pop-up menu Allows you to select a macro. 5 Apply Applies your settings. IMPORTANT Not every combination of settings always makes sense. Experiment a bit before applying your edits to important projects.
Project Logical Editor (Cubase Pro only) Filter Conditions Bar Range/Time Base Only available if the Filter Target is set to Position. If one of the Bar Range options is selected in the Condition column, you use the Bar Range/Time Base column to specify zones within each bar. This allows you to find all elements on or around the first beat of every bar, for example. If any of the other Condition options is selected, you can use the Bar Range/Time Base column to specify a time base such as PPQ, seconds, etc.
Project Logical Editor (Cubase Pro only) Filter Conditions MIDI If no container type is specified, this finds MIDI parts and MIDI tracks. Automation If no container type is specified, this finds automation events and automation tracks. Marker If no container type is specified, this finds marker events and marker tracks. Transpose If no container type is specified, this finds transpose events and transpose tracks. Arranger If no container type is specified, this finds arranger events and arranger tracks.
Project Logical Editor (Cubase Pro only) Filter Conditions ● Select Unequal if you want to search for any other container type than the specified. ● Select All Types if you want to search for all container types. EXAMPLE You can set up the Project Logical Editor to find all folder tracks in the project. Container Type Filter When the Filter Target is set to Container Type, the pop-up menu lists the available container types.
Project Logical Editor (Cubase Pro only) Filter Conditions You can set up the Project Logical Editor to find all MIDI and instrument parts (not tracks) or all audio events (not parts or tracks) in the project that are muted. Searching for Names PROCEDURE 1. Open the Filter Target pop-up menu and select Name. 2. Open the Parameter 1 pop-up menu and enter a name, or a part of a name that you want to search for. 3.
Project Logical Editor (Cubase Pro only) Filter Conditions EXAMPLE You can set up the Project Logical Editor to find all elements at the PPQ position 5.1.1. in the project. You can set up the Project Logical Editor to find elements starting around the second beat in each bar. Position Filter For positions, the following options are available: Equal Has the exact same value as set up in the Parameter 1 column. Unequal Has any value other than the one set up in the Parameter 1 column.
Project Logical Editor (Cubase Pro only) Filter Conditions Inside Cycle Is inside the set cycle. Exactly Matching Cycle Exactly matches the set cycle. Searching for Elements of Specific Lengths PROCEDURE 1. Open the Filter Target pop-up menu and select Length. This allows you to find elements of a specific length only. NOTE The Length parameter is interpreted via the time base setting in the Bar Range/Time Base column, i. e. in PPQ, seconds, samples, or frames. 2.
Project Logical Editor (Cubase Pro only) Filter Conditions Inside Range Has a value that is between the values set up in the Parameter 1 and Parameter 2 columns. Note that Parameter 1 should be the lower value and Parameter 2 the higher. Outside Range Has a value that is not between the values set up in the Parameter 1 and Parameter 2 columns. Searching for Color Names PROCEDURE 1. Open the Filter Target pop-up menu and select Color Name. 2.
Project Logical Editor (Cubase Pro only) Filter Conditions Properties Filter For properties, the following options are available: Property is set This finds all events that have the property that is set in the Parameter 1 column. Property is not set This finds all events that do not have the property that is set in the Parameter 1 column. When the Filter Target is set to Property, the pop-up menu lists the available properties. Event is muted This finds all muted events.
Project Logical Editor (Cubase Pro only) Filter Conditions The Bool Column In the bool column to the right in the list, you can select a boolean operator: And or Or. A boolean operator combines 2 condition lines and determines the result in the following way: ● And determines that both conditions must be fulfilled for an element to be found. ● Or determines that at least one of the conditions must be fulfilled for an element to be found.
Project Logical Editor (Cubase Pro only) Specifying Actions Specifying Actions You can specify actions, that is, changes that are made to the found elements, in the lower list of the Project Logical Editor. Actions are only relevant for the function type Transform. You can perform the following action types: ● Track-based actions such as Track Operation, Name ● Event-based actions such as Position, Length, Name. ● Actions that only take effect on automation data such as Trim.
Project Logical Editor (Cubase Pro only) Specifying Actions Add Adds the value specified in the Parameter 1 column to the Length. Subtract Subtracts the value specified in the Parameter 1 column from the Length. Multiply by Multiplies the Length value with the value specified in the Parameter 1 column. Divide by Divides the Length value by the value specified in the Parameter 1 column. Round by This rounds the Length value using the value specified in the Parameter 1 column.
Project Logical Editor (Cubase Pro only) Specifying Actions Sends Bypass Enables, disables, or toggles the sends bypass status. Lanes Active Enables, disables, or toggles the lanes active status. Hide Track Enables, disables, or toggles the track visibility status. Time Domain Sets the track time domain to Musical, Linear, or toggles the status. Name Adjusting the Name value allows you to rename the found elements. Replace Replaces names with the text specified in the Parameter 1 column.
Project Logical Editor (Cubase Pro only) Selecting a Function Selecting a Function The left pop-up menu at the bottom of the Project Logical Editor is where you select the function – the basic type of editing to be performed. The available options are: Delete Deletes all elements found by the Project Logical Editor. NOTE When you delete automation tracks and undo this operation by selecting Undo from the Edit menu, the automation tracks will be restored, but the tracks will be closed.
Project Logical Editor (Cubase Pro only) Presets Presets The section in the upper left section of the window allows you to load, save and manage Project Logical Editor presets. To load a preset, do one of the following: ● Open the Select Preset pop-up menu, and select an option. ● Select Edit > Process Project Logical Editor, and select an option. NOTE If you set up a key command for a preset you can conveniently apply the same operation to several selected events in one go.
Project Logical Editor (Cubase Pro only) Presets 4. Click the Assign button above the field. The new key command is shown in the Keys List. 5. Click OK.
Editing Tempo and Time Signature Project Tempo Modes For every project you can set a tempo mode, depending on whether your music has a fixed tempo or if it changes throughout the project. On the Transport panel, you can set the following tempo modes: ● Fixed Tempo Mode If you want to work with one fixed tempo that does not change throughout the project, deactivate Activate Tempo Track on the Transport panel. You can change the tempo value to set a fixed rehearsal tempo.
Editing Tempo and Time Signature Tempo Track Editor ● Linear Use this mode for material with a linear, time-related time base. RELATED LINKS Instrument Track Inspector on page 106 MIDI Track Inspector on page 113 Audio Track Inspector on page 99 Tempo Track Editor The Tempo Track Editor provides an overview of the project tempo settings. It allows you to add and edit tempo events. ● To open the Tempo Track Editor, select Project > Tempo Track, or press Ctrl/Cmd-T.
Editing Tempo and Time Signature Tempo Track Activate Tempo Track Switches the project tempo between fixed tempo mode and tempo track mode. Show/Hide Info Opens/Closes the info line. Tools Contains tools to select, erase, zoom, and draw. Auto-Scroll Allows the tempo event display to scroll during playback, keeping the project cursor visible in the editor. Snap Allows you to restrict horizontal movement and positioning of tempo events to certain positions.
Editing Tempo and Time Signature Tempo Track ● To select a tempo event, click it with the Object Selection tool. ● To select multiple events, drag a selection rectangle with the Object Selection tool or Shift-click the events. ● To select all tempo events on the tempo track, right-click the tempo track and select Select All Events from the context menu.
Editing Tempo and Time Signature Setting up Tempo Changes for Projects If you click in the middle right corner of the editor, you can scale the curve absolute to its center. This allows you to raise or lower the event values horizontally around the center of the editor. 9 Stretch If you click on the lower border of the editor, you can stretch the curve horizontally. This allows you to move the event values of the curve to the left or to the right.
Editing Tempo and Time Signature Setting up Tempo Changes for Projects RESULT The project tempo is now set up to follow the tempo track. All tracks that are set to musical (tempo-related) time base follow any tempo changes that you add on the tempo track. RELATED LINKS Track Time Base on page 888 Tempo Track Controls on page 146 Tempo Track Editor on page 889 Setting up a Tempo Track by Adding Tempo Changes PROCEDURE 1.
Editing Tempo and Time Signature Setting up Tempo Changes for Projects Setting up a Tempo Track from Tapping (Cubase Pro only) You can create a complete tempo track based on tapping the tempo of freely recorded audio or MIDI material. PREREQUISITE You have opened a project with a freely recorded audio or MIDI file. You have added an instrument track and loaded an instrument. You have connected and set up a MIDI keyboard. PROCEDURE 1.
Editing Tempo and Time Signature Setting up Tempo Changes for Projects ● A signature track is added to the project. On the signature track, a signature event with the value 1/4 is added. ● On the Project window toolbar, the Time Warp tool is selected. AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK Depending on the rhythmic quality of the material, the analysis may instantly lead to a perfect result.
Editing Tempo and Time Signature Setting up a Fixed Project Tempo NOTE When editing tempo events on tempo curves, make sure that the display format in the Project window ruler is set to Bars+Beats. Otherwise, you may get confusing results. Use the following methods to remove tempo events: ● With the Erase tool, click the tempo event. ● Select the tempo event and press Backspace. NOTE You cannot remove the first tempo event.
Editing Tempo and Time Signature Setting up a Fixed Project Tempo RELATED LINKS Setting the Project Tempo from a Recording on page 897 Setting the Project Tempo by Tapping on page 897 Setting the Project Tempo from an Audio Loop on page 898 Setting the Project Tempo from a Recording You can calculate the tempo of freely recorded audio or MIDI material with the Beat Calculator and set it as the project tempo. PREREQUISITE The tempo mode is set to Fixed. PROCEDURE 1.
Editing Tempo and Time Signature Beat Calculator 6. Click one of the buttons in the Insert Tempo into Tempo Track section to insert the calculated tempo into the tempo track. RESULT The project tempo is set to the tapped tempo. RELATED LINKS Setting up a Fixed Project Tempo on page 896 Setting the Project Tempo from an Audio Loop You can set the project tempo from the tempo of an audio loop. PREREQUISITE Your project contains an audio loop that is not in Musical Mode. PROCEDURE 1.
Editing Tempo and Time Signature Tempo Detection (Cubase Pro only) 3 Tap Tempo Opens a window where you can specify a tempo by tapping. 4 Insert Tempo into Tempo Track at Tempo Track Start If your project is in tempo track mode, the calculated tempo is set as the first tempo curve point. If your project is in fixed tempo mode, the calculated tempo is set for the entire project.
Editing Tempo and Time Signature Exporting a Tempo Track (Cubase Pro only) Allows you to halve the detected tempo. This is useful if your material is half as fast as the detected tempo. 5 Multiply by 4/3 Allows you to adjust the detected tempo with a factor of 4/3. This is useful if your material contains dotted notes or triplets and the algorithm detects 3 beats where 4 are expected. 6 Multiply by 3/4 Allows you to adjust the detected tempo with a factor of 3/4.
Editing Tempo and Time Signature Process Tempo (Cubase Pro only) Process Tempo (Cubase Pro only) The Process Tempo dialog allows you to set a range to a specific length or to adjust its end time by automatic adjustment of the tempo track. ● To open the Process Tempo dialog, activate Activate Tempo Track, select Project > Tempo Track to open the Tempo Track Editor, and click Open Process Tempo Dialog.
Editing Tempo and Time Signature Process Bars (Cubase Pro only) Process Bars (Cubase Pro only) The Process Bars dialog allows you to insert, delete, replace, or reinterpret the signature events for a specified bar range by automatic adjustment of the signature and tempo events. ● To open the Process Bars dialog, select Project > Tempo Track to open the Tempo Track Editor, and click Open Process Bars Dialog. The following options are available: 1 Bar Range Shows the specified bar range.
Editing Tempo and Time Signature Time Warp (Cubase Pro only) If you click the Time Warp on the Project window toolbar and click again, a pop-up menu opens where you can select one of the following modes: ● Warp Grid If you use the Time Warp tool in this mode, the absolute time positions for all tracks that are set to musical time base are kept. ● Warp Grid (musical events follow) If you use the Time Warp tool in this mode, all tracks that are set to musical time base follow the changes.
Editing Tempo and Time Signature Set Definition From Tempo Set Definition From Tempo The Set Definition from Tempo dialog allows you to set up freely recorded audio material to follow a specific tempo. ● To open the Set Definition from Tempo dialog for an audio recording, select Audio > Advanced > Set Definition from Tempo. Save Definition in Project Only Allows you to save the tempo information in the project file only.
Editing Tempo and Time Signature Time Signature Events RELATED LINKS Toolbar on page 41 Transport on page 50 Signature Track on page 144 Adding Time Signature Events on the Signature Track on page 905 Setting Up a Click Pattern for a Time Signature Event on page 905 Adding Time Signature Events in the Tempo Track Editor PROCEDURE 1. Select Project > Tempo Track to open the Tempo Track Editor. 2.
Editing Tempo and Time Signature Time Signature Events ● Use the Clicks setting to define the number of clicks that you want to hear, and click in the event display to set up a new click pattern. 3. When you are done, click outside the Click Pattern Editor to close it. 4. Repeat this for each signature event for which you want to set up a click pattern. RESULT If you play back the project and activate the metronome click, the different project parts use the defined click patterns.
Project Browser (Cubase Pro only) Window Overview The Project Browser window provides a list based representation of the project. This allows you to view and edit all events on all tracks by using regular value editing in a list. 1 Project Structure list 2 Time Format pop-up menu 3 Add pop-up menu and Add button 4 Filter pop-up menu 5 Event display Opening the Project Browser You open the Project Browser by selecting “Browser” from the Project menu.
Project Browser (Cubase Pro only) Window Overview ● Items with hierarchical substructures can be folded out by clicking the “+” symbols or the “closed folder” symbols in the Project Structure list. When the substructure of an item is revealed, a “-” symbol or an “open folder” symbol is shown instead – click this to hide the substructure. ● To reveal or hide all substructures in the Project Structure list, use the buttons “(+) All” and “(–) All” above the list.
Project Browser (Cubase Pro only) Editing tracks About the Sync Selection option If the “Sync Selection” checkbox is activated on the Project Browser toolbar, selecting an event in the Project window automatically selects it in the Project Browser, and vice versa. This makes it easy to locate events in the two windows. Editing tracks Editing audio tracks Audio tracks can have two “subitems”: Track Data and Automation.
Project Browser (Cubase Pro only) Editing tracks You can only specify positive Offset values, because the event cannot start before the start of the clip. Likewise, it cannot end after the end of the clip. If the event already plays the whole clip, the Offset cannot be adjusted at all. Volume The volume of the event, as set with the Volume handle or on the info line in the Project window. Fade In/Fade Out The length of the fade-in and fade-out areas respectively.
Project Browser (Cubase Pro only) Editing tracks ● The Automation item corresponds to the automation track in the Project window, and contains the track’s automation events. NOTE If you have not performed any automation or opened an automation track, the Browser will only contain the MIDI data. When editing the Track Data, the following parameters are available: The list columns for MIDI events Type The type of MIDI event. This cannot be changed. Start The position of the event.
Project Browser (Cubase Pro only) Editing tracks The list columns for MIDI parts Name The name of the part. Start The start position of the part. Editing this value is the same as moving the part. End The end position of the part. Changing this is the same as resizing the part (and will automatically affect the Length value as well). Length The length of the part. Changing this resizes the part and automatically changes the End value. Offset This adjusts the start position of the events within the part.
Project Browser (Cubase Pro only) Editing tracks Filtering MIDI events When you are editing MIDI in the Project Browser, the large number of different MIDI events displayed can make it hard to find the events you want to edit. The Filter pop-up menu allows you to select a single event type for display. When this option is selected, only Controller events will be shown in the event display. To show all event types, select the top item (“---”) from the menu.
Project Browser (Cubase Pro only) Editing tracks channels, or input (Cubase Pro only) and output busses, are handled in the same way in the Project Browser. Each Automation item in the Project Structure list will have a number of subentries, one for each automated parameter. Selecting one of these parameters in the Project Structure list shows its automation events in the list: You can use the two columns in the list to edit the position of the events and their values.
Project Browser (Cubase Pro only) Editing tracks Length The length of cycle markers. Editing this value is the same as resizing the marker, and will automatically change the End value as well. ID The number of the marker. For regular (non-cycle) markers, this corresponds to the key commands used for navigating to the markers. For example, if a marker has ID 3, pressing Shift-3 on the computer keyboard will move the song position to that marker.
Project Browser (Cubase Pro only) Editing tracks You can add new time signature events by clicking the Add button. This creates a 4/4 event, at the beginning of the bar closest to the project cursor position. Make sure that there is no other time signature event at the current cursor position. Deleting events The procedure for deleting events is the same for all different track types: PROCEDURE 1. Click on an event (or a part) in the Event display to select it. 2.
Rendering Audio and MIDI You can render existing material to new audio material. You can render the following: ● Audio tracks ● Instrument tracks ● Audio events or parts on audio tracks ● MIDI parts on instrument tracks ● Range selections on audio or instrument tracks ● Range selections on multiple audio or instrument tracks IMPORTANT The rendering function does not support side-chain routing. Render Tracks The Render Tracks dialog allows you to customize the track render settings.
Rendering Audio and MIDI Render Tracks As Block Events One or more tracks are created. These contain adjacent events/parts that are combined to blocks. Every block is saved as a separate audio file. As One Event One or more tracks are created. These contain the events/parts that are combined to one event/part. Every combination is saved as a separate audio file. Dry If this option is activated, all effects and panner settings are copied to new audio tracks.
Rendering Audio and MIDI Render Selection Keep Source Tracks Unchanged If this option is selected, the source tracks remain unchanged. Mute Source Tracks If this option is selected, the source tracks are automatically muted. Disable Source Tracks If this option is selected, the source tracks are disabled and are therefore no longer processed. This option releases CPU and RAM resources and is therefore similar to the Freeze function.
Rendering Audio and MIDI Render Selection The following settings are available: As Separate Events One or more tracks are created. These contain separate events or parts that are saved as separate audio files. As Block Events One or more tracks are created. These contain adjacent events/parts that are combined to blocks. Every block is saved as a separate audio file. As One Event One or more tracks are created. These contain the events/parts that are combined to one event/part.
Rendering Audio and MIDI Render Selection file format is determined by the output channel of the source track. A mono track that is routed to a stereo bus results in a stereo audio file. Mix Down to One Track By default, rendering multiple tracks or selections from multiple tracks at once results in multiple new audio tracks. To create one resulting audio track from all your source material, activate Mix Down to One Track.
Export Audio Mixdown The Export Audio Mixdown function allows you to mix down and export all audio that is contained between the left and right locators of a project. Cubase Pro only: You can also export audio that is contained in different ranges defined by cycle markers. To open the Export Audio Mixdown dialog, select File > Export > Audio Mixdown.
Export Audio Mixdown Mixing Down to Audio Files Cubase Pro only: Allows you to export sections of your project that are defined by cycle marker ranges of the active marker track. 3 File Location Allows you to set up the naming scheme and to select a path for the exported file. 4 File Format Allows you to select a file format and make additional settings for the file to be created. This includes codec settings, metadata, sample rate, bit depth, etc.
Export Audio Mixdown Available Channels for Export Available Channels for Export The Channel Selection section of the Export Audio Mixdown dialog contains a list of channels that you can export as an audio mixdown. The channels are organized in a hierarchical structure. Channels of the same type are grouped. This allows you to easily identify and select the channels for export. NOTE MIDI tracks are not available for export. To include MIDI in a mixdown, you must record MIDI to audio tracks.
Export Audio Mixdown File Location Activate this option if you want to mix down several channels simultaneously. An individual file is created for each channel. If you activate a channel type in the list, all channels of this type are selected. 2 Channels available for export In the list, activate the channels that you want to include in the mixdown. Only the sound of the activated channels is included in the mixdown. MixConsole settings, record enable, and insert effects are taken into account.
Export Audio Mixdown File Location Opens a pop-up menu with naming options: 3 ● Set to Project Name inserts the project name into the Name field. ● Auto Update Name adds a number to the file name and increments the number every time you export a file. Path Opens a dialog that allows you to browse for a file location. 4 Path Options Opens a pop-up menu with the following options: 5 ● Choose opens a dialog that allows you to browse for a file location.
Export Audio Mixdown File Location 3 Result Allows you to drag and drop attributes to this field and rearrange them by dragging. 4 Settings Allows you to make separator and counter settings. 5 Preview Displays a preview of your current naming scheme. RELATED LINKS Channel Selection on page 924 Defining Naming Schemes You can define a naming scheme by combining attributes that determine the structure of the file names for the exported audio files.
Export Audio Mixdown File Format File Format The File Format section allows you to select a format and make additional settings for the mixdown file. The following file formats are available: ● Wave File This is the most common file format on the PC platform. Wave files have the extension .wav. ● AIFC File This is an audio file format standard defined by Apple Inc. AIFC files are used on most computer platforms. They support compression ratios as high as 6:1 and contain tags in the header.
Export Audio Mixdown File Format 1 Insert Broadcast Wave Chunk Activates the embedding of additional file information in Broadcast Wave format. NOTE By activating this option, you create a Broadcast Wave file. Some applications may not be able to handle these files. If you get problems using the file in another application, deactivate Insert Broadcast Wave Chunk and export the file again. 2 Edit Opens the Broadcast Wave Chunk dialog where you can enter information.
Export Audio Mixdown File Format This option is only available if Insert iXML Chunk is activated. It allows you to include tempo information from the tempo track or from the Definition section of the Sample Editor in the iXML chunk of the exported files. AIFF Files AIFF stands for Audio Interchange File Format, a standard defined by Apple Inc. AIFF files have the extension .aif and are used on most computer platforms. 1 Insert Broadcast Wave Chunk Activates the embedding of additional file information.
Export Audio Mixdown File Format Sets the encoder to a different resampling mode. This may give better results depending on your settings. However, it does not allow you to select the Sample Rate. 4 Insert ID3 Tag Includes ID3 Tag information in the exported file. 5 Edit ID3 Tag Opens the ID3 Tag dialog that allows you to enter information about the file. This information is embedded in the file and can be displayed by most MP3 playback applications.
Export Audio Mixdown File Format ● Select Constant Bit Rate if you want to limit the file size. To calculate the size of a file that is encoded with a constant bit rate, multiply the bit rate by the duration of the file. ● Select Variable Bit Rate if you want the bit rate to fluctuate depending on the character and intricacy of the material being encoded. The more complex passages in the source material, the higher the bit rate – and the larger the final file.
Export Audio Mixdown File Format Windows Media Audio File Settings - Media The Media tab in the Windows Media Audio File Settings dialog allows you to enter information about the file. Use the Title, Author, Copyright, and Description fields to enter a file description of its content that is embedded in the file header. This can be displayed by some Windows Media Audio playback applications.
Export Audio Mixdown Audio Engine Output Wave 64 Files Wave 64 is a proprietary format developed by Sonic Foundry Inc. Wave 64 files have the extension .w64. NOTE In terms of audio quality, Wave 64 files are identical to standard Wave files, but in the file headers, Wave 64 files use 64-bit values for addressing where Wave files use 32-bit values. The consequence of this is that Wave 64 files can be considerably larger than standard Wave files.
Export Audio Mixdown Audio Engine Output Allows you to select the frequency range of the exported audio. If you set the value lower than the project sample rate, the audio quality degrades and the high-frequency content is reduced. If you set the value higher than the project sample rate, the file size increases without increasing the audio quality. For CD burning select 44.100 kHz, because this is the sample rate used on audio CDs.
Export Audio Mixdown Import Into Project Import Into Project This section offers several options for importing the resulting mixdown files back into the existing or into a new project. NOTE When you play back the reimported file in the same project, mute the original tracks so that you only hear the mixdown. 1 Pool Imports the resulting audio file automatically back into the Pool as a clip. Deactivating this option also deactivates the Audio Track option.
Export Audio Mixdown Post Process Post Process In this section, you can select a process that you want to run after mixing down your audio file. 1 Deactivate External MIDI Inputs Activate this option if MIDI inputs that are performed on external devices should be ignored during the export process. 2 Close Window after Export Closes the dialog automatically after export. 3 Update Display Activate this option if you want the meters to be updated during the export process.
Synchronization Background What is synchronization? Synchronization is the process of getting 2 or more devices to play back together at the same speed and position. These devices can range from audio and video tape machines to digital audio workstations, MIDI sequencers, synchronization controllers, and digital video devices. Synchronization basics There are 3 basic components of audio/visual synchronization: position, speed, and phase.
Synchronization Timecode (positional references) ● The “timecode master” is the device generating position information or timecode. ● The “timecode slave” is any device receiving the timecode and synchronizing or “locking” to it. ● The “machine control master” is the device that issues transport commands to the system. ● The “machine control slave” is the device receiving those commands and responding to them.
Synchronization Timecode (positional references) 30 fps non-drop SMPTE (N) This is the frame count of NTSC broadcast video. However, the actual frame rate or speed of the video format runs at 29.97 fps. This timecode clock does not run in realtime. It is slightly slower by 0.1 %. 30 fps drop-frame SMPTE (D) The 30 fps drop-frame count is an adaptation that allows a timecode display running at 29.
Synchronization Clock sources (speed references) at different rates depending on the speed (frame rate) of the video format. For example, NTSC timecode (SMPTE) has a frame count of 30 fps. However, NTSC video runs at a rate of 29.97 fps. So the NTSC timecode standard known as SMPTE is a 30 fps standard that runs at 29.97 realtime. Clock sources (speed references) Once the position is established, the next essential factor for synchronization is the playback speed.
Synchronization The Project Synchronization Setup dialog The dialog is organized into sections separating related groups of settings. The arrows shown between the various sections of the dialog indicate how settings in one section influence settings in another section. In the following, the available sections are described in detail. The Cubase Section At the center of the Project Synchronization Setup dialog is the Cubase section.
Synchronization The Project Synchronization Setup dialog Lock Frames This setting determines how many full frames of timecode it takes for Cubase to try and establish sync or “lock”. If you have an external tape transport with a very short start-up time, try lowering this number to make lock-up even faster. This option can only be set to multiples of 2. Drop Out Frames This setting determines the amount of missed timecode frames it takes for Cubase to stop.
Synchronization The Project Synchronization Setup dialog MMC Input and Output The MMC Input and MMC Output settings determine which MIDI port in your system will send and receive MMC commands. Set both the input and output to MIDI ports that are connected to the desired MIDI device. MMC Device ID The MMC device ID should be set to the same number as the receiving device. You can also set the device ID to “All” if more than one machine is receiving MMC commands or if the device ID is not known.
Synchronization The Project Synchronization Setup dialog MMC Slave Active If this option is activated, several settings become available in the Machine Control Input section: Option Description MMC Input Set this to the MIDI input that is connected to the master machine control device. MMC Output Set this to the MIDI output that is connected to the master machine control device. MMC Device ID This determines the MIDI ID number that is used to identify the machine in Cubase.
Synchronization Synchronized operation MIDI Clock Follows Project Position Activate this option to ensure that the MIDI clock device follows Cubase when looping, locating, or jumping while playing. NOTE Some older MIDI devices might not respond well to these positioning messages and could take some time synchronizing to the new location. Always Send Start Message MIDI clock transport commands include Start, Stop, and Continue. However, some MIDI devices do not recognize the Continue command.
Synchronization Working with VST System Link ● If “Use External Synchronization” is activated on the Transport menu, Cubase sends MMC commands to the hard disk recorder. Cubase can remotely start playback of the recorder. ● The hard disk recorder is using audio clock from Cubase’s audio interface as the speed reference. It is also possible for Cubase to use the audio clock from the recorder. The audio clock is carried over the Lightpipe digital audio connection that also carries audio signals.
Synchronization Working with VST System Link machine). VST System Link can send its networking signal over any type of digital audio cable, including S/PDIF, ADAT, TDIF, or AES, as long as each computer in the system is equipped with a suitable ASIO compatible audio interface. Linking up 2 or more computers gives you vast possibilities: ● Dedicate one computer to running VST instruments while recording audio tracks on another.
Synchronization Working with VST System Link If a card has more than one set of inputs and outputs, choose whichever one that suits you – for simplicity usually the first set is best. Synchronization Before you proceed, you need to make sure that the clock signals on your ASIO cards are synchronized correctly. This is essential when cabling any kind of digital audio system, not just VST System Link.
Synchronization Working with VST System Link VST System Link and latency The general definition of latency is the amount of time it takes any system to respond to whatever messages are sent to it. For example, if your system’s latency is high and you play VST instruments in realtime, you will get a noticeable delay between when you press a key and when you hear the sound of the VST instrument. Nowadays, most ASIO-compatible audio cards are capable of operating with very low latencies.
Synchronization Activating VST System Link NOTE From this point on in this chapter, we refer to the busses connected to the digital inputs and outputs as “VST System Link busses”. Settings for the audio hardware When you exchange VST System Link data between computers, it is important that the digital information is not changed in any way between the programs.
Synchronization Activating VST System Link 3. Use the ASIO Input and ASIO Output pop-up menus to define which channel is the networking channel. 4. Activate the Active checkbox at the top left of the panel. 5. Repeat the steps above for every computer in the network. RESULT As the computers are made active, you should see the Sending and Receiving indicators flashing on each active computer, and the name of each computer should appear in the list at the bottom of the pane.
Synchronization Activating VST System Link PROCEDURE 1. For all computers, activate the Online checkbox on the VST System Link page. 2. Start playback on one computer to check that the system is working – all computers should start almost instantly and play perfectly in time, with sample-accurate precision. ● The Offset Samples setting allows you to adjust whether one machine will play slightly ahead or behind the rest.
Synchronization Activating VST System Link This allows you to route MIDI tracks to VST instruments running on another computer. RELATED LINKS Application examples on page 956 The “Use Selected ASIO Ports for Data only” setting If you are sending huge amounts of MIDI data at once, there is a small possibility that you might run out of bandwidth on your VST System Link network. This will manifest itself by notes “choking” or timing becoming erratic.
Synchronization Activating VST System Link 2. On computer 2, route each of the 2 audio tracks to a separate output bus. These should be busses connected to the digital outputs – let’s call them Bus 1 and 2. 3. Route the FX channel track to another VST System Link bus (Bus 3). 4. Route the VST instrument channel to yet another bus (Bus 4). 5. Go back to computer 1 and check the corresponding 4 VST System Link input busses.
Synchronization Activating VST System Link If you have lots of hardware inputs and outputs on your ASIO cards, you do not have to send audio via the chain at all, but can transmit it directly to the master mix computer via one or more of its other hardware inputs. For example, if you have a Nuendo Digiset interface or 9652 card on computer 1, you could use ADAT cable 1 for networking, ADAT cable 2 as a direct audio input from computer 2, and ADAT cable 3 as a direct audio input from computer 3.
Synchronization Activating VST System Link Creating a virtual effect rack The effect sends for an audio channel in Cubase can either be routed to an FX channel track or to any activated group or output bus. This allows you to use a separate computer as a “virtual effect rack”. PROCEDURE 1. On computer 2 (the machine you will use as effect rack), add a new stereo audio track. You cannot use an FX channel track in this case, since the track must have an audio input. 2.
Video Cubase supports the integration of video files in your project. You can play back video files in various formats and via different output devices from within Cubase, extract the audio material from a video file, and edit your music to the video. Video File Compatibility When working on a project involving a video file, you must make sure that the video file type works on your system.
Video Frame Rates Frame Rates Cubase supports different video and film frame rates. Frame rate (speed) Regardless of the frame counting system, the actual speed at which frames of video go by in real time is the true frame rate. Cubase supports the following frame rates: 23.9 fps (Cubase Pro only) This frame rate is used for film that is being transferred to NTSC video and must be slowed down for a 2-3 pull-down telecine transfer. It is also used for the type of HD video referred to as 24 p.
Video Video Output Devices Video Output Devices Cubase supports several video output devices. Viewing video files onscreen in the Video Player window may work just fine for many applications, but often it is necessary to display video in a large format for viewing small details and so others involved in the session can also see the video. Cubase provides the ability to use several types of video output devices to accomplish this. Dedicated Video Cards You can use a dedicated video card.
Video Preparations for Creating Video Projects NOTE You can also import video files by dragging them from the MediaBay, the File Explorer/macOS Finder and dropping them in your project. If you want Cubase to automatically extract the audio, activate Extract Audio on Import Video File in the Preferences dialog (Video page).
Video Preparations for Video Playback Manually Generating Thumbnail Cache Files You can manually generate thumbnail cache files. This is necessary if a thumbnail cache file could not be generated during import because the folder is write-protected, or because you have edited the file with an external video editing application. PROCEDURE ● Do one of the following: ● In the Pool, right-click the video file and select Generate Thumbnail Cache.
Video Preparations for Video Playback 3 Offset If the video image does not match the audio, you can enter an offset value in milliseconds to specify how much earlier the video should be delivered. This compensates for the display delay. The offset is only used during playback. It is saved globally for each output device and is independent of the project. 4 Active Allows you to activate the device that you want to use for playing back video. Activating a Video Output Device PROCEDURE 1.
Video Editing Video Fullscreen Mode Sets the window to full screen mode. To exit full screen mode, open the context menu and select Exit Fullscreen Mode or press Esc. Quarter Size Reduces the window to a quarter of the actual size. Half Size Reduces the window to half the actual size. Actual Size Sets the window to the size of the video. Double Size Enlarges the window to twice the actual size. Aspect Ratio You can also drag the borders of the Video Player window to resize it.
Video Editing Video Extract Audio from Video You can extract the audio stream of a video file on import. To extract audio from a video file, do one of the following: ● Select File > Import > Video File and activate Extract Audio from Video in the dialog. ● Select Media > Extract Audio from Video File, and select the video file in the file dialog. ● Select File > Import > Audio from Video File. This creates an audio clip in the Pool, but does not add any events to the Project window.
Exchanging Files with Other Applications OMF Files (Cubase Pro only) Open Media Framework Interchange (OMFI) is a platform-independent file format that allows you to transfer digital media between different applications. Cubase can import and export OMF files. Importing OMF Files PROCEDURE 1. Select File > Import > OMF. 2. In the file dialog, select the OMF file and click Open. 3. Optional: If a project is open, choose if you want to create a new project.
Exchanging Files with Other Applications OMF Files (Cubase Pro only) OMF Import Options Import Allows you to select a track for import. Type Shows the media type of the track. Track Name Shows the track name. Select All Tracks Selects all tracks for import. Import All Media Files Imports media files that are not referenced by events. Import Clip Gain as Automation Imports volume automation and envelopes of the volume automation track of each track.
Exchanging Files with Other Applications OMF Files (Cubase Pro only) 4. In the file dialog, specify a name and location. 5. Click Save. RESULT The OMF file is exported. It contains or references all audio files that are played in the project, including fade and edit files. Unused audio files that are referenced in the Pool, or any MIDI data are not contained in the file. Video files are not included. OMF Export Options Export Allows you to select a track for export. Track Name Shows the track name.
Exchanging Files with Other Applications OMF Files (Cubase Pro only) Copy Media Allows you to create copies of all the media files. By default, the copied audio files are placed in a subdirectory in the export destination folder. To specify a different location for the copied files, use the Media Destination Path field. Consolidate Events Allows you to copy only the portions of audio files that are used in the project.
ReWire Introduction ReWire is a special protocol for streaming audio between two computer applications. Developed by Propellerhead Software and Steinberg, ReWire provides the following possibilities and features: ● Realtime streaming of up to 256 (Cubase Artist: 128) separate audio channels, at full bandwidth, from the synthesizer application into the mixer application. In this case, the mixer application is of course Cubase. An example of a synthesizer application is Propellerhead Software’s Reason.
ReWire Activating ReWire channels RELATED LINKS Activating ReWire channels on page 971 Quitting a ReWire session When you are finished, you also need to quit the applications in a special order. PROCEDURE 1. First quit the synthesizer application. 2. Then quit Cubase. Launching both programs without using ReWire We cannot think of any scenario, in which you would need to run Cubase and the synthesizer application simultaneously on the same computer, without using ReWire, but you can. PROCEDURE 1.
ReWire How the ReWire channels are handled Basic transport controls When you run ReWire, the transports in the two programs are completely linked. It does not matter in which program you play, stop, fast forward or rewind. However, recording (if applicable) is still completely separate in the two applications. Loop settings If there is a loop or cycle facility in the synthesizer application, that loop will be completely linked to the cycle in Cubase.
ReWire Considerations and limitations the synthesizer application via MIDI from Cubase, using it as one or several separate MIDI sound sources. The MIDI outputs for a Reason song. Here, each output goes directly to a device in the Reason rack. ● The number and configuration of MIDI outputs depends on the synthesizer application. Considerations and limitations Sample rates Synthesizer applications may be limited to audio playback in certain sample rates.
Key Commands Key commands are assigned to most of main menus and functions in Cubase. They are stored as global Cubase preferences that are used for all your projects. You can view and add key commands in the Key Commands dialog. Key command assignments are also shown in the tooltips. Tooltips that show an exclamation mark at the end have no key command assigned yet. You can save key commands settings as a key commands file, which is stored separately and can be imported into any project.
Key Commands Searching for Key Commands NOTE You can set up several different key commands for the same function. Adding a key command to a function that already has another key command will not replace the key command previously defined for the function. Searching for Key Commands You can search for key commands. This is useful, if you want to know which key command is assigned to a certain function in Cubase. PROCEDURE 1. Select File > Key Commands. 2.
Key Commands Saving Key Commands Presets NOTE Commands are added after the selected command in the list. This allows you to specify the order of commands of a macro. 8. Click OK. RESULT All macros are available in the Macros submenu of the Edit menu. To remove a command from the macro, select it in the Macros list and click Delete. Similarly, to remove an entire macro, select it in the Macros list and click Delete. AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK You can also assign key commands to a macro.
Key Commands Importing Key Command Settings Importing Key Command Settings You can import key commands settings that you saved with an earlier program version. PROCEDURE 1. Select File > Key Commands. 2. In the Presets section, click Import Key Command File. 3. In the file dialog, select the file that you want to import. You can import key commands files with the file extension .key or macro commands files with the file extension .mac. 4. Click Open. RESULT The file is imported.
Key Commands The Default Key Commands The Default Key Commands The default key commands are arranged in categories. NOTE When the On-Screen Keyboard is displayed, the usual key commands are blocked because they are reserved for the On-Screen Keyboard. The only exceptions are: Ctrl/Cmd-S (Save), Num * (Start/Stop Record), Space (Start/Stop Playback), Num 1(Jump to left locator), Delete or Backspace (Delete), Num / (Cycle on/off), F2 (Show/Hide Transport panel), and Alt-K (Show/Hide On-Screen Keyboard).
Key Commands The Default Key Commands Option Key command On-Screen Keyboard Alt-K Video Player F8 VST Instruments F11 Direct Offline Processing Category Option Key command Direct Offline Processing F7 Edit Category Option Key command Activate/Deactivate Focused Object Alt-A Auto-Scroll On/Off F Copy Ctrl/Cmd-C Cut Ctrl/Cmd-X Cut Time Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-X Delete Delete or Backspace Delete Time Shift-Backspace Duplicate Ctrl/Cmd-D Expand/Reduce Alt-E Find Track/Channel Ctrl/Cmd-F
Key Commands The Default Key Commands Option Key command Lock Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-L Move to Cursor Ctrl/Cmd-L Move to Front (Uncover) U Mute M Mute Events Shift-M Mute/Unmute Objects Alt-M Open Ctrl/Cmd-E Paste Ctrl/Cmd-V Paste at Origin Alt-V Paste Relative to Cursor Shift-V Paste Time Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-V Primary Parameter: Decrease Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-Down Arrow Primary Parameter: Increase Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-Up Arrow Record Enable R Redo Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-Z Repeat Ctrl/Cmd-K Right Selection
Key Commands The Default Key Commands Option Key command Split Range Shift-X Stationary Cursor Alt-C Undo Ctrl/Cmd-Z Ungroup Ctrl/Cmd-U Unlock Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-U Unmute Events Shift-U Write W Editors Category Option Key command Edit In-Place Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-I Open Score Editor Ctrl/Cmd-R Open/Close Editor Return File Category Option Key command Close Ctrl/Cmd-W New Ctrl/Cmd-N Open Ctrl/Cmd-O Quit Ctrl/Cmd-Q Save Ctrl/Cmd-S Save As Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-S Save New Version Ctrl/C
Key Commands The Default Key Commands Media Category Option Key command Open MediaBay F5 Open/Close Attribute Inspector Ctrl-Alt-Num6 Open/Close Favorites Ctrl-Alt-Num8 Open/Close File Browser Ctrl-Alt-Num4 Open/Close Filters Ctrl-Alt-Num5 Open/Close Previewer Ctrl-Alt-Num2 Preview Cycle On/Off Shift-Num / Preview Start Shift-Enter Preview Stop Shift-Num 0 Search MediaBay Shift-F5 MIDI Category Option Key command Show/Hide Controller Lanes Alt-L MixConsole History Category Option
Key Commands The Default Key Commands Option Key command Add Left: Shift-Left Arrow Expand/Undo selection in the Project window/ Key Editor to the left Shift-Right Arrow Add Right: Expand/Undo selection in the Project window/ Key Editor to the right Shift-Up Arrow Add Up: Expand/Undo selection in the Project window to the top/Move selected event in the Key Editor up one octave End Bottom: Select bottom track in the track list Down Arrow Down: Select next in the Project window/Move selected event
Key Commands The Default Key Commands Option Key command Left Ctrl/Cmd-Right Arrow Right Ctrl/Cmd-Right Arrow Start Left Alt-Left Arrow Start Right Alt-Right Arrow Project Category Option Key command Open Browser Ctrl/Cmd-B Open Markers Ctrl/Cmd-M Open Pool Ctrl/Cmd-P Open Tempo Track Ctrl/Cmd-T Remove Selected Tracks Shift-Delete Setup Shift-S Quantize Category Option Key command Quantize Q Set Insert Length Category Option Key command 1/1 Alt-1 1/2 Alt-2 1/4 Alt-3 1/8
Key Commands The Default Key Commands Option Key command 1/64 Alt-7 1/128 Alt-8 Toggle Dotted Alt-.
Key Commands The Default Key Commands Option Key command Previous Version Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-G Transport Category Option Key command Activate Metronome C Activate Punch In I Activate Punch Out O Cycle Num / Enter Left Locator Shift-L Enter Project Cursor Position Shift-P Enter Punch In Position Shift-I Enter Punch Out Position Shift-O Enter Right Locator Shift-R Enter Tempo Shift-T Enter Time Signature Shift-C Exchange Time Formats .
Key Commands The Default Key Commands Option Key command Locate Next Marker Shift-N Locate Previous Event B Locate Previous Hitpoint Alt-B Locate Previous Marker Shift-B Locate Selection Start L Loop Selection Alt-P Nudge Cursor Left Ctrl/Cmd-Num - Nudge Cursor Right Ctrl/Cmd-Num + Panel (Transport panel) F2 Play Selection Range Alt-Space Recall Cycle Marker 1 to 9 Shift-Num 1 to Num 9 Record Num * Retrospective MIDI Record Shift-Num * Rewind Num - Set Left Locator to Project
Key Commands The Default Key Commands Option Key command To Marker 2 Shift-2 To Marker 3 to 9 Num 3 to 9 or Shift-3 to 9 Use External Synchronization Alt-Shift-T Use Tempo Track T Window Zones Category Option Key command Show/Hide Left Zone Ctrl/Cmd-Alt-L; Alt-I Show/Hide Right Zone Ctrl/Cmd-Alt-R Show/Hide Lower Zone Ctrl/Cmd-Alt-E Show/Hide Transport Zone Ctrl/Cmd-Alt-T Show Previous Tab Ctrl/Cmd-Alt-Left Arrow Show Next Tab Ctrl/Cmd-Alt-Right Arrow Show Previous Page Ctrl/Cmd-Al
Key Commands Setting Up Tool Modifier Keys Workspaces Category Option Key command New Ctrl/Cmd-Num 0 No Workspace Alt-Num 0 Update Workspace Alt-U Workspace 1-9 Alt-Num 1-9 Workspace X Ctrl/Cmd-Alt-Num 0 Zoom Category Option Key command Zoom Full Shift-F Zoom In H Zoom In Tracks Ctrl/Cmd-Down Arrow Zoom In Vertically Shift-H Zoom Out G Zoom Out Tracks Ctrl/Cmd-Up Arrow Zoom Out Vertically Shift-G Zoom to Event Shift-E Zoom to Selection Alt-S Zoom Tracks Exclusive Ctrl/Cmd-A
Key Commands Setting Up Tool Modifier Keys 2. Select an option in the Categories list, and locate the action for which you want to edit the modifier key. 3. In the Action list, select the action. 4. Hold down the desired modifier keys and click Assign. NOTE If the modifier keys you pressed are already assigned to another tool, you will be asked whether you want to overwrite them. If you do, this will leave the other tool without any modifier keys assigned. 5. Click OK.
Customizing In Cubase you can organize windows and dialogs in workspaces, set up the appearance of specific elements, customize the colors, and save program settings as profiles.
Customizing Workspaces Workspace Types You can create different workspace types. Global workspace Allows you to save a specific layout of dialogs and windows for all projects on your computer. Global workspaces are indicated by the letter G on your Workspaces menu. Project workspace Allows you to save a specific layout of dialogs and windows that is saved with your current project. This allows you to open your project layout on other computers.
Customizing Workspaces If you want to open the original layout setting of a project, you have the following options: ● Select the project’s original layout from the project workspaces on the Workspaces menu or in the Workspace Organizer. ● In the Preferences dialog (General page), select Never from the Open Projects in Last Used View menu. This opens all external projects using their original layout. However, this may lead to a modification of your custom layout.
Customizing Using the Setup Options Workspaces Organizer The Workspaces Organizer allows you to manage the existing workspaces. To open the Workspaces Organizer, click Workspaces > Organize. The Workspaces Organizer displays the global workspaces and the project workspaces in separate lists. Every workspace has an assigned key command that lets you switch views quickly. Moving or deleting workspaces within the lists changes the key command assignments.
Customizing Using the Setup Options ● Toolbars ● Inspector Setup Context Menus Setup context menus are available for the Transport panel, the toolbars, the info lines, or the Inspector. ● To open the setup context menus, right-click the corresponding element. ● NOTE You can also click the corresponding setup buttons to open the context menu. The following general options are available on the setup context menus: ● Show All makes all items visible.
Customizing Customizing the Meter Colors The left section of the dialog shows the visible items, the right section shows the hidden items. ● To change the current show/hide status of an item, select it in one section and use the arrow buttons in the middle of the dialog to move it to the other section. ● To reorder the items list, select an item in the list of Visible Items and click Move Up or Move Down. ● To name the current configuration and save it as a preset, click Store in the Presets section.
Customizing Customizing the User Interface Colors 2. 3. Do one of the following: ● Click Channel Meter to make settings for the channel meter. ● Click Master Meter to make settings for the master meter. Do one of the following: ● Double-click a level position to the right of the meter scale and enter the level (dB) value to specify the level for a color change. To enter dB values less than zero, add a minus sign before the entered number.
Customizing Color Selector Pane 2. Do one of the following: ● Activate a default color scheme by clicking on it. ● Click Choose Custom Color and the color selector pane to select a new color. RESULT The color scheme is instantly applied. RELATED LINKS Color Selector Pane on page 998 Color Selector Pane Color Selectors Allow you to select a color. Context Menu Allows you to copy, paste or reset colors. Current Color/New Color Shows the current color and the new color.
Customizing Coloring Tracks, Parts, or Events Manually Coloring Tracks, Parts, or Events Manually You can apply colors to individual tracks and events/parts for an easier overview in the Project window. PROCEDURE 1. 2. In the Project window, do one of the following: ● To change the color of an event or part, select it. ● To change the color of a track, select the track and deselect all its events or parts. On the toolbar, select the Color tool, click again, and select a color from the pop-up menu.
Customizing Colorizing Track Controls The following options are available: Use Default Track Color The default color (gray) is assigned. Use Previous Track Color Analyzes the color of the selected track and uses the same color for the new track. Use Previous Track Color +1 Analyzes the color of the selected track and uses the color that comes next in the color palette for the new track. Use Last Applied Color Uses the color that is selected in the Select Colors pop-up menu.
Customizing Project Colors Dialog 3. Activate Colorize Only Folder Track Controls. 4. Click OK. 5. In the track list, select the folder track that you want to colorize. 6. On the Project window toolbar, select the Color Tool and click again to select a color. RESULT Only the folder track controls are colorized. Project Colors Dialog The Project Colors dialog allows you to set up a different set of colors for the tracks, events or parts.
Customizing Profiles (Cubase Pro only) Reset Selected Color Resets the selected color to the factory settings. Increase/Reduce Intensity of all Colors Increases or reduces the intensity of all colors. Increase/Reduce Brightness of all Colors Increases or reduces the brightness of all colors. Save Current Set as Program Defaults Saves the current set of colors as default. Load Program Defaults to Current Set Applies the default set of colors.
Customizing Profiles (Cubase Pro only) ● Crossfade presets ● Key commands All changes done for these settings are saved in the active profile. IMPORTANT The following is not included in profiles: Settings in the Studio Setup dialog and in the Audio Connections window, presets in the Control Room tab of the Audio Connections window, track presets, plug-in presets, and project templates.
Customizing Profiles (Cubase Pro only) Creating Profiles The Profile Manager allows you to create a new profile that is based on the factory default settings. PROCEDURE 1. Select File > Profile Manager. 2. In the Profile Manager, click New. 3. In the Add New Profile dialog, enter a profile name and click OK. RESULT The new profile is added to the list. AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK Activate the new profile to apply the settings.
Customizing Profiles (Cubase Pro only) Renaming Profiles The Profile Manager allows you to rename profiles. PROCEDURE 1. Select File > Profile Manager. 2. In the Profile Manager, select the profile that you want to rename. 3. Click Rename. 4. In the Rename Profile dialog, enter a profile name and click OK. Deleting Profiles The Profile Manager allows you to delete profiles. PREREQUISITE You have saved at least two profiles. NOTE You cannot delete the active profile. PROCEDURE 1.
Customizing Where are the Settings Stored? Importing Profiles The Profile Manager allows you to import profiles. PROCEDURE 1. Select File > Profile Manager. 2. In the Profile Manager, click Import. 3. In the file dialog, select the profile that you want to import. 4. Click Open. RESULT The imported profile is added to the list of available profiles. AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK Activate the new profile to apply the settings.
Customizing Where are the Settings Stored? When your previous Cubase version is older than Cubase 6, its settings are discarded, and the default settings of the new version of Cubase are used. Disabling the Preferences Sometimes you might experience odd program behaviour that can be due to inconsistent preferences settings. In such a case, you should save your project and relaunch Cubase. You can disable or delete the current preferences settings, and load the factory defaults instead. PROCEDURE 1.
Optimizing Optimizing Audio Performance This section gives you some hints and tips on how to get the most out of your Cubase system, performance-wise. NOTE For details and current information on system requirements and hardware properties refer to the Steinberg web site. Performance Aspects Tracks and Effects The faster your computer, the more tracks, effects, and EQ you are able to play. Exactly what constitutes a fast computer is almost a science in itself, but some hints are given below.
Optimizing Optimizing Audio Performance This is especially true when using Cubase for Windows: ● Under Windows, ASIO drivers written specifically for the hardware are more efficient than the Generic Low Latency ASIO Driver and produce shorter latency times. ● Under macOS, audio hardware with properly written macOS (Core Audio) drivers can be very efficient and produce very low latency times. However, there are additional features only available with ASIO drivers, such as the ASIO Positioning Protocol.
Optimizing Optimizing Audio Performance Average load Shows how much of the available CPU power is used for audio processing. Real-time peak Shows the processing load in the realtime path of the audio engine. The higher this value, the higher the risk that dropouts occur. Overload indicator The overload indicator to the right of the real-time peak indicator and the average load indicator displays overloads of the average or real-time indicator.
Optimizing Optimizing Audio Performance Activating the ASIO-Guard PROCEDURE 1. Select Studio > Studio Setup. 2. In the Devices list, select VST Audio System. 3. Activate the Activate ASIO-Guard option. NOTE This option is only available if you activate Multi Processing. 4. Select an ASIO-Guard Level. The higher the level, the higher the processing stability and audio processing performance. However, higher levels also lead to an increased ASIO-Guard latency and memory usage.
Preferences The Preferences dialog provides options and settings that control the global behavior of the program. Preferences Dialog The Preferences dialog is divided into a navigation list and a settings page. Clicking one of the entries in the navigation list opens a settings page. ● To open the Preferences dialog, select File > Preferences. In addition to the settings, the dialog provides the following options: Preference Presets Allows you to select a saved preference preset.
Preferences Preferences Dialog Store marked preferences only Allows you to select which pages are included in the preset. Help Opens the dialog help. Defaults Resets the options on the active page to their default settings. Apply Applies any changes that you have made without closing the dialog. OK Applies any changes that you have made and closes the dialog. Cancel Closes the dialog without saving any changes. Saving a Preference Preset You can save complete or partial preference settings as presets.
Preferences Editing RESULT Your settings are now available from the Preferences Presets pop-up menu. Editing ‘Edit Solo’/’Record in MIDI Editors’ follow focus If this option is activated, and Record in Editor or Solo Editor is activated in a MIDI editor, these options follow the focus. That is, if the Project window gets the focus, Record in Editor and Solo Editor are suspended in the MIDI editor. Default Track Time Type This allows you to specify the default track time type for new tracks.
Preferences Editing Lock Event Attributes This setting determines which properties are affected when you lock an event (by selecting Lock from the Edit menu). You can select any combination of the following 3 options: ● Position If this is locked, the event cannot be moved. ● Size If this is locked, the event cannot be resized. ● Other If this is locked, all other editing of the event is disabled. This includes adjusting the fades and event volume, processing, etc.
Preferences Editing Editing - Audio Treat Muted Audio Events like Deleted If you have 2 overlapping audio events in your project and you mute the top one (the event you hear during playback), playback of the other (obscured) event will still only start at the end of the overlapping section. If this is not what you want, Treat Muted Audio Events like Deleted allows you to immediately play the obscured event when muting the top event.
Preferences Editing ● MPEX – Preview Quality Use this mode only for preview purposes. ● MPEX – Mix Fast This mode is a very fast mode for preview. This works best with composite music signals (mono or stereo material). ● MPEX – Solo Fast Use this mode for single instruments (monophonic material) and voice. ● MPEX – Solo Musical Same as above but higher quality. ● MPEX – Poly Fast Use this for processing monophonic and polyphonic material.
Preferences Editing In this mode, clicking a value box will open it for editing by typing. ● Increment/Decrement on Left/Right-Click In this mode, you can click with the left or right mouse button to decrease or increase the value. To edit values by typing in this mode, please double-click. Under macOS, right-clicking is the same as Ctrl/Cmd-clicking. We recommend that you use a 2-button mouse and set up the right button to generate a Ctrl/ Cmd-click.
Preferences Editing Legato Overlap Determines the result of the Legato function on the MIDI menu. ● If Legato Overlap is set to 0 Ticks, the Legato function extends each selected note so that it reaches the next note exactly. ● Setting Legato Overlap to a positive value causes the notes to overlap by the specified number of ticks. ● Setting Legato Overlap to a negative value makes the Legato function leave a slight gap between the notes.
Preferences Editing Sync Selection in Project Window and MixConsole If this option is activated, and you select a track in the Project window, the corresponding channel is automatically selected in the MixConsole and vice versa. This can be a very handy feature when making detailed settings for audio and MIDI channels: open the Channel Settings window for a track by clicking its edit button, and position it so that it can remain open without obstructing the view.
Preferences Editors ● To open the context menu instead of the toolbox, press any modifier key when right-clicking. Cross Hair Cursor This allows you to set up a cross-hair cursor when working in the event display and editors, facilitating navigation and editing, especially when arranging in large projects. You can set up the colors for the line and the mask of the cross-hair cursor, and define its width.
Preferences Event Display Open Editor Commands open Editors in a Window/in Lower Zone Determines where an editor is opened when you use an open command from the Audio or MIDI menu or the corresponding key commands. Event Display The Event Display section contains several settings for customizing the display in the Project window. Show Event Names Determines whether the names of parts and events are shown.
Preferences Event Display Waveform Outline Intensity Increases or decreases the intensity of the waveform outline. Fade Handle Brightness Increases or decreases the brightness of the set fade lines within audio events. Background Color Modulation If this option is activated, the backgrounds of audio waveforms reflect the waveform dynamics. This is especially useful to get an overview when working with small track heights.
Preferences Event Display ● Click the Type and Tension fields and enter your custom symbol. NOTE You must define custom symbols for each set of tensions. ● The Result field shows how the chord will be displayed. ● The Remove Custom Chord button allows you to remove the custom chord symbol that is selected in the list.
Preferences General Colorize Only Folder Track Controls Activate this to restrict the effect of the Colorize Track Control function to folder tracks only. This is useful in projects with a large number of tracks and folder tracks. Default Track Name Width Allows you to determine the default name width for all track types.
Preferences MIDI Maximum Undo Steps Allows you to specify the number of undo levels. Run Setup on Create New Project If this option is activated, Cubase automatically displays the Project Setup dialog every time you create a new project. This allows you to specify the basic project configuration. Open Projects in Last Used View Allows you to select whether projects are opened using their original window layout and settings, or using the view that you last used on your computer.
Preferences MIDI Never Reset Chased Controllers If this option is activated, controllers are not reset to 0 when you stop playback or move to a new position in the project. Length Adjustment This allows you to enter a length adjustment value in ticks by which the notes that have the same pitch and MIDI channel are adjusted. This ensures that there is always a short time between the end of one note and the start of another.
Preferences MIDI MIDI - MIDI File Export Options These options allow you to specify what data is included in exported MIDI files. Export Inspector Patch If this option is activated, the MIDI patch settings in the Inspector - Bank Select and Program Select (used for selecting sounds in the connected MIDI instrument) are included as MIDI Bank Select and Program Change events in the MIDI file.
Preferences MIDI Export Markers If this option is activated, any markers you have added will be included in the MIDI file as Standard MIDI File Marker events. Export as Type 0 If this option is activated, the MIDI file will be of Type 0 (all data on a single track, but on different MIDI channels). If you do not check this option, the MIDI file will be of Type 1 (data on separate tracks).
Preferences MIDI Import to Left Locator Aligns the imported MIDI file at the position of the left locator. If this option is deactivated, MIDI files start at the project start position. If you choose to have a new project created automatically, the MIDI file always starts at the project start position. Import Markers Imports Standard MIDI File Markers in the file and converts them to Cubase markers.
Preferences MediaBay Controller Allows you to prevent certain MIDI controller types from being recorded or thruput. To filter out a controller type, select it from the list at the top of the section and click “Add”. It will appear in the list below. To remove a controller type from the list (allow it to be recorded and thruput), select it in the lower list and click “Remove”.
Preferences Record Metering - Appearance On this page you can assign colors to level meter values to quickly identify what levels are reached. You can adjust the colors for the channel meter or the master meter. For the master meter you can only make changes for the Digital Scale scaling mode. Changes take effect when you click Apply or OK.
Preferences Record Create Audio Images during Record If this option is activated, Cubase calculates the waveform image and displays it during the actual recording process. NOTE This realtime calculation uses some extra processing power. Record - Audio - Broadcast Wave This page allows you to specify the Description, Author, and Reference text strings that are embedded in recorded Broadcast Wave files.
Preferences Scores (Cubase Pro only) Only controller data is replaced, not notes. ● All Replace mode works as usual - notes and controllers are replaced when recording. Scores (Cubase Pro only) This page allows you to make settings for the Score Editor. Please select one of the available entries. Scores - Colors for Additional Meanings Here, you can specify different colors to identify non-standard elements in the score. ● Click in the Active column to activate this function for the respective element.
Preferences Scores (Cubase Pro only) “Apply” closes Property Windows Normally, when you open a Property window or any non-modal score dialog (e. g. Set Note Info or Score Settings), you can adjust the settings and click Apply to apply the changes without closing the window. If this option is activated, clicking Apply closes the window. Show Position Cursor If this option is activated the Project cursor position is shown as a vertical line in the score.
Preferences Transport Computer Keyboard Note Entry: Use On-Screen Keyboard Keys If this option is activated, you can insert notes by pressing the keys that correspond to the note on the On-Screen Keyboard (qwerty). Default Number of Bars per Staff This is used in 2 cases: ● In Edit Mode to set how many bars are shown across the page. ● In Page Mode to decide how many bars there are shown across the page in a new layout.
Preferences User Interface If this option is deactivated, audio playback will continue until you release Rewind or Fast Forward. Wind Speed Options These options affect the fast forward/rewind speed. ● If Adjust to Zoom is activated, the wind speed will be adapted to the horizontal zoom factor. If you zoom in very close for detailed editing, you probably do not want to have a high fast forward/rewind speed. Because of this, the Speed Factor does not have any effect in this mode.
Preferences VST ● Click one of the colors in the Choose Color Scheme section to apply a predefined color. ● Click the field in the Choose Custom Color section to open the color selector pane and select a custom color. Custom Colors Allows you to adjust the colors for the Project window and the editors and their specific elements. Track Type Default Colors Allows you to adjust the colors for the different track types.
Preferences VST to it. Channels that were muted prior to the group channel being muted will not remember their mute status and will be unmuted when the group channel is unmuted. NOTE Group Channels: Mute Sources as well does not affect how mute automation is written. Writing mute automation on a group channel only affects the group channel and not channels routed to it. When writing the automation you will see the other channels being muted when this option is checked.
Preferences VST (listening to the input signal from an external mixer, for example), select the “Manual” mode and keep all audio monitor buttons turned off in Cubase. Warn on Processing Overloads When you activate this option, a warning message is displayed as soon as the CPU overload indicator (on the Transport panel) lights up during recording.
Preferences VariAudio (Cubase Pro only) VST - Control Room (Cubase Pro only) This page contains settings for the Control Room. Show Control Room Volume in Transport Panel If this option is activated, the Transport panel will display the Control Room Volume if the Control Room is enabled. If the Control Room is disabled, the volume of the Main Mix bus will be shown on the Transport panel.
Preferences Video displayed in the future (when editing the pitch or time of audio material that is used several times in one project). To display this message again, and thus be informed whether the audio is used in other places, deactivate this option. Inhibit warning when applying Offline Processes When you are applying offline processes (e. g. with the Envelope or Normalize functions) to audio material that is used in several places in the project, a warning message is shown.
Index A ACID® loops 476 Action Target 882 Length 882 Name 884 Position 882 Set Color 884 Track Operation 883 Trim 884 Activate Project 91 Activate Read/Write for all tracks 611 Activate tempo track 889 Active TrackVersion 175 Adapt to Zoom 75 Grid type 81 ADAT Lightpipe 941 Add Track 577 Add Track dialog 152 Adding chords 816, 819 AES/SPDIF Digital Audio 941 AES17 Meters 384 AIFC files Exporting 929 AIFF files Exporting 930 Algorithms Limitations 437 Time-stretching 435 Aligning file and project attributes
Index Externally clocked 16 Audio Part Editor Lower zone 65 Audio parts Auditioning 191 Creating 190 Editing in Project Browser 910 Audio performance Optimizing 1008 Audio Pre-Record Seconds 1032 Audio processing Pool 542 Audio Processing Direct Offline Processing 416 Audio Recording 243 Downmix 245 Pre-Record Time 245 Preparations 243 RAM Requirements 243 Record File Format 242 Record Folder 242 Record Modes 244 Recovering 246 Recovering recordings 245 Undo 245 With Effects 244 Audio regions About 188 Aud
Index Background Color Modulation 1022 Bank assignments 678 Basic chord types Applying to selected notes 721 Beat Calculator 897, 897, 898 Bézier curves Automation 605 Bounce MIDI 689 Bounce Selection 187 Braces Showing in Edit Mode 1034 Broadcast Wave files Exporting 928 Broadcast Wave Files Embedded information 1033 Buffer Settings 1009 Bulk Dumps 779 Busses Adding 29 Child busses 29 Bypass VST MultiPanner 592 C Cadence mode Chord Assistant 817 Complexity filters 817 Channel linking 332 Channel names Se
Index Track controls 129 Chord voicing Changing 719 Chords Changing pitch 719 Changing voicing 719 Editing 720 Inserting 721 Cleanup 254 Click Pattern 224 Setting up 226 Signature events 226 Click Pattern Editor 225 Click Sounds Custom Sounds 230 Click Track Render 232 Clip editing Pool 539 Clips Renaming 532 Clock sources 941 Color Selector Pane 998 Coloring Note events 698 Tracks 161 Colorize Only Folder Track Controls 1024 Colorize Track Controls 1024 Colors Events 999 Parts 999 Preferences 1037 Project
Index Editor 732 Presets 725, 725 Selecting event types 724 Setting up as preset 725 Controllers Selecting 733 Showing 1024 Convert to Real Copy 200 Converting chord events to MIDI 825 Create Audio Images During Record 1032 Create Chord Symbols 829 Create MIDI track when loading VSTi 1040 Creating gaps Automation 610 Cross-hair cursor 82, 1020 Crossfades Auto Zoom 283 Auto-Scroll 283 Creating 282 Editing in dialog 283 Equal Gain 283 Equal Power 283 Presets 283 Simple Crossfade Editor 283 Symmetric Fades 28
Index Divider Project window toolbar 44 Double-Click on staff flips between full score/part 1034 Double-Click Symbol to get Draw tool 1034 Drag Delay 1014 Draw tool Drawing note events 715 Drum Editor 746 Controller display 757 Info line 755 Lower zone 65 Note display 757 Status line 755 Toolbar 749 Drum maps 763, 766 Key Editor 721 Selecting 760 Setting up 764, 765 Drum sounds 758 Changing the Note Length 761 Setup 758 Visibility 759 Drum Sounds Settings 765 Drum Visibility Agents 749, 759 Dump request me
Index Editing 191 Envelopes 287 Gluing 198 Group editing 201 Grouping 201, 201 Locking 202, 203 Move to 194 Moving 193 Moving via Info Line 194 Moving with Nudge 194 Moving with Object Selection 194 Muting 203 Normal resizing 195 Pasting 198 Removing 193 Renaming 195 Repeating 199 Resizing 195 Resizing with Object Selection 195, 196, 196 Resizing with Scrub 197 Resizing with Trim 196 Sizing Applies Time Stretch 196 Sizing Moves Contents 196 Sliding the contents 200 Splitting 197 Exclusive Device Ports for
Index Flac files Exporting 933 FLAC files Importing 256 Flattening Arranger track 292, 294 Realtime Processing 482, 502 Folder parts 190 Folder tracks 135 Displaying events 168 Inspector 135 Modifying event display 168 Track controls 136 Follow Chord Track 827 Auto 827 Chords 827 Directly 828 Scale events 828 Single Voice 827 Synchronizing Track Data 828 Using 826 Frame count 939 Frame rates Mismatch 961 Synchronization 939 Video 961 Freeze VST instruments 629 Freeze MIDI Modifiers 669 Freeze Trim Automati
Index Independent Track Loop MIDI 703 Indicate Transpositions Key Editor 303 Info line Editing articulations 795 Project window 49 Score Editor 738 Transpose 304 Inhibit warning when applying Offline Processes 1041 Inhibit warning when changing the Sample Data 1041 Initial value Automation 610 Input busses Adding 29 Renaming 27 Routing 344 Surround configurations 587 Input gain MixConsole 346 Input levels 12 Input ports 17 Inputs Meter position options 340 Insert effects 390 About 392 Adding to busses 393
Index Linear Time Base 888 Link groups 329 Adding channels 332 Assigning VCA faders 367 Changing settings 332 Creating 332 Q-Link 333 Removing channels 333 Removing VCA faders 367 Settings 330 Unlink 332 Link Project and Lower Zone Cursors 67 List Editor 768 Editing events 777, 778 Editing operations 777 Event display 776 Event list 775 Filters bar 774 Inserting events 777 Showing/Hiding events 774 Status line 773 Toolbar 769 Value display 776 Listen MixConsole 338 Live transform Chord track 826 Loading Mu
Index Attributes 567 Defining user attributes 573 Editing attributes 571 Editing attributes of multiple files 572 Favorites 555 File Browser 554 Filters 565, 565, 567, 567 Finding file locations 557 Hiding sections 553 Instrument Presets 578, 578 Key commands 582 Logical Filter 565, 566, 567 Media Type Filter 557 Media Types 558 Navigation controls 553 Previewer 561 Rating filter 559 Refresh Views 555 Related windows 577 Reset Filter 569 Results 556, 556, 557, 561 Scanning 554 Scanning operations 554 Selec
Index MIDI notes Transpose (function) 685 MIDI outputs Send effects 671 MIDI pan MIDI track parameters 663 MIDI parts Creating 190 Editing in Project Browser 910 Handling several 702 Independent Track Loop 703 Processing 697 MIDI Port Setup 247 MIDI ports Setting up 18 MIDI Record Catch Range in ms 1033 MIDI Record Mode 250 MIDI Recording Channel and Output 247 Continuous messages 249 Different types of messages 249 Instruments and channels 246 MIDI Input setting 247 Naming MIDI ports 247 Notes 249 Prepara
Index Musical Mode About 476 Musical Time Base 888 Musical track time base 171 Mute MixConsole 337 Surround channels 598, 598 Transpose track 302 Mute Pre-Send when Mute 1038 Muting events 203 N Navigating MixConsole 363 Never Reset Chased Controllers 1026 Normalize Direct Offline Processing 427 Note Brightness 1024 Note display Drum Editor 757 Enharmonic Shift 744 Key Editor 714 Note events Adding in controller display 725 Coloring 698 Creating in Score Editor 742 Cutting 701 Deleting 701 Drawing with Dr
Index Constant power 588 MixConsole 336 MixConvert 599 Surround 588 VST MultiPanner 588 Part Data Mode 1024 Parts About 186, 189 Editing 191 Folder 190 Sliding the contents 200 Parts Get Track Names 1014 Paste at Origin 198 Paste Relative to Cursor 198 Patch Banks 678 Pattern Chord Pads 847 Pattern Banks Loading in MediaBay 577 Previewing in MediaBay 564 Peak meter display 384 Pedals To note length 691 Performance Aspects 1008 Audio performance 1009 Optimizing 1008 Phase MixConsole 346 Phase Reverse Direct
Index Switching 1004 Project Assistant 86 Project Browser Opening 907 Project Colors Dialog 1001 Project cursor Setting 220 Project Logical Editor About 871 Actions 882, 882, 882, 882, 883, 884, 884, 884 Applying Actions 885 Filter conditions 872, 873, 873, 874, 875, 875, 876, 876, 877, 878, 878, 879, 879, 880, 880 Functions 885 Macros 885 Overview 871 Presets 886 Setting up Key Commands 886 Storing Presets 886 Project Root Key About 298 Assigning to a Project 299 Assigning to Parts or Events 300 Changing
Index R Rack settings 328 Copying 342 Racks Assigning Quick Control parameters 362, 642 MixConsole 342 RAM Recording 243 Range Editing 204 Range Selection tool 204 Creating fades 279 Re-Record Activating 239 Common Record Modes 239, 239 Read automation 601 Real-Time Export 934 Recent projects 91 Record File Format Audio 242 Record Folder Audio 242 Record-Enable allows MIDI Thru 1033 Recording About 236 Activating 237 Common Record Modes 239 Cycle 238 Levels 12 Lock Record 252 Pre-roll and post-roll 238 Rem
Index Sample Editor 456 About 445 Info Line 451 Inspector 452 Lower zone 65 Overview Line 452 Regions 461 Ruler 455 Showing multiple waveforms 456 Snap 463 Toolbar 447 Undo zoom operations 457 Sampler Lower zone 65 Sampler Control 516 Amp section 522 AudioWarp section 520 Envelope editor 523 Filter section 522 Keyboard section 525 Pitch section 521 Playing back samples 526 Root Key 526 Sample editing 525 Sound parameter section 520 Toolbar 517 Transferring samples to VST instruments 527 Waveform display 51
Index Shared Copies Convert to Real Copy 200 Creating 200 Show Scales 822 Show/hide columns Pool 531 Side-chain 404 Ducking delay 405 Effect inputs 392 Inserts rack 347 Trigger signals 406 Side-chain inputs 392 Signature track 144 Inspector 144 Track controls 145 Silence Detecting 438 Direct Offline Processing 431 Inserting 207 Removing 440 Simple Crossfade Editor 283 Single Voice Follow Chord Track 827 Slices About 466 Slider Mode 1017 Smallest Track Height To Show Data 1022 Smallest Track Height To Show
Index Synchronize Plug-in Program Selection to Track Selection 1040 Synchronizing Track Data Follow Chord Track 828 SysEx Changing settings 780 Editing values 781 Messages 778 System component information Exporting 414 Managing system components 414 System Component Information 413 T Tail Direct Offline Processing 422 Tap Tempo 897 Tapemachine Style Monitoring 1038 Template projects 87 Templates Renaming 88 Workspaces 992 Tempo Editing in Project Browser 915 Process Bars 902 Process Tempo 901 Set Definit
Index Track archives Exporting 157 Importing 156 Track Area Width 1024 Track Color Automatic 999 Resetting 999 Track Controls Settings 97 Track Folding 167 Track Height 163 Track Inspector Opening 54 Track list About 45 Dividing 45 Track Name Width 1024 Track Pictures 162 Browser 162 Showing 162 Track Presets About 179 Applying 182, 578 Audio 179 creating 182 Creating 182 Extracting Sounds 184 Instrument 180 Loading 183 Loading in MediaBay 575 Loading Inserts and EQ 184 MIDI 180 Multi-Track 181 Pattern Ban
Index Recording 304 Transposing 302 Treat Muted Audio Events like Deleted 1016 Trim Automation 614 Trim tool Changing event lengths 718 Tuplets Quantizing 270 Type of New Tempo Points 889 U Undoing Edit History 82 Maximum undo steps 83 Maximum Undo Steps 1025 MixConsole parameter changes 321, 325 Offline processing 423, 542 Project window 41 Recording audio 245 Zoom operations 457 Unlock Layout when editing single parts 1034 Use Drum Editor when Drum Map is assigned 1021 Use Up/Down Navigation Commands fo
Index VST plug-ins Installing 637 VST Presets Loading 183 Previewing in MediaBay 563 VST System Link About 947 Activating 951 Connections 948 Latency 950 MIDI 953 Putting computers online 952 Requirements 948 Setting up sync 949 Settings 950 VSTi rack Right zone 69, 70 W Warn before removing modified effects 1040 Warn on Processing Overloads 1038 Warping Algorithm 1016 Wave 64 files Exporting 934 Wave files Exporting 928 Waveform Brightness 1022 Waveform display 456 Sample Editor 456 Waveform Outline Inte
